Manual Operare Valtra T180-t190 PDF

Operator’s manual T180CR, T190CR
Operator's manual T180CR, T190CR
Serial numbers of your tractors
Type plate EEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cab number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tractor number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front axle number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T start7
-1-
Main table of contents
The Operator's Manual is divided into 12 main parts, using the letters A, B, C ... L. These are further sub
divided into number sections. There are four levels of titles. E.g. on the marking D.1.3 the letter D tells that
it is the main part D, Instruments and controls. The first number 1 (see detailed table of contents) tells that
it is the illustration section of the instruments and controls part, etc.
The detailed table of contents provides a lettering, a numbering and page system. The bottom of each page
displays a reference to the main part of the manual it is in.
page no
A Detailed table of contents ...................... 4-6
B Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
C General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 21
D Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 92
E Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 - 100
F Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 - 133
G Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 - 139
H Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 - 155
I Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 - 166
J Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 - 183
K Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . 184 - 220
L Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223
-2-
To the operator
VALTRA T180CR, T190CR

(models may vary in different market areas)
This Operator's Manual is primarily intended for drivers of VALTRA power
shuttle tractors.
The manual contains detailed instructions for driving, operating and
maintaining the tractor. Make sure your new tractor is always handled and
maintained in the correct way which will ensure reliability and provide
economical operation for many years. You can also get more information from
Valtra Internet pages (www.valtra.com) about e.g. how to use the transmission
and driving.
This Operator's Manual is only for agricultural tractors. If the tractor is used for
other applications, it is the responsibility of the owner to ensure compliance
with local regulations. In this case always contact your Valtra dealer first.
Alternative equipment in the book means equipment, which can be selected
when ordering the tractor. This equipment can not easily be fitted at a later
time to the tractor. Extra equipment means the equipment, which can be
bought and mounted at a later time to the tractor.
We recommend that you read the manual thoroughly. Follow the maintenance
program carefully and include the daily maintenance in your normal routine.
Maintenance, repairs and adjustments which are not described in this
Operator's Manual require the use of special tools and exact technical data.
For such work you should contact your dealer who has specially trained
personnel to help you.
Only use genuine Valtra spare parts for optimum performance from your
tractor. You should order spare parts according to the instructions given in the
illustrated parts catalogue.
Due to the continual development of Valtra products, the content of this manual
may not always correspond to the new product. Therefore, we retain the right
to make alterations without prior notification.
Please note: when using the tractor you must always follow all
valid laws and regulations even, if they are not specifically
pointed out in this manual.
Valtra Inc.
-3-
A. Detailed table of contents
Serial numbers of your tractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3. Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Main table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To the operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5. Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
A. Detailed table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6. Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
B. Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7. Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
B 1. Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8. Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
C. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 9. Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . 11 D 2.3.2. Linkage /PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
C 2. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 D 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
C 3. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Drive balance control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C 3.1. Electronic engine management (EEM) . . . . . 16 Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C 3.2. Common Rail system engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C 4. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 D 2.3.2.2. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
C 4.1. HiTech power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 D 2.3.2.3. Rear power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
C 4.3. Power Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 D 2.3.2.4. Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
C 5. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
C 6. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 D 2.3.4. Side pillar control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
C 7. Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 D 2.4. Controls on rear side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
D. Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 D 2.5. Controls on LH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
D 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 D 2.6. Roof console on the front side . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
D 1.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 D 2.7. Roof console on the right side . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
D 1.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 D 2.8. Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
D 1.3. Right- side panel / arm rest controls . . . . . . 24 D 2.9. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
D 1.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 E. Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
D 1.3.2. Linkage/ Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 E 1. Points to note during the first 50 hours running . 93
D 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 E 2. Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
D 1.3.4. Side pillar controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 E 2.1. Normal start/cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
D 1.3.5. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 E 2.2. Starting gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.4. Rear side controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 E 2.3. Starting with an auxiliary battery (jump
D 1.5. Controls on LH side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.6. Front roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 E 3. Driving start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.7. Right hand side roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 E 3.1. Accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
D 1.8. Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 E 4. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 1.9. Other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 E 4.1. HiShift- switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 2. Instruments and controls, more detail . . . . . . . . . 32 E 4.2. Power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
D 2.1. Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 E 4.2.1. Programming of Power Shift . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D 2.2. Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 E 4.3. Automatic traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D 2.2.3. Shuttle- and parking brake lever . . . . . . . 33 E 4.4. Power Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
D 2.2.4. Pre-programming E 4.4.1. Power Shift-automatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
switch of Power Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 E 4.5. Cruise control (Cruise-panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
D 2.2.5. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 E 4.6. Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Service function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 E 4.7. Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Resetting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 E 4.8. Front wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.1. Changing selection of driving start- and E 5. Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
shuttle-automatic ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 E 6. Action to be taken during use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.2. Resetting driving speed / tyre parameters . 44 E 6.1. Permitted driving inclinations for a tractor on a
2.3. Rear PTO engaging speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 slope (continuous driving) to ensure sufficient
2.4. Changing temperature unit of outdoor lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 E 6.2. Using chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.5. Changing driving speed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 E 6.3. Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.6. Calibrating speed sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 E 6.4. Door limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
D 2.2.12. Proline-instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 E 6.5. Rear mudguards adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
D 2.2.12.7. Indicator lights on instrument panel . 53 E 6.6. Front mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
D 2.2.12.8. LCD-display unit (liquid crystal display) in E 6.7. Towing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Proline instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 54 F. Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1. Fixed displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 F 1. Power take-off (PTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2. Displays chosen with change over switch . . 54 F 1.1. Sigma Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3. Proline instrument panel LCD display (liquid F 1.2. Power take-off shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
crystal display) setting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 F 1.3. Proportional ground speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4. Changing the parameters of the Proline F 1.4. Checking the transmission ratio of a PTO driven
instrument panel LCD display (liquid crystal trailer for use with proportional ground
display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 speed PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5. Proline instrument panel graphical display other F 2. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 F 2.1. Trailer socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
D 2.3. Right-side panel / arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 F 3. Three-point linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
D 2.3.1. Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 F 3.1. Lifting links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
D 2.3.1.7. Switch for Power Shift-automatics . . . 65 F 3.2. Check links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
D 2.3.1.10. U-Pilot headland automatics . . . . . . 67 F 3.3. Quick couplings for lower links . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 F 4. Using the hydraulic lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2. Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 F 4.1. Lift/stop/lower switch (Autocontrol switch) . . . 108
A. Detailed table of contents -4-

F 4.1.1. Activating the linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J. Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
F 4.2. Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 J 1. Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
F 4.3. Setting transport height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 2. Maximum permissible front- and rear axle
F 4.4. Floating-position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
F 4.5. Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 3. Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
F 4.6. Lowering speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
F 4.7. Override switch for position control knob = forced J 3.2. Tyre loadings and pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
lowering switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 4. Track widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
F 4.8. Drive balance control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 J 5. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
F 4.9. Slip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 J 5.1. Engine lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
F 5. Auxiliary hydraulic valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 J 5.2. Fuel system and air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
F 5.1. Valve functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 J 5.3. Coolant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F 5.1.1. Position locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 J 6. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F 5.1.2. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 J 7. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F 5.1.3. Valve adjustment to single- action . . . . . 111 J 7.1. Power shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F 5.1.4. Tipping a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 J 7.2. Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F 5.1.5. Summary, valves and couplings . . . . . . . . 112 J 7.3. Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
F 5.2. Return coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 J 7.4. Final drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
F 5.3. Connecting auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . 129 J 7.4.1. Differential lock, rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
F 5.4. Action to be taken during operation . . . . . . . . 129 J 7.5. Speed ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
F 5.5. Hydraulic motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 J 7.6. Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
F 6. Attaching implements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 J 7.6.1. Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal
F 6.1. Using PTO shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 revs (km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
F 7. Ploughing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 J 7.6.2. Proportional ground speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
F 7.1. Recommendations when ploughing with a fully J 7.6.3. Max. power take-off output . . . . . . . . . . . 177
mounted plough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 J 7.6.4.Front PTO (extra equipment) nominal revs 1000
F 7.2. When using a semi-mounted plough . . . . . . 132 r/min corresponding engine revs . . . . . . . . 177
F 7.3. Ploughing with a reversible plough . . . . . . . . 132 J 7.7. Powered front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
F 7.4. Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary . . 133 J 8. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
G. Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 J 9. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
G 1. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 J 9.1. Turning circle radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
G 1.1. General instructions concerning oil checks and oil J 10. Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 J 10.1. Electro-hydraulic linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 1.2. Lubrication and maintenance schedule . . . . 134 J 10.2. Low pressure circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2. Recommended fuel and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . 135 J 10.3. Working hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel . . . . . . . . 136 J 10.3.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . . . 179
G 2.2.1. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 J 10.3.2. Counter pressures when using return
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 connection for auxiliary hydraulics . . . . . . . 180
G 2.2.3. Filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 J 10.4. Hydraulic linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
G 2.2.4. Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 J 10.4.1. Max lifting force on the whole lifting area 180
G 3. Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 J 10.4.2. Lifting range at end of lower links . . . . . . 180
G 4. Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 J 11. Other specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
H. Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 J 11.1. Markings of gearbox and power take-off . . 180
H 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 J 11.2. The capacity of the cab filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
H 1.1. Air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 J 11.3. Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs 181
H 2. Maintenance daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 J 11.4. Code number table for calibrating . . . . . . . . 182
H 3. Maintenance weekly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 K. Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 K 1. Extra equipment catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly . . . . . . 149 K 2. Extra and alternative equipment, operating and
H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours (or every service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
other year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 K 2.1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
I. Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 K 2.2. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
I 1. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 K 2.2.1. Electric main circuit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
I 1.1. Bleeding fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 K 2.2.2. Implement signal connection . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 1.2. Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 K 2.2.3. Implement control system, ISOBUS . . . . . 187
I 1.3. Maintenance-cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 2. Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
I 2.1. Battery checks and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 158 3. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.2. Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 K 2.3. Power transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.3. Safety precautions for the electrical system . . 158 K 2.3.1. Front power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.3.1. Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.4. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 2. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
I 2.5. Headlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
I 3. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
I 3.1. Adjusting travel of brake pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 K 2.4. Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 3.2. Adjusting parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes (press air
I 3.3. Bleeding brake system of air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 1. Construction of air pressure brakes . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.1. Checking and adjusting toe-in of front wheels 162 2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
I 4.2. Steering angle adjustment, 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . 163 3. Changing and bleeding the brake fluid . . . . . 193
I 5. Adjusting track width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 4. Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
I 5.1. Adjusting track width, 4WD industrial front axle 164 K 2.4.2. Fluid brake valve of the trailer . . . . . . . . . . 194
I 5.2. Adjusting track width, rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 1. Construction of trailer brake valve . . . . . . . . . 194
I 6. If the tractor is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
-5- A. Detailed table of contents

3. Changing and bleeding of the brake fluid . . 194
4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
K 2.4.3. Emergency brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
K 2.5. Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
K 2.5.1. Reverse drive controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
K 2.5.2. Air suspension of front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
K 2.5.3. Flexible front mudguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2. Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
K 2.6. Frame and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
K 2.7. Cab and shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
K 2.7.1. Air suspension-driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . 200
K 2.7.2. Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
K 2.7.3. Forest cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
2. Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
3.1. Cleaning the polycarbonate windows . . . . . . 205
K 2.8. Hydraulic and towing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
K 2.8.1. Trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1. Trailer hitch mechanic unlatching . . . . . . . . . 205
1.1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2. Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching . . . . . . . . . . 206
2.1. Instructions for operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
3. Drawbar eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4. Adjusting and checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
K 2.8.2. Agricultural drawbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
K 2.8.3. Wagon towing device (Scharmüller) . . . . . 208
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2. Instructions for operating hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3. Maintenance and greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
K 2.8.4. Euro trailer hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
K 2.8.5. Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension 211
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
K 2.8.6. Automatic check links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
1. Adjusting the automatic check links . . . . . . . 213
2. Floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
K 2.8.7. Front linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
3. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4. Pressure accumulators for front linkage . . . . 216
K 2.8.8. Power Beyond couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
K 2.8.9. Combined hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
3. Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
L. Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Conversion table for common units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
A. Detailed table of contents -6-

B. Safety precautions
B 1. Safety rules
This section summarizes the regulations which must 3 Brakes - Always check that the brakes are operating
always be followed when working with the tractor. correctly before moving. The brake pedals should be
However, these regulations do not exempt the driver from locked together when driving on the road. Extensive
statutory and other national regulations as regards traffic repairs to the braking system should be undertaken only
safety and occupational health and safety. by Valtra approved service personnel.
When implements or ballast weights are front end
Safety regulations applicable for different types of working
mounted the rear axle loading is decreased:
sites and existing road traffic laws must always be
followed. - In these circumstances the driver should check that the
rear brakes are still effective.
When designing the tractor priority was given to the safety - When needed use opposite ballast weights at rear.
of the operator. Steps and handles have been placed with
4 Children and the tractor - Never allow children in the
ease of entry into the cab in mind. The tractor has several
cab or near the tractor or an attached implement while the
safety features eg: guards for belts and pulleys etc.
engine is running. Always lower the implement to the
1 Danger, Warning, Caution - Whenever you see the ground when leaving the tractor.
words and symbols shown below, used in this book and
on decals, you MUST take note of their instructions as
they relate to personal safety.
DANGER: This symbol together with the
word DANGER indicates an imminently
hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in DEATH OR VERY SERIOUS
INJURY. 1
WARNING: This symbol together with the
word WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation that if not avoided
could result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY.
CAUTION: This symbol together with the
word CAUTION is used to indicate a 2 T B2
potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, may result in MINOR INJURY.
5 Roof hatch (extra equipment) - Open the hatch by
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify pulling the knob (1) on the handle forwards and pushing
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly the hatch upwards.
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of the To open the hatch fully (for emergency exit) detach the
machine, process or its surroundings. gas spring upper end (2) from its fastener and push the
NOTE: The word NOTE is used to indicate points of hatch fully open.
particular interest for more efficient and convenient repair NOTE! When driving on ice it is
or operation. recommended to keep the roof hatch open.
Decals
6 Passengers - No passenger may ride on the tractor
WARNING: DO NOT remove or obscure unless it is provided with a special seat. Any passenger
Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruction must not ride on the platform placed in the tractor. Other
Decals. Replace any Danger, Warning, personal transport, for example, on front-mounted
Caution or Instruction Decals that are not loaders, is not permissible.
readable or are missing. Replacement
decals are available from your Dealer in the 7 Caution - Hold on to the steering wheel or safety
event of loss or damage. The actual location handles in the cab if the tractor tips over. Never try to jump
of these Safety Decals is illustrated at the out.
end of this section. 8 Maintenance - The driver is responsible for following
the maintenance instructions in this Manual and the safety
regulations applicable to the tractor. No maintenance
2 Tractor construction - The tractor construction must work is to be carried out on the tractor or implement
not be changed (f.ex. max. driving speed, max. power unless the engine is stopped and the implement lowered.
etc.)
The tractor is type approved to comply with construction 9 Lending - Never lend the tractor to a person who is not
and use regulations. Any changes to the tractor may reduĆ used to driving it. You may be held responsible for any
ce the safety and durability and affect the warranty terms. resulting accidents.
-7- B. Safety precautions

10 Lights - Always make sure that the lights and 18 Trailer load - On tractors with trailers the load must
reflectors are clean and in working order. Do not forget be properly secured. The load must not obstruct the
that the headlights must be correctly adjusted. driver's vision or cover lights and reflectors. Loads which
project more than 1 m (39 in) behind the vehicle train
must be suitably marked. During dayĆtime this should be
done with a flag and during darkness with a red light and
reflector arrangement.
19 Trailer - A trailer should only be coupled to the
drawbar. A loaded drawbar must always be lowered with
the hydraulic lift. Check that trailer brakes are operating
properly and observe any special instructions issued by
the trailer manufacturer.
WARNING: When the tractor is towing a
trailer the brake pedals must be locked
together. The brakes are not to be used
individually for steering.
WARNING: When using a trailer make sure
that the hitch latch is locked.
WARNING: When using the trailer always

use the brakes, if the law requires. The
T B3 trailer brakes are recommended to use in 50
km/h models also in those countries, where
11 Carbon monoxide - Never start the engine, or run it it is not required by the law.
indoors while the doors are closed as this may lead to
carbon monoxide poisoning. 20 Front loader - When working with a front loader, be
sure that no one is in the working area. There is a danger
12 Downhill - Never drive downhill with the gear lever in that the tractor may tip over when the loader is lifted. The
neutral or the clutch pedal pressed down. Check the driver should put the front loader in the down position
brakes often. Always change down to a lower gear before before leaving the tractor. Any special instructions issued
driving down a steep incline. When driving downhill do not by the loader manufacturer should also be observed.
brake continuously - Danger of overheating the
brakes! Do not let the engine over run to avoid damage to 21 Running - Before driving always check that the tractor
the engine. is in a safe condition for driving on the road. Rear view
mirrors should be adjusted to give the correct viewing
13 Running speed - Adjust the speed to suit the driving angle before setting off. When towing an implement
surface, visibility and load. Avoid any sudden increase or whose centre of gravity is located at a significant distance
reduction (braking) in the running speed as well as tight behind the tractor, the driver should remember that there
turns at high speed. If care is not taken the tractor may tip may be considerable sway during cornering.
over or the load may be displaced.
22 Differential lock - The differential lock must only be
IMPORTANT: The maximum speed of the tractor must not used when running on loose or slippery ground.
be altered.
Maximum operating forward speed is 40 km/h (traffic
tractors 50 km/h), for safety the maximum operating
speed in reverse is 20 km/h.
14 Power take-off driven attachments - When running
with power take-off driven attachments or machines it is
very important that the prescribed safety devices are used
and that they are in good condition. Serious accidents
have occurred due to failure to use the prescribed
safety devices. Follow the directions given by the
implement or machine manufacturer.
15 Check links - When transporting implements using
the three-point linkage, the check links must be locked
with pins.
T B5
16 Emergency exits - The cab is provided with four
emergency exits. These are the doors, the rear window
23 Ballast weights - When driving on the road at least
and the roof hatch (extra equipment).
20 % of the gross weight of the tractor must be on the
17 Stairs - Keep the stairs clean. Build up of dirt can front axle. When lifting an implement the weight on the
cause slippery conditions and can cause injury. front end of the tractor is reduced, and the steering ability
of the tractor is impaired or sometimes lost. Therefore
sufficient ballast weights should be carried. Ballast
weights should be mounted only at the points intended for
this purpose.
B. Safety precautions -8-

24 Attaching implements - Care must be taken when
implements are being attached. There is a risk of an
accident if the tractor or implement should move. It is only
safe to enter the space between the tractor and the
implement if the parking brake is applied or the wheels
blocked in order to prevent the tractor from moving.
25 Damage - The driver is responsible for seeing to the
repair of any damage or wear which might endanger the
safety of the tractor.
WARNING: If damage occurs to the cab, all
parts affected should be replaced with new
ones. No repair work (welding, drilling,
cutting, or grinding) should be attempted.
T B7
27 Mobile phones - Mobile phones may cause failure for

T B6
the electric linkage function. A mobile phone can not be
kept inside the cab, especially above the right side panel.
26 Triangle for slow vehicle (SMV-Slow Moving When using a mobile phone in the tractor it is
Vehicle) - When driving on public roads always use the recommended that it is connected to the outside antenna.
SMV emblem on the rear end of the tractor. Also use the
rotating light where required by law.
T B12
28 Radar - DO NOT to go under a tractor which has

radar until the ignition switch has been turned off. - this
presents a hazard to your eyes.
29 Hydraulic/fuel pressure - Oil/fuel under high
pressure easily penetrates through clothing and skin and
can cause serious injury. Never attempt to locate a leak in
the hydraulic system or attempt to close a leak using any
part of your body.
-9- B. Safety precautions

30 Implements maintenance - Implements connected to
the linkage or the auxiliary hydraulic system must be
lowered to the ground during maintenance.
31 Motor noise - When you are operating the engine or
working near it, use hearing protectors to avoid noise
injuries.
32 Naked flames and smoking - Naked flames,
smoking and sparks are prohibited near the fuel system
and batteries. (Specially, when charging batteries,
explosive gases present).
33 Cleaning - Keep the tractor clean (cleaning
instructions see on page NO TAG). Avoid the risk of fire by
throughly cleaning before use!
34 By a fire - At temperatures in excess of 300° C, e.g. if
the engine is on fire, the viton seals of the engine (e.g the
undermost 0-ring of the oil pressure regulating value)
produce very highly corrosive hydrofluoric acid. Do not
touch with your bare hands, viton seals which have been
subjected to abnormally high temperatures. Always use
neoprene rubber or heavy duty gloves and safety glasses
when decontaminating. Wash seals and the contaminated
area with 10 % calcium hydroxide or other alkali solution.
Put all the removed material in sealed plastic bags and
deliver them to the point stated by the Authorities
concerned.
WARNING: Never destroy viton-seals by
burning!
T B13
35 Auxiliary hydraulics, STOP-switch - Pressing the

STOP-switch turns out all the functions of the auxiliary
hydraulics (control levers, operating switches, oil flow and
indicator lights).
36 Engine stop and restart - If the engine has stalled eg.
due too heavy loading, turn the ignition switch to the
STOP position. Restart the engine according to the startĆ
ing instructions. Keep an eye on the indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
37 Quick couplings for lower links - Clean, if necessary
the quick couplings and ball joints for the lower links befoĆ
re attaching the implement. DANGER OF THE IMPLEĆ
MENT RELEASING!
B. Safety precautions -10-

C. General description
C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T180CR, T190CR
T C24
The models dealt with here belong to the Valtra's The tractors feature a powered front axle as standard (as
medium-weight category of the series. alternative equipment also suspension) equipped with an
The tractors have 4-stroke, six-cylinder, turbocharged electro hydraulic differential lock operated in conjunction
and intercoolered multi power common rail direct injection with the rear axle differential lock. As standard the tractors
diesel engines. have a safety cab with an adjustable driver's seat.
The gearbox is fully synchronized (except the creeper The models T180CR and T190CR have as standard:
gear). These tractors have electro-hydraulically - 4WD and differential lock automatic functions
controlled PTO, differential lock and 3-step Power Shift - engine management controlled by electronics (EEM)
(PS). In addition these tractors have hydrostatic steering, - cruise control (Cruise-panel).
electro-hydraulic lift and an engine heater as standard. - U-Pilot headland automatics
-11- C. General description

5
13
10
15 12 11
16
14
6
2 8
9 4
7 3
1
T C31
Left side of tractor:

1 Dipstick for engine oil
2 Engine oil filler cap
3 Engine oil filter
4 Air conditioning receiver, extra equipment
5 Airfilter housing
6 Coolant pump
7 Engine heater
8 Engine heater plug (under the cab door)
9 High pressure pump 18
10 High pressure accumulator
11 Prefilter, fuel system, water trap in lower part
12 Fuel filter
13 Pre heating of induction air, electric
14 Fuel filler cap
15 Air conditioning compressor, extra equipment
16 Electronic engine control unit with three removable
connectors
17 T C32
17 Engine oil draining plug

18 Draining plug for coolant, cylinder block
C. General description -12-

4
8
6 5 1
T C33
Right side of tractor: 5 Cooling system bleed screw

1 Thermostat housing 6 Turbocharger, behind the thermal protection
2 Starter motor 7 Pressure air compressor, extra equipment (air
3 Alternator suspension of front axle/air pressure brakes)
4 Brake fluid reservoir 8 Expansion tank
10
9
9
12
11
13
T C5
9 Common washer fluid reservoir (windscreen and rear 11 Battery

window) (under the tool box) 12 Air pressure container, extra equipment
10 Tool box (can be locked) 13 Radar, behind the battery housing in the tractor frame

8
5 7 14
6 13
11
3
3
10
2
1 9
12
4
T C29
Rear view of tractor: 8 Remote (Emergency) power take off stop

1 Oil dipstick, transmission and hydraulics 9 Power transmission and hydraulic pressure filter
2 Oil filling cap, transmission and hydraulics 10 Auxiliary hydraulic return oil filter
3 Quick-action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics 11 Breather, transmission and hydraulics
4 Leakage oil reservoir 12 Bracket for ring pin
5 Auxiliary hydraulic system return coupling 13 Auxiliary hydraulics quick couplings on the mudguard
6 Trailer socket (extra equipment)
7 Inlet cover, remote control cables and cab air exhaust 14 ISOBUS implement connector (extra equipment), for
(in picture reverse drive controls, beside housing) more details see page 187.

5
1
4a
3
2
T C36
Front view of tractor:

1 DIN-socket for current, max 8A (current on, when the
parking lights are on) C 3. Engine
2 Auxiliary hydraulics quick couplings (with front linkage,
extra equipment)
3 Front power take-off (extra equipment)
4 Front linkage (extra equipment)
4a.External push buttons for front lift (together with front
lift), for more details see page 215.
5 ISOBUS implement connector (extra equipment), for
more details see page 187.
C 2. Service
In order to function satisfactorily the tractor must be
properly maintained. The necessary daily lubrication and
routine checks can, of course, be carried out by the driver.
Where adjustments and repairs are necessary which
require the attention of a qualified mechanic and the use
of special tools, it is advisable to rely on a workshop. In
this case we advise you to consult your local dealer as to
how your tractor should be looked after as he is in a T C17
position to give you the best possible service. Through
service bulletins and special training courses he is kept
constantly informed of the factory's recommendations The tractors have 4-stroke, six-cylinder, turbocharged
regarding care of the tractor. and intercoolered multi power common rail direct injection
diesel engines.
- The model T180CR has two power ranges: the base
C 2.1. Cost-free service output is 132 kW (180 hp) and the new output is 136 kW
(185 hp).
Before leaving the factory the tractor was thoroughly - The model T190CR has three power ranges: the base
tested and adjusted to ensure it is in firstĆclass condition output is 136 kW (185 hp), the new outputs are 151 kW
when delivered to you. However, it is important that the (205 hp) and 153 kW (208 hp).
tractor is given further checks during the first period of The models T180CR and T190CR have a larger transport
operation. boost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and
Bolts must be checked for tightness, various settings DPS boost area, when quick-shift is 2 or 3. The trans
inspected and other minor adjustments made. Your dealer boost and DPS boost power areas are equal. In the model
therefore provides a cost-free service inspection T190CR there is the largest Sigma power area with all
(excluding oil and filter costs) after 100 hours running. gears in use , when the power transferred through the
power-take-off is large enough. The symbol is
illuminated in the instrument panel.

The principle of the turbocharged engine is that exhaust
gases from the engine cylinders drive the turbo unit which

forces air into the cylinders. This means that higher power
output can be obtained with economical fuel C 3.2. Common Rail system engine
consumption. On intercooler models cooled inlet air is fed
into the cylinders. In the Common Rail tractors the injection pump has been
replaced by the high-pressure pump, which pumps the
The engine induction air passes through the air filter and a amount of fuel to over 1000 bar pressure, to the high
safety filter inside the air filter. The air intake system has pressure accumulator (rail), common for all cylinders. The
an effective ejector system, most of the impurities are high-pressure fuel injects to the cylinders through the
removed before they reach the filter by the exhaust fume electric controlled injectors. The engines have also four
flow. The safety filter prevents the engine being damaged valves per cylinder.The Common Rail system makes it
if the main filter fails. possible to develop quiet-running, economic engines
featuring, reduced emissions and noise, especially by
lower rotating speeds.
C 3.1. Electronic engine manageĆ The electronic maximum speed limitation is available as
ment (EEM) alternative equipment with the Common Rail system
engines. Then the traffic tractor (50 km/h) drive gears can
The electronic engine management includes a controller be used in the standard tractors (40 km/h). This lowers the
installed on the engine (EC). engine RPMs when driving on the road reducing the fuel
consumption, noise and emissions.
The electronic engine management improves the
technical features of the engine such as fuel efficiency,
power, torque and cold starting. It also reduces emissions
and noise. The cruise control for both driving speed and
engine speed is also one of the engine base features.
C 4. Power transmission
C 4.1. HiTech power shuttle
T C19
In tractors with the power shuttle unit the traditional middle position is neutral) you get a gentle and light
forward/reverse gear lever is replaced with a shuttle lever shuttle operation without using the clutch pedal. Use of
beside the steering wheel. the clutch pedal for shuttle operation is still possible.
By moving the shuttle lever forwards or backwards (the

The power shuttle is placed between the gearbox and the
Power Shift. It has planetary-type gear drives which are C 4.4. Rear axle
operated by two wet multi-disc clutches, one for forward
driving and one for reverse driving. Multi disc clutches The rear axle is fitted directly to the gearbox. The
operate at the same time as the driving clutch due to this differential lock in the rear axle is electro-hydraulically
the tractor not having a traditional dry clutch disc. controlled. When it is engaged, pressurized oil is pumped
to the multi-disc differential clutch, and this causes the
The function of the system is controlled by the electronic differential to lock. When the brake pedal is pressed the
control unit of the gearbox. This means that the differential lock is automatically disengaged. An indicator
electronics smoothly adjust the disengaging and lamp on the instrument panel lights when the differential
engaging pressures of the hydraulic multi-discs lock is engaged.
according to program. This provides smooth forward and
power shuttle driving. Final drives are of the planetary gear type. From the
planetary gears power is transmitted to the rear wheels.
In addition the system has the HiShift- operation, with
switches placed in the speed gear- and range lever,
which controls the operation of the multi-discs when C 4.5. Powered front axle
changing gear. So it is possible to change gear without
using the clutch.
However, traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible.
C 4.2. Gearbox
The speed gearbox has four synchronized gears which
are controlled with a speed gear lever.
In addition, the gearbox has three range gears;
LL=creeper range, M=Medium range and H= High
range. M and H ranges are synchronized. All this range of
gears are controlled with one lever.
C 4.3. Power Shift

In addition in front of the gearbox is a 3-step quick-shift
gear, the Power Shift (PS).
T C10
Control of the Power Shift function is also controlled by
the electronic control unit, at which time the gearing is
The powered front axle is driven from the gearbox bevel
selected according to the driving conditions.
pinion shaft front end.
Manual control of the PS- gears is done with the push
buttons on the gear lever or with the rocker switch on the Front wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged
right-side arm rest. When the 2nd or 3rd gear of the PS is electro-hydraulically. When 4WD is engaged the springs
engaged both tractor models have larger output area in force the discs together and four-wheel drive engages.
use = + Power output range. Consequently the 4WD is always engaged when the
The driver can choose from the system, preprogrammed engine is stopped (multi-disc clutch not pressurized).
automatic functions of PS- for different driving conditions In addition when braking, the front-wheel drive always
and power shuttle. engages in order to provide the braking function for the
front wheels.
The digital display panel in the tractor keeps the driver
informed at all times by displaying the status of different The front axle is also equipped with an automatic
operations, e.g. driving direction, which of the PS- gears differential brake. Simultaneously electro hydraulically
is engaged, chosen automatic operations, outdoor controlled front axle differential lock is available as
temperature, suggests when to change to a lower or alternative equipment.
higher gear, it also shows when the PTO is engaged and
indicates any possible fault with a fault code. The tractors have an industrial front axle as standard
allowing larger axle loading.
The main gearbox has 12 forward speeds and 12 An air suspensioned front axle is also available as extra
reverse speeds. The 3-step Power Shift gear on equipment on all models.
tractors give 36 gears forward and 36 reverse gears.
Shafts and gearwheels in the gearbox are pressure
lubricated.

C 4.6. Power take-off C 5. Brakes
T C11
The PTO rotating speed is selected with a lever, which can

select either 1000 r/min or 540E (=750) r/min nominal
rotating speed. Engagement and disengagement is
electro-hydraulically through a different button. T C18
The control unit of the gearbox also controls the function

of the power take-off. This makes the power take-off The oil bath multi-disc brakes are located on the rear
engagement smooth without loading the implement. The axle between the differential and final drives. The brakes
display shows a symbol if the power take-off shaft is operate hydraulically from the brake pedals. When both
rotating. brake pedals are depressed the front wheel drive is
engaged automatically (4WD indicator lamp lights on
These tractors are Sigma Power models, whose principal
instrument panel) in order to provide braking function at
function is, that the tractor power take-off has been
the front wheels. The pedals can be connected together
constructed to transfer larger output and torque than the
and used as running brakes or separated and used
tractor driving transmission. The engine has three different
individually as steering brakes. The brakes can be
output and torque areas. The lowest and highest power
adjusted by means of adjusting nuts which are fitted on
ranges (128 kW and 154 kW) are controlled automatically
the rear axle.
through an electric system.
The parking brake is electro-hydraulic and is controlled
The power take-off shaft is easy to change. As standard
with a shuttle lever. When engaging the parking brake
the tractor is provided with a 6-spline shaft and as
(parking brake and 4WD indicator lamps light on
optional equipment shafts with 21-, 20-, 6- or 8 splines
instrument panel), the pressure exhausts from the cylinder
for greater torque can be fitted on the tractor.
operate the parking brake and a strong spring engages
As alternative equipment a ground speed PTO is also
the tractor brakes. At the same time the control unit
available.
disengages the transmission. With this system the tractor
The front power take-off is available as extra equipment brakes are always on when the engine is not running.
(with front linkage). The front PTO shaft nominal rotating
A brake valve and pressure brakes for trailer brakes are
speed is 1000 r/min and the shaft is 6-spline.
available as extra equipment.

C 6. Steering system
T C13
The tractor has a hydrostatic steering system so that

steering movement is transmitted from the steering wheel
by oil under pressure to the front axle. This makes
steering particularly easy.
If the oil pressure in the steering system should fail for any
reason, steering is still possible by manual power, and the
steering valve will act as a pump.
The tractor hydraulic system has a priority valve, which
ensures that there is always sufficient oil for the steering
system.

C 7. Hydraulic system
T C14
The tractors hydraulic system has both a low pressure The tractors have, as standard, an electro-hydraulic
circuit and a high pressure circuit. Both circuits have their linkage version Ds. The linkage is controlled through the
own pump. electric potentiometers and switches.
The capacity of the low pressure circuit pump: Pre-programmed functions:

- 28 l/min at 2100 r/min - draft control/position control combining ratio plus
sensitivity on the regulator, the sensitivity adjustment is
The low pressure circuit controls:
automatic.
-quick-shift gear - lowering speed (independent of load)
-powered front axle, disengaging - transport height
- power take-off - drive balance control system
- differential lock - slip control
- gearbox and PTO lubrication
Max. lifting capacity of the hydraulic lift is 7300 kg.
The capacity of the high pressure circuit pump:
(at free flow pressure which enables effective use of the The front linkage is available as extra equipment. Lifting
auxiliary hydraulics.) capacity of the front linkage is 3600 kg.
- 87 l/min at 2100 r/min
The high pressure circuit controls:
- steering system (prioritised)
- linkage hydraulics
- auxiliary hydraulics
- trailer brake valve (extra equipment)

C 7.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics
T C20
The tractor has two electrically controlled valves for

auxiliary hydraulics as standard and these are controlled
by the separate lever (on the arm rest) or by the switches
on the right hand side panel. Both of these valves have a
"floating position".
There are quick-action Push-Pull type couplings in the
rear of the tractor.
Four additional valves and a trailer brake valve can be
mounted as extra equipment.

D. Instruments and controls
Operating instructions for the extra and alternative
equipment are in section K, of this book, after each extra
equipment.
D 1. Introduction
NOTE: The places of the switches can vary depending on
the equipment.
D 1.1. Pedals
2 4
1
5
T D1
For more details see page 32. 3 Latch for brake pedals
1 Clutch pedal, (HiShift- clutch, see page 24) 4 Accelerator pedal
2 Brake pedals 5 Lock for steering wheel inclination
D. Instruments and controls -22-

D 1.2. Instrument panel
12.5
12.2 12.3 12
12.1
12.6 12.5
5
4 12.4
12.7 12.7
9 12.9
8 12.10
7 12.8 10
3
6
11
1 2
T D66
For more details see page 33. 12.8 LCD-display unit in Proline-instrument panel (liquid
Shuttle- and parking brake lever (3) and the combination crystal display)
lever (6) can also be fitted on the opposite side of the Fixed displays (two functions on the bottom line):
steering wheel.
-Operating hours (hhhh.h)
1 Steering wheel
2 Lever for adjusting steering wheel position -Clock (hh:mm)
3 Shuttle- and parking brake lever
4 Pre-programming push button of Power Shift
Displays chosen with a change over switch (12.9)
5 Display panel for power shuttle, PS etc.
Functions on the top/centre line:
6 Control for:
- main/dipped headlights - Working time (h:mm)
- direction indicators
- horn - Cruise control km/h / mph
- windscreen wiper - Driving speed (km/h / mph)
- windscreen washer
- headlight flasher - Wheel slip (%, 0-100)
7 Light switch - Rear PTO speed (r/min)
8 Hazard warning flasher switch
9 Main circuit switch, extra equipment - Front PTO speed, extra equipment (r/min)
10 Upper headlights, extra equipment
11 Ignition switch
- Engine running speed
12 Proline-instrument panel for more details see
page 52 - Immediate fuel consumption (ha, acre)
12.1 Fuel gauge
12.2 Thermometer gauge - Average fuel consumption (ha, acre)
12.3 Tachometer
12.4 Speedometer - Immediate fuel consumption
12.5 Indicator lights for direction indicator
12.6 Indicator light for main beam - Average fuel consumption
12.7 Indicator lights on instrument panel - Fuel consumption
-23- D. Instruments and controls

- Lower link position (%, 0-100) - Square area (ha)
- Lifting link position of front linkage - Maintenance schedule

(%, 0-100)
12.9 Change over switch for LCD-display in Proline-inĆ
- Sigma Power (%, 0-100) strument panel
12.10 Setting switch for LCD-display in
- Gearbox temperature (C/F) Proline-instrument panel
- Travel distance (m, km / miles)
D 1.3. Right- side panel / arm rest controls
D 1.3.1. Driving
4
11
13 5 7
3 9
2 8
6
4
12
2 1
10
T D369
For more details see page 63. 9 Hand throttle

1 Speed gear lever 10 Switch for U-Pilot headland automatics, for more
2 Push buttons for Power Shift operation details see page 67
3 Range gear lever 11 Engine STOP (red indicator light), extra equipment
4 Switch for HiShift 12 Change over switch for side pillar display
5 Switch for 4WD 13 Cruise control (Cruise panel), for more details see
6 Switch for differential lock (3-positions) page 71.
7 Switch for Power Shift-automatics
8 Switch for automatic traction control

D 1.3.2. Linkage/ Power take-off
1.5 1.6 1.7 1.9

1.1
4.1
1.11
1.4 1.8 1.10
2.1
1.13
3.2 3.3 3.1
2.4
2.2
1.2
2.3
1.12
1.3
T D294
Rear linkage 1, for more details see page 72. controls:

1.1 Diagnose light (shows also a possible fault) 2.1 Auxiliary hydraulics, green control panel
1.2 Position control knob, hydraulic lift 2.2 Auxiliary hydraulics, valve block control lever, extra
1.3 Lift/stop/lower switch, hydraulic lift equipment
1.4 Lift/lower indicator lights 2.3 Auxiliary hydraulics control lever (joystick), if activated
1.5 Lowering speed selector, hydraulic lift with switch 2.4.
1.6 Transport height selector, hydraulic lift
Rear power take-off 3, for more details see page 75.
1.7 Draft control selector, hydraulic lift
1.8 Draft control indicator light 3.1 PTO control lever
1.9 Drive balance control including slip control system 3.2 PTO switch (3-positions), PTO push buttons on the
1.10 Drive balance control light mudguard as extra equipment
1.11 Slip control light 3.3 Rear PTO automatic stop
1.12 Passing switch for position control knob
1.13 Inner switch for connecting implement Front PTO (extra equipment) 4, for more details see
(corresponding push-buttons are located on both page 189.
mudguards)
4.1 Front PTO operation switch
Front linkage (extra equipment) 2, for more details
see page 215.
The control of the front linkage inside the cab by following

D 1.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics
16
2
4
13 1
5 3 15
6
8
7
9 10 6a
6b
11 11
14
12 12
10 6c
6d
T D325
For more details see page 78 10 Auxiliary hydraulics, limit screws for the flow (blocks 1
1 Valve blocks 1 and 2 (blue and brown/yellow) activation and 2 or blocks 3 and 4) (only for special use)
switch for control lever 9 11 Auxiliary hydraulics, control levers (blocks 3 and 4 or
2 Valve blocks 3 and 4 (green and white) activation blocks 5 and 6, extra equipment)
switch for control lever 9 (not on all tractors) 12 Auxiliary hydraulics, limit screws for the flow (blocks
3 Auxiliary hydraulics, activation switch for valve blocks 3 and 4 or blocks 5 and 6, extra equipment) (only for
(1, 2, 3 and 4) control panel and arm rest valve block 1 special use)
lowering (6a) and lifting functions (6b) and valve block 13 Change over switch for directing oil pressure of valve
3 lowering (6c) and lifting functions (6d) block 1 (on some variations valve block 4) from one
4 Auxiliary hydraulics, STOP-switch (all functions) quick-action coupling to the other (extra equipment)
5 Auxiliary hydraulics, indicator lights for valve blocks 14 Contact buttons (front loader use, extra equipment)
6 Auxiliary hydraulics, operating switches for valve blocks 15 Release switch for equipment locking (front loader
- Parallel switch for valve block 1 lowering (6a) and lifting use; buckets, press for bales etc., extra equipment)
functions (6b) 16 Front pump switch (combined hydraulics) (extra
- Parallel switch for valve block 3 lowering (6c) and lifting equipment), for more details see page 217.
functions (6d), extra equipment
7 Auxiliary hydraulics, regulating switches for the timer
8 Auxiliary hydraulics, regulating switches for the flow
9 Auxiliary hydraulics, control lever blocks 1 and 2 (blue
and brown/yellow) or blocks 3 and 4 (green and white)

D 1.3.4. Side pillar controls
6
5
7
4
8
3
9 2
T D337
For more details see page 83 5 Switch for rotating warning light
1 Switch for U-Pilot headland automatics 6 Control Stop switch
2 Rear window wiper + washer, extra equipment 7 Switch for front working lights
3 Light switch for trailer hitch 8 Switch for extra front working lights
4 Switch for rear working lights 9 Floor heater fan (2- speeds) (optional equipment)

D 1.3.5. Other controls
13 12 13
11 8
7
6
10
3
4
5
2
1
9
T D368
For more details see page 85 8 Implement signal connection

1 Storage compartment 9 Ashtray
2 Place for implement remote control (cutter etc.) 10 Switch for rear fog light, extra equipment (standard in
3 Lighter (power output) some marketing areas)
4 2-pin power socket 11 ISOBUS terminal connector, ISOBUS system (extra
5 Current switch for 2-pin power socket equipment)
6 Programming plug 12 Bus extension connectors (behind the cover), ISOBUS
7 Indicator light for implement signal connection, extra system (extra equipment)
equipment 13 Mounting brackets (extra equipment)
D 1.4. Rear side controls
7 6
1 5
T D9
For more details see page 86. 5 Accelerator pedal, reverse drive controls, extra
1 Trailer hitch release control, extra equipment equipment
2 3-pin power socket 6 Brake pedal, reverse drive controls, extra equipment
3 Rear window opening handle 7 Clutch pedal, reverse drive controls, extra equipment
4 Steering wheel, reverse drive controls, extra equipment

D 1.5. Controls on LH side
5 4
3
1 T D10
For more details see page 87. 3 Storage compartment

1 Latch for fold-out platform 4 Storage compartment for books
2 Side window opening handle 5 Storage space for bottle
D 1.6. Front roof console
1 4
2
2
3 3a
T D11
For more details see page 88. 3 Sun visor down, 3a up

1 Cab light 4 Recirculation control
2 Ventilation nozzles

D 1.7. Right hand side roof console
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
1 4 2
N D21
For more details see page 89

1 Roof heater fan (4- speeds)
2 Heating and ventilation control
3 Radio (extra equipment)
4 Air conditioning control knob (extra equipment)

D 1.8. Driver's seat
11
10
8
1
7
2
6
6
3 5
4 4A
T D212
For more details see page 90. 7 Seat belt anchor point
1 Lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards 8 Seat back inclination
2 Adjustment forward/rearward 9 Arm rest adjustment
3 Lock for turning seat 10 Switch for seat heating
4 Suspension 11 Place for books
4A. Weight decal Air suspension-driver's seat (extra equipment), see
5 Lock for longitudinal suspension page 200.
6 Height adjustment, by lifting the seat
D 1.9. Other controls
T D14
Mirror adjustment.

D 2. Instruments and controls, more detail
D 2.1. Pedals
When driving in the field or any other working sites the
D 2.1.1. Clutch pedal (1) brake pedals can be used individually as steering brakes.
The front wheel drive always engages when braking
with both brake pedals.
3 Differential lock always disengages when braking with one
or both brake pedals.
CAUTION: If functional problems occur in
the braking system, the tractor must be
stopped and the fault rectified before
continuing.
D 2.1.3. Locking latch for brake

5 pedals (3)
1 2 4
With the latch the brake pedals can be latched together.
T D15
D 2.1.4. Accelerator pedal (4)

The clutch pedal is used to separate the connection
between the engine and the gearbox. When shifting,
The use of the accelerator pedal enables an increase in
depress the pedal and release it slowly once the gear is
the engine speed to be achieved if the hand throttle is at
engaged, except when using HiShift (see page 64). When
less than the full throttle setting.
using the clutch pedal the automatic operation does not
control the multi-disc clutch operation, the engagement CAUTION: When driving on the road only
is controlled with the pedal. the accelerator pedal should be used, and
the hand throttle knob should be in the
IMPORTANT: Never rest your foot on the clutch pedal
minimum position.
while driving. Do not allow the clutch to slip more than
necessary when starting.
When using the clutch to inch the tractor with the D 2.1.5. Lock for steering wheel
pedal sometimes not fully depressed, the coupling inclination (5)
point of the clutch may change and the clutch engages
sooner. The steering wheel can be moved to 9 different positions
HiShift-clutch, operating and function, for more details whilst pressing the locking pedal.
see page 64.
D 2.1.2. Brake pedals (2)

WARNING: The brake pedals should always
be latched together (3) when driving on the
road.

D 2.2. Instrument panel
D 2.2.1. Steering wheel (1) D 2.2.3. Shuttle- and parking brake
lever (3)
1
2
T D105
3
IMPORTANT: Do not keep the front wheels in the full lock
position for longer than absolutely necessary; otherwise
the oil temperature in the steering system will rise rapidly T D106
and the pump may be damaged.
If the oil supply from the hydraulic pump should fail for The shuttle- and parking brake lever can be located on
any reason, the tractor can still be steered manually with the other side of the steering wheel.
the steering wheel. The steering valve will then act as a
pump. Steering is heavy to use and it operates slowly. Power shuttle
At full-lock it is possible to force the steering wheel
further. Front position (F): forward driving direction
CAUTION: If a malfunction occurs in the Centre position (N): neutral
steering system the tractor should be Rear position (R): reverse driving direction
stopped and the malfunction corrected When changing the driving direction you do not need to
before re-starting. use the clutch pedal. However, traditional use of the clutch
pedal is still possible when changing direction.
D 2.2.2. Steering wheel position If the clutch pedal is used when changing driving
adjustment (2) direction, be sure, that the pedal is fully depressed
down, before moving the shuttle lever.
By pushing the lever downwards the steering wheel can
be moved up or down. Lock the steering wheel by pulling Safety precautions
the lever up again. - To move the lever you need to pull the lever towards
CAUTION: Do not adjust steering wheel the steering wheel to release the security lock.
position while driving. - For safety precautions the tractor will not start if the
shuttle lever is not in the parking brake position.
CAUTION: If the tractor engine has to be left
running with the shuttle in the neutral
position, then the gear and range levers
must be placed in neutral.
- On HiTech- models there is a driver detector, which
prevents the shuttle engagement, if the driver is not
in the seat. If the shuttle is still engaged the arrow of
the selected direction flashes on the display panel.
The selected direction is engaged but not driving
until the driver sits on the seat and moves the
shuttle lever first to the parking brake position and
then engages the desired direction.

- Operation when the speed is under 5km/h:
If the driver leaves the seat for more than two D 2.2.4. Pre-programming
seconds and the clutch pedal is not pressed for switch of Power Shift (4)
more than 10% , the shuttle disengages and the
direction arrow flashes. The shuttle is engaged but
not driving until the driver sits on the seat, stops the
tractor and moves the lever to the parking brake
position (P) and then to the desired direction.
- Operation when the speed is over 5 km/h:
A
When leaving the seat the shuttle is engaged
Check regularly that the driver detector operates as 3
described above. Testing can be done this way, at low
speed while avoiding dangerous situations.
T D19
The desired Power Shift gear engagement can be

pre-programmed in the tractor in connection with the
power shuttle as follows:
- depress the clutch pedal (keep it depressed all the time
while programming)
- choose the desired driving direction (3)
T D18
- choose the desired PS- gear (A)
- push the programming button (4) for at least two
seconds. The display shows the pre-programmed
Parking brake driving direction and PS- gear.
- when required, program the other driving direction.
Parking brake is applied when the power shuttle is in the
Different directions can have different programs.
centre position by pulling the collar round the lever up and
moving the lever to the down position (P). To cancel the pre-programming put the power shuttle
This releases the spring which engages the tractor brakes lever (3) in the neutral position then press button (4) for at
electro-hydraulically. least two seconds. The pre-programming disengages if
one of the PS- automatic positions is engaged (switch (7)
WARNING: ALWAYS apply the parking on page 65).
brake when parking the tractor. The parking
brake applies automatically when stopping Even if the power is switched off the pre-programming
the engine. remains.
When coupling the parking brake on, 4WD is engaged

and all wheels brake.
CAUTION: Do not have the parking brake on
when driving, all wheels will be locked. For
safety reasons the parking brake
engagement speed is limited to 2-6 km/h (3
km/h adjusted in the factory).
The parking brake is released by pulling the collar on the
lever upwards at the same time moving the lever to the
neutral (centre) position.

5. Both the driving direction forward (F) and the PS- gear
D 2.2.5. Display (5) are shown, when PS I, II or III are preprogrammed in
the forward shuttle, the display subsequently shows F I,
F II or F III.
1 6. Both the driving direction backward (R) and the PS-
2 gear are shown, when PS I, II or III are
3 pre-programmed in the backward shuttle, the display
subsequently shows R I, R II or R III.
4 PS-sector (II)
5 6 7. When Automatic Traction Control is activated, the
Automatic Traction Control symbol will blink (the
7 8 parking brake- and power shuttle lever is in parking
brake - or in neutral position). The symbol is displayed
9 continuously, when the parking brake - and power
shuttle lever have been cycled through the parking
brake and the desired direction has been re-selected.
8. The number of the engaged PS- gear is shown (1, 2
13
10 or 3). When the gear number is engaging it flashes as
11 long as automatic is engaged.
9. AUTO 1 is shown when automatic PS- gear changing
12 program 1 is chosen. Subsequently AUTO 2 is shown,
13a when automatic PS- gear changing program 2 is
11a 12a chosen. These displays are empty when manual
T D20 operation is selected.
There is a separate display unit on the right front pillar in Diagnostics sector (III)
the tractor, which operates as a display for power shuttle
and PS and also as a fault diagnosis display. If the tractor The power take-off (10. ), temperature (11. ), driving
is equipped with the reverse drive controls as alternative speed (12. ) and slip percentage displays of this sector
equipment, the corresponding display is also on the other are displayed in turn by the display change over switch on
rear side pillar. The panel also displays driving speed, the the right side panel (switch 12 on page 71).
outdoor temperature and the percentage of rear power 10. The symbol for the rear power take-off is shown
take-off and slip. The display unit has a backlight for when it is selected with the change over switch. The
working in the dark and for warming the display screen in power take-off rotating speed is shown on the
cold conditions. bottom line when the PTO is rotating.
On the side panel there is a computer connector for 11. The symbol for the thermometer is shown when it is
checking and adjusting the system (only for authorized selected with the change over switch. The display
workshop use). shows the outdoor temperature on the bottom line to
the nearest degree (11. a). The outside temperature
The display unit is divided into three sectors: sensor is placed in the front part of the tractor. The
- Power shuttle sector (I) engine temperature can falsely raise the temperature,
- PS-sector (II) especially when the tractor is stationary.
- Diagnostics sector (III) 12. The symbol for the driving speed is shown when it is
selected with the change over switch. When the
Power shuttle sector (I) tractor is moving, the symbol for speed (km/h, mph) is
shown on the bottom line. The speed display shows
1. A tractor picture is continuously shown when the power
up to 15 km/h to one decimal place.
is on.
13. If the system detects an error situation in its own
2. The driving direction arrow forward is shown when
operation, the picture of the book flashes, the service
forward driving direction is engaged. The arrow flashes,
code appears (13. a) on the lower line. In this
if the shuttle has been operated at a speed over 10
instance please contact an authorized workshop.
km/h. The arrow flashes also, when the Automatic
14. The slip percentage display is selected with the
Traction Control is activated (Automatic Traction
change over switch when in the sector III no symbol
Control has been switched to ready status).
can be seen. When the wheels are slipping the slip
3. The driving direction arrow backward is shown when
percentage is shown on the bottom line.
reverse driving direction is engaged. The arrow flashes,
if the shuttle has been operated at a speed of over 10
km/h. The arrow flashes also, when the Automatic
Traction Control is activated (Automatic Traction
Control has been switched to ready status).
4. When the parking brake is on or in the neutral position,
the neutral (N) symbol is shown.
Only one of these signals (N-letter, front arrow, back
arrow) is shown at a time and one of them must always be
shown.

1. Service function codes 1.1. The service function codes used by
Hitech-system
In a possible error situation the display shows the
following symbols: The table below shows the different error function levels
and how to drive the tractor away from the working area.
If a service code or codes has been found the symbols of
the power take-off, the outdoor temperature and the
driving speed cannot be seen in the lower display sector.
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not run over 1500 rpm,
there is a serious fault (air in fuel). Move the tractor to a
safe place to avoid serious damages.
IMPORTANT: If the display shows one of the table codes,

immediately contact your authorized Valtra workshop even
1 though the error may not prevent tractor driving.
2
T D21
- book symbol (1) is flashing

- the service function code (2) shows in the diagnostics
sector below
Service
function Error meaning / measures
codes
A
A128 * Error in function of the clutch- or the accelerator pedal electrical circuits, which may change the
tractor functions: the clutch pedal function, the PS- functions or the shuttle functions. The tractor can
normally be driven away from the working area (without loading). Depress the clutch pedal when
engaging the driving direction. When disengaging the transmission use the HiShift- switches or the
shuttle lever.
A192, Fuel sensor information is incorrect. Driving can be continued normally. Incorrect display of the fuel
A293 gauge.
A215 Error in function of the engine fuel system. The engine output will be limited and the maximum running
speed is 1500 rpm.
A236 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine works but malfunctions may occur (f.eg. lack of
output, smoking). Driving can be continued temporarily, but the malfunction must be repaired as soon
as possible.
A311 *, Gearbox oil temperature information is incorrect. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
A312 * depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. The shuttle automatics do not
function.
A313 * Injection pump position information is incorrect. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. PS- automatics do not function.
A314 * Faults in function of the clutch pedal for the forward drive controls. Continuing to work may damage
the transmission. Tractor can in normally be driven away from working area (without loading). Depress
the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. When disengaging transmission use the HiShift-
switches or shuttle lever.
A326 * Tractor battery voltage is too low or too high, which may damage the electronics or prevent tractor
driving. If the oil pressure is too low the oil pressure may reduce and damage the multi-disc clutches
for power shuttle and power shift. Check the battery condition and charging generator performance. In
general driving can be continued, but do not run the tractor for long before the reason for the error
function is identified.
A327 The operating voltage coming to the engine control unit is too low which may prevent engine running.
Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition even if the engine
works.
A330, The operating voltage for the engine injection pump is too low or high. The engine will not start or it
A331 stops. Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition (and charging
voltage) even if the engine works.

Service
codes
A332, The temperature sensor for engine injection air is faulty. The engine works but its output and exhaust
A333 gas emissions change. Driving can be continued temporarily.
A334 The engine injection air temperature is too high. The engine output will be reduced. Check the
cleanness of all tractor radiator grilles (in front). Driving can be continued, but the reason for heating
must be found out as soon as possible.
A335 There is too much water in the water trap for fuel system. Drain water from the water trap in lower part
of prefilter. Drain water also from main filter. See instructions in Operator's manual in section Periodic
maintenance". If water has to be drained frequently from filters, the reason for great water content in
fuel must be found.
A340, Error in the coolant temperature sensor. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
A341 temporarily, but the possible engine overheating may cause engine damage. The fault must be
repaired as soon as possible.
A343 Faults in the function of the front control accelerator pedal. The engine runs only at low idling speed.
Lift up the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch for a moment to the off position. Start the
engine again (do not touch the accelerator pedal). You can try driving by lifting the engine revs with the
cruise control. If cruise control is not fitted, try driving with the hand throttle or accelerator pedal so,
that you do not push the pedal totally to the bottom.
A345 Error in the engine controlling system. For safety reasons the engine runs only at idling speed.
A348 Error in the front wheels position sensor. Driving can be continued normally. The differential lock
automatic does not function.
A350 Faults in the functions of the hand throttle. The engine runs only at idling speed. Turn the hand throttle
to the minimum position and turn the ignition switch for a moment to the off position. Start the engine
again. Try driving with accelerator pedal or cruise control.
A351 * Faults in the function of the clutch pedal for the reverse drive controls. Continuing to work may
damage the transmission. Driving can be continued by turning the seat forwards and starting the
tractor again.
A354, Error in the engine oil pressure sensor. The engine output will be limited. NOTE: The engine oil
A355, pressure may be low. To avoid serious engine damage avoid using the engine, just move the tractor to
A356 a safe place.
A357, Error in the engine boost pressure sensor. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
A358 temporarily, but the malfunction must be found out as soon as possible.
A365 * Faults in the function of the accelerator pedal for the reverse drive controls. Driving can be continued
by turning the seat forwards and re-starting the tractor.
A390 * Tractor battery voltage is too low or too high, which may damage the electronics or prevent tractor
driving. Check the battery condition and alternator performance. In general driving can be continued,
but do not run the tractor for long before the reason for the error function is identified.
C
C131 Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine normally works but there can be errors in some
functions. The engine information can not be seen in the instrument panel (running speed,
temperature, indicator lights). Driving can be continued temporarily, because the engine protection
system is operating.
C132 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is running with the speed of 1400 rpm so the tractor
can be driven away from the working area. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
C233 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine stops. Switch power off for at least 5 seconds and
try re-starting again.
C240-C249 Error in the tractor electrical system. Some functions of the tractor do not work or the tractor does not
move. The fault must be found as soon as possible.
C293 Faults in the function of the cruise control. The control does not function. The tractor can be driven
normally. The fault has to be rectified soon.
C295, C296, Error in the tractors controlling system. Limitation of functions of the tractor.
C297
C330 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine moves into home driving mode"
and the engine runs continuously with the speed of 1400 rpm and with the reduced max output. The
tractor can be driven home or to the workshop. If the engine does not run, switch power off for a while
and try re-starting again. If the engine will not start contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
C901-C929 These service codes do not appear during driving, but they can appear during service and
maintenance. Driving can be continued normally.

Service
codes
C930 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful. Driving can be continued but the display for
slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correct. Ask an
authorized Valtra workshop to check the calibration of front axle steering angles.
C931 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful; the front wheels are not in a straight enough
position. Repeat the calibration and drive straight forward.
C932, Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the 4WD is engaged or there is an error.
C933 Disengage the 4WD and repeat the calibration. Drive until the 4WD indicator light in the instrument
panel goes out and after that press the pre-programming switch of the Power Shift.
C934, Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the differential lock is engaged or there is an
C935 error. Disengage the differential lock and repeat the calibration.
C936 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the values are not saved in the memory. Switch
power off for a moment, re-start again and repeat the calibration.
C937 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, time reserved for calibration ran out. Repeat
the calibration and do the calibration steps faster.
C938-C941 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful there may be an error somewhere in the
transmission sensor. Repeat the calibration. If it is not successful, driving can be continued, but the
display for slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correctly.
Contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
C942 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful. Switch power off for a moment, re-start again
and repeat the calibration.
C943 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the driving speed is too low. Check the
calibration instructions from the Operator's manual. Repeat the calibration, use the driving speed
mentioned in the instructions, about 6 km/h (3,7 miles/h).
C944 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful, the driving speed varies too much during the
calibration. Repeat the calibration. Keep the driving speed as stable as possible during the calibration.
Check the ground where you calibrate. The ground must not be uneven, too wet or slippery. Also the
high vegetation under the tractor may disturb the calibration.
C945 Calibration of the speed sensors C80 is not successful there may be an error somewhere in the transĆ
mission sensor. Repeat the calibration. If it is not successful, driving can be continued, but the display
for slip percentage, automatic 4WD and differential lock automatic do not operate correctly. Contact an
authorized Valtra workshop.
C950-C999 These service codes do not appear during driving, but they can appear during service and
maintenance. Driving can be continued normally.
d
d116 Faults in the PS- push buttons. Working and driving can be continued but the PS- gears will not
change.
d117 * Faults in the shuttle lever functions. The transmission is engaged in protection mode. Driving is
prevented for safety reasons until repaired.
d118 Faults in the limit switches of the PTO speed selection lever. The PTO is engaged in the protection
mode and it stops. After switching the power off and on try re-starting again. Working with tractor can
carry on normally.
d123 * Faults in functions of the shuttle lever for the forward drive controls. The transmission is engaged in
protection mode. Driving is prevented for safety reasons until repaired. This will avoid possible damage
to the transmission.
d127 * Error in the parking brake valve circuit function, this may prevent tractor driving. Driving can be tried by
depressing the clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction.
d129 Errors in the function of the PS- preprogramming buttons (front- /rear- ). The PS- preprogramming
cannot be used, otherwise working and driving can be continued.
d130 Errors in the function of the PTO starting switches (in the cab / on the mudguard). The PTO is engaged
in protection mode and it is stopped. Otherwise working with tractor can carry on normally.
d133 * Fault in the function of the clutch pedals (front- / rear- ), which may prevent tractor driving. Try driving
without touching the clutch pedal. Starting to drive can also be tried in the following way: switch the
power off, turn the seat around, start the engine, engage the new driving direction (without touching
the clutch pedal).

Service
codes
d152, Errors in the functions of the shuttle lever of the reverse drive controls. The PTO is engaged in
d153 protection mode, so tractor driving with reverse drive controls is prevented for safety reasons until
repaired. Driving using the forward drive controls is possible in the following way: switch power off,
turn the seat to the forward position, start the engine, engage the driving direction.
d188 Error in the rocker switch of the 4WD. Driving can be continued. 4WD will engage.
d189 Error in the rocker switch of the differential lock. Driving can be continued, but the differential lock will
disengage.
d215 Faults in the front clutch pedal function. The transmission is engaged in protection mode, so tractor
driving using the forward drive controls is prevented for the safety reasons until repaired. If the tractor
is equipped with reverse drive controls driving with reverse drive controls is possible in the following
way: switch the power off, turn the seat to the rearward position, start the engine, engage the driving
direction.
d254 Faults in the rear clutch pedal function. Transmission is engaged in protection mode, so tractor driving
using the reverse drive controls is prevented for safety reasons until repaired. Driving with forward
drive controls is possible in the following way: switch the power off, turn the seat into the forward
position, start the engine, engage the driving direction.
E
E124 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine stops or it does not start. Switch power off for at
least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E211 The operating voltage for the engine injection pump is too low. The engine stops and does not start or
runs unstable. Check fuses F55 and F56. Check the battery and charging generator condition.
E212 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine stops immediately. Switch power
off for at least 5 seconds and then try re-starting the engine. If the engine will not start contact an
authorized Valtra workshop.
E213 Error in the engine controlling system, which makes it difficult to stop the engine normally. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds, re-start the engine, stop the engine and then switch power on. If the
same code appears the error must be rectified quickly.
E214 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The engine stops immediately. Switch power
off for at least 5 seconds and then try re-starting the engine. If the error recurs contact an authorized
Valtra workshop.
E217, Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
E218, seconds and then re-start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
E219 faulty.
E220, Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not start or it stops. Switch power off for at
E221 least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E222 Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
seconds and then re-start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E227, E228, Error in the tractor or engine electrical system. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be
E229, E230, continued temporarily.
E231
E233 Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine will not start.
E234 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not start. Contact an authorized Valtra workĆ
shop.
E235, Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued temporarily, if the tractor moves. ConĆ
E236 tact an authorized Valtra workshop.
E244, E245, Error in the tractor electrical system. The traction engages to protect the transmission, the tractor does
E246, E247, not move even though the engine is running.
E248, E249
E250, E251 Error in the transmission controlling system. The transmission may be engaged to neutral or some of
the tractor functions do not operate at all. When the tractor is stationary, disconnect the current from
the ignition lock for a few second, and reconnect. If the same service code appears again, immediately
contact the Valtra service agent.

Service
codes
E252, Error in the transmission controlling system. Driving can be continued, but in some functions there
E253 could be differences comparing earlier functions (e.g. Sigma Power). When the tractor is stationary,
disconnect the current from the ignition lock for a few second, and reconnect. If the same service code
appears again, contact the Valtra service agent.
E260 Error in the engine controlling unit. The engine will not start. Switch power off for at least 5 seconds
and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the engine controlling unit may be faulty.
E261 Error in the engine controlling unit. The engine stops immediately and can not be re-started. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds and then switch power on. If the same code appears again the engine
controlling unit may be faulty.
E270 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is normally running but it gives only a part of the
E271 maximum output. Disconnect the current from the tractor for a moment, and start the engine again.
The fault must be rectified soon.
E272 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine is normally running but it gives only a part of the
maximum output. The fault must be rectified soon.
E310 Temperature of the engine controlling unit is too high. The engine may run normally but the
malfunction must be found out quickly. If the engine stops let it get cool and try re-starting again.
E315, Error in the tractor electrical system. The engine should work at least with the accelerator pedal or with
E316 hand throttle but there may be faults in other functions.
E325 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. Switch power off for at least 5
seconds and then re-start the engine. If the same code appears again the injection pump may be
faulty.
E326 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine works but may have some running troubles. Switch
power off for at least 5 seconds and then re-start the engine. If the same code appears again the
injection pump may be faulty.
E368, Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued temporarily, but there can be troubles
E369 in the engine function. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible. Driving can be
continued but be prepared for possible malfunctions during driving.
F
F283 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. Driving can be continued
temporarily, but the malfunction must be rectified as soon as possible.
F284 Error in the engine controlling system. Driving can be continued, but the engine running speed and
also the driving speed have been limited to the lower level.
F320 *, Transmission speed sensors may have faults. Working and driving can be continued temporarily by
F321 *, depressing the clutch pedal when engaging driving direction. The PS and shuttle automatics do not
F324 * function.
F322 Error in the transmission controlling system. Driving can not be continued.
F342 The engine rotation speed information is incorrect. The engine output will be limited and the max
running speed is 1800 rpm. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the malfunction must be rectified
as soon as possible.
F366 The front axle speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued, but the 4WD automatic does
not function.
F367 The rear wheel speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued, but the automatic of 4WD and
differential lock does not function.
F371, F372 Error in the engine output control. The engine does not give the maximum power.
F373 The front power take-off speed information is incorrect. Driving can be continued normally. The front
power take-off does not function.
F374 Error in the controlling of 4WD. The 4WD can not be used. Driving can be continued.
F375 Error in the controlling of differential lock. The differential lock does not function. Driving can be
continued.
F382 Error in the radar speed information. Driving can be continued, but automatic of the 4WD and
differential lock does not function.
L
L250 Error in the engine controlling system or injection pump. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as
possible to avoid the possible engine damage. If the engine works well driving can be continued
temporarily. But if the engine runs with the speed of 1400 rpm driving can be continued only to move
the tractor to a safe area for rectifying the error.

Service
codes
L254 Error in the tractor electric or fuel system. The engine will not start or it stops. The too low rotation
speed when starting the engine may be the reason to the error. Check the battery and starter motor
condition. The error can be from air in fuel.
L256 Error in the engine injection pump. The engine output will be limited. There can be air in fuel or the
injection pump can be faulty. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
L334 The tractor has been driven too fast, or there is an error function in the sensors. High speed driving
may damage the transmission and is a safety risk in traffic. Check that the tyre parameter has been
reset correct (according to the tyre size). Driving can be continued.
L335 Engine rotation speed has been too high or there is an error function in the sensors. The engine can
have too high revs when driving downhill with too high speed or with too low gear. This can damage
the tractor (f.eg. engine, transmission, hydraulic pump). Driving can be continued.
L336 Engine rotation speed has been too high. The engine stops immediately. Start the engine again, after
that driving can be continued normally. The engine can have too high revs when driving downhill with
too high speed or with too low gear. This can damage the tractor (f.eg. engine, transmission, hydraulic
pump).
L337 Oil pressure of the engine is too low. Check the oil level. NOTE: Avoid using the engine to avoid the
possible serious engine damage just short transferring driving can be done with the tractor. Take
immediately contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
L338 Oil pressure of the engine is too low or there is no pressure at all. Engine stops immediately. Check the
oil level. The engine must not be tried to start.
L345 The coolant temperature is too high. The engine output will be limited. Check the coolant level and the
cleanliness of the radiator. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the reason for heating has to be
rectified.
L346 The coolant temperature is very high. Engine stops after 30 seconds. Check the coolant level and the
cleanliness of the radiator. Let the engine cool off a moment and start the engine. Let the engine run
without load until the temperature reduces. Driving can be continued temporarily, but the reason for
heating has to be rectified as soon as possible.
L351 The engine boost pressure is too low. The engine runs but the malfunction has to be checked out as
soon as possible to avoid the possible engine damage. Check the cleanliness of air filter, (see the warĆ
ning light for blocked filter on instrument panel).
L353 The fuel pressure (after the filters) is too low. Check that there is fluid in the fuel tank. Check fuse F54.
The feed pump of fuel system may be faulty. The fuel filters may be blocked or frozen. The engine can
be run temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area to avoid the injection pump damage.
L355 The temperature of the fuel injection pump is too high. The engine output will be limited. The
malfunction has to be rectified as soon as possible to avoid the possible damage.
L359 Air in the fuel system. The maximum running speed (1500 rpm) and the engine output is limited. Before
repairing the air leakage, the tractor can only be driven the minimum distance necessary, in order that
the injection pump does not damage.
L360 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine does not give the maximum output, but the driving
can be continued temporarily. Contact an authorized Valtra workshop.
L361 The boost pressure of the engine is too high. The engine output will be limited and the maximum runĆ
ning speed is 1500 rpm.
L419 The PTO shaft rotation speed may be too low. Disc clutch may slip. The PTO is engaged in protection
mode and it stops. After switching the power off and on starting can be tried again. Check first that the
implement is not jammed/seized. Otherwise working with the tractor can be done normally.
L422 * Power transmission clutches may slip. The transmission is engaged in protection mode, so the tractor
cannot be driven until repaired. Check fuse F22.
L449 The disc clutch of the 4WD may slip. The 4WD disengages. Driving can be continued.
P
P101 * Faults in PS- valves. The PS is engaged in protection mode. Working and driving can be continued
P103 * temporarily by depressing clutch pedal when engaging the driving direction. Only one PS- speed
P105 * operates.
P107 * Faults in the shuttle valves. The power shuttle is engaged in protection mode. Working and driving can
P109 * be continued temporarily (only in one driving direction) by depressing the clutch pedal when engaging
the driving direction.

Service
codes
P125 Error in the PTO valve circuit function. The PTO is engaged in protection mode and it stops. After
switching the power off and on starting can be tried again. Otherwise working with tractor can be done
normally.
P131 Error in the engine starting circuit function. This may prevent the engine starting. If the code comes
into view when the engine is running, working and driving can be continued in general, but next time
starting may be prevented. Move the tractor to a safe area.
P132 Error in the 4WD control function, which may prevent 4WD engagement when engaging the parking
brake. Note when choosing the parking place. In general 4WD operates in other functions.
P233 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine will not start or it stops. The injection pump can be
faulty.
P234 Error in the engine controlling system. The engine output will be limited. There can be troubles in the
engine function. The malfunction must be repaired as soon as possible.
* If the display shows simultaneously two or more service 2.1. Changing selection of driving start- and
codes marked with a star, then tractor driving is shuttle-automatic ON/OFF
prevented until repaired, for safety reasons.
In addition the tractor has a function which delays the Remove any possible pre-programming of the PS-gear
activation of the parking brake when stopping the engine. (before changing the settings values, note down the
values if needed).
The function activates: 1. Stop the engine and turn the ignition switch off.
- if the engine revs are under 400 r/min over one second,
but remains running
- if the driving speed is over 5 km/h
In this case the tractor does not move and no service
codes are shown in the display.
To continue the driving the power/ignition has to be
switched off (the engine stopped) and started again.
2. Resetting parameters
(Driving start- and shuttle-automatic on/off, changing of 2
tyre size, temperature unit (C / F), speed unit
(K.P.H/M.P.H))
If the size of the tyres on the tractor are changed, then the 1
tyre parameters have to be changed according to the
following instructions.
In the same way driving start- and shuttle-automatic T D22
on/off, changing of temperature C/F or changing of speed
indication (km/h / miles/h) can also be selected according 2. Push the pre-programming knob of the PS (1), push
to the following instructions. the clutch pedal down and turn the ignition on at the
same time.

Setting mode
menu
Setting code (on picture point 5)
(on picture
point 4)
3 Driving speed unit selection: km/h or
110
miles/h
100 Outdoor temp. unit selection: °C or °F.
0...5 = rear PTO engaging speed, 0
74
lowest, 5 fastest
Setting driving speed parameters
20
(tyre)
0.5...20 = Driving start- and shuttle-
automatic On
10
0 = Driving start- and shuttle-autoĆ
matic Off
C80 Calibrating speed sensors
NOTE: In the setting mode menu (4) stepping up/down

T D23 can be achieved with the PS- push buttons (2) up and
down (symbol is flashing) and the selection is confirmed
3. The symbol of one main mode F III (3), will then flash with the PS pre-programming button (1) (symbol is
(2 HZ) in the upper power shuttle sector. Other symbols invisible and index numbers are continuously displayed in
are invisible during this process. the right hand side of lower diagnostics sector). After this
4. Confirm the selection by depressing the PS the setting/calibrating procedure can be carried out.
pre-programming button (1). Moving to the next point is done by pushing the PS
pre-programming button (1), after which the symbols
start to flash again and a new point can be stepped
through by using the PS- push buttons (2) in the setting
mode menu. The confirmation is then carried out again
with the pre-programming button (1) etc.
3
NOTE: Escape from the setting mode by switching off the
ignition switch.
T D24
5. After this the main mode symbol F III (3) is displayed

continuously and at the same time the first setting
mode symbol 10 (4) started to flash (2 Hz) in the left
hand side of the lower diagnostics sector. 4
6. The display is now in the setting mode and various
settings can be done.
T D25
NOTE: When the symbol FIII (3) was confirmed, the
number 10 started to flash in the LH side of the lower
display block. Number 10 (4) is the starting point in the 7. Select the setting mode symbol 10 (flashing) (setting of
setting mode menu. In the following table the setting driving start- and shuttle-automatic) in the setting
mode menus (4) are explained. mode menu (4) by stepping up using the hare/up PS-
push button (2) (in the speed gear lever knob) (if the
selection goes past/beyond use the tortoise/down PS-
button to return to the desired value), and confirm the
selection by pushing the PS pre-programming button
(1).

2.2. Resetting driving speed / tyre parameters
By changing this parameter value the driving speed
display can be adjusted so that it shows the correct value
according to the tractor tyres and transmission type. This
procedure is carried out in the factory for all new tractors.
If tyres of different dimensions are fitted to the tractor after
delivery, the parameters must be reset according to these
instructions.
5
2
M D32
8. The setting mode symbol 10 disappears from the

1
display and the present parameter value (5) is visible in
the RH side segment:
0.5...20 = active state time for driving start- and T D22
shuttle-automatic as seconds (controlled system
0,5 s)
1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
0 = Driving start- and shuttle-automatic Off
setting instructions of driving start- and
The factory setting is 4.0 s driving start- and shuttle-automatic, points 1-7 starting on page 42.
shuttle-automatic is on.
9. Select the desired 4WD active state time or 0 =
disengaged with PS- push buttons (2) (in the speed
gear lever knob).
10. When the desired parameter value (5) is in the
display, it is confirmed by pushing the PS
pre-programming button (1) until the set parameter
value (5) disappears from display and the setting
mode symbol 10 starts to flash.
NOTE: Escaping from the setting mode is done by
switching off the ignition.
T D27
2. Select the setting mode symbol 20 (flashing) (setting of

tyre parameters) in the setting mode menu (4) by
stepping up using the hare/up PS- push button (2) (in
the speed gear lever knob) (if the selection goes
past/beyond use the tortoise/down button to return to
the desired value), and confirm the selection by
pushing the PS pre-programming button (1).

2.3. Rear PTO engaging speed
The rear PTO engaging speed can be adjusted. The
factory setting for the tractor is the lowest engaging
speed, which it is recommended not to change.
If the index value is changed (= engaging speed), make
sure that the PTO shaft is suitable to withstand the faster
starting.
5
2
T D28
3. The setting mode symbol 20 disappears from the 1

the RH side segment.
4. The flashing parameter value (5) can be changed by
T D22
using the PS- push buttons (2) in the speed gear lever
knob, see the parameter table on Specifications on
page 182. 1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
NOTE: The tyre parameter does not need to be set shuttle-automatic points 1-7 starting on page 42.
separately to the instrument panel. The instrument panel
gets it automatic from the gear control unit.
5. When the desired parameter value (5) is in the display,
it is confirmed by pushing the PS pre-programming
button (1) until the set parameter value (5) disappears
from display and the setting mode symbol 20 starts to
flash.
6. You can check the set parameter value (5) by repeating
the points 2-5. Now the correct parameter value has
been set.
7. When the desired tyre parameter has been set, the
speed sensor calibrating C80 has to be done
according to the instruction, see point 2.6. on page 48
so that the slip display, automatic 4WD and automatic
differential lock will work correctly.
M D33
2. Select the setting mode symbol 74 (flashing) (setting of

the rear PTO engaging speed) in the setting mode
menu (4) by stepping up using the hare/up PS- push
button (2) (in the speed gear lever knob), and confirm
the selection by pushing the PS pre-programming
button (1).

2.4. Changing temperature unit of outdoor
temperature display
The outdoor temperature unit can be changed between
°F or °C.
1
M D34
3. The setting mode symbol 74 disappears from the T D22

the RH side segment. 1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the
4. The parameter value (5) can be changed by using the setting instructions of driving start- and
PS- push buttons (2) in the speed gear lever knob. shuttle-automatic, points 1-7 starting on page 42.
The parameter value can be selected from 0 ... 5
(adjustment in steps of 0,2 s)
0 = lowest engaging speed, the factory setting =
recommended
...
5 = fastest engaging speed
5. When the parameter value (5) is in the display, it is
confirmed by pushing the PS pre-programming
button (1) until the set parameter value (5) disappears
from display and the setting mode symbol 74 starts to
flash.
6. You can check the set parameter value (5) by repeating
the points 2-5. Now the correct parameter value has
been set.
T D29
2. Step using the PS- push buttons (2) (in the speed
gear lever knob) in the setting mode menu (4) and
select the setting mode symbol 100, which is flashing
(choosing temperature unit), and confirm the selection
by pushing the PS pre-programming button (1).

5
4
1=Celsius
2=Fahrenheit
T D30 T D31
3. The setting mode symbol 100 disappears from the 2. Step using the PS- push buttons (2) (in the speed
display and the present parameter value (5) is visible in gear lever knob) in the setting mode menu (4) and
the RH side segment: select the setting mode symbol 110, which is flashing
(choosing driving speed unit) and confirm the selection
1=°C. by pushing the PS pre-programming button (1).
2=°F.
The factory setting is according to the marketing area.

4. Select the desired temperature unit by pushing the
PS- push buttons (2) (in the speed gear lever knob)
and confirm the selection by pushing the PS
pre-programming button (1). After this the outdoor
temperature is shown either in Celsius or Fahrenheit
units.
2.5. Changing driving speed unit

The driving speed unit can be either km/h or miles/h.
5
1= km/h
2=miles/h
T D32
3. The setting mode symbol 110 disappears from the

2 display and the present driving speed unit value (5) is
visible in the RH side segment:
1=km/h.
2=miles/h.
1
The factory setting is according to the marketing area.
4. Select the desired driving speed unit by pushing the
PS- push buttons (2) (in the speed gear lever knob)
T D22
and confirm the selection by pushing the PS
pre-programming button (1). After this the driving
1. Activate the setting mode menu according to the speed is shown either in km/h or miles/h.
shuttle-automatic, points 1-7 starting on page 42. NOTE: Escaping from the setting mode is done by
NOTE: If the selected driving speed unit is miles/h,
symbol km/h is not shown at all in the display.

2.6. Calibrating speed sensors 5. Confirm the selection by depressing the PS
pre-programming button (1).
Calibrating the speed sensors has always to be done
when changing the tractor tyres of different dimensions
according to the instructions below. Reserve even and
straight driving space 50-100 m (55-110 yards) for
performing the operation.
NOTE: Ensure before starting calibrating that the switches 3
of the 4WD and the differential lock are in off" position.
1. Set the desired tyre parameter value, see instruction
section 2.2. on page 44.
2. Stop the engine and turn the ignition switch off.
4
2
T D24
6. After this the main mode symbol F III (3) is displayed

1 continuously and at the same time the first setting
mode symbol 10 (4) started to flash (2 Hz) in the left
hand side of the lower diagnostics sector.
T D22
3. Push the pre-programming knob of the PS (1), push

the clutch pedal down and turn the ignition on at the
same time and start the engine.
T D181
7. Change the symbol C80 (5) (flashing) in the display

using the tortoise/down PS-button (in the speed gear
lever knob). If the selection goes past use the hare/up
PS-button to return to the desired value.
T D23
8. Confirm the selection by pushing the PS
pre-programming button (1).
4. The symbol of one main mode F III (3), will then flash
(2 HZ) in the upper power shuttle sector. Other symbols
are invisible during this process.

6 8
T D184 T D182
9. After this the symbol 00.0 (6) is displayed continuously. 10. 4.After this symbol 00 (8) starts to flash in the display.
10. The display is now in the calibrating mode and the NOTE: If the symbol 00 is not displayed but for e.g.
calibration of the speed sensors can be done. service code C930 is, see its meaning from the service
10. 1.Select gear H1 and set the engine running speed function codes table beginning from the page 36 and
about 1100 rpm/min with the hand throttle or cruise operate according to the instructions.
control.
10. 2.Move the power shuttle lever in the forward driving NOTE: The driving speed has to be constant during the
direction and accelerate at the speed of about calibration.
6 km/h (3.7 miles/h) driving straight forward (the 10. 5.Continue driving straight forward with the constant
speed measured by the radar is shown in the side speed about 6 km/h (3.7 miles/h), until...
pillar display).
9
7
T D183
T D185
10. 6.The display shows symbol 01 (9) (continuously).

10. 3.When the speed (7) is about 6 km/h (3.7 miles) 10. 7.Stop the tractor when the symbol 01 appears in the
confirm the selection by pushing the PS display, after a moment the flashing symbol C80 will
pre-programming button (1). The confirmation can appear in the display. This means that calibrating
not be done until the 4WD indicator light has gone has succeeded.
out. 10. 8.Switch off the ignition for a moment so that the
calibration will be saved in the memory.
10. 9.Now calibrating the speed sensors is done.
11. Check the success of the calibration as following:

11. 1.Set the instrument panel to show the percentage
wheel slip, see instructions in section 2.1.4., on D 2.2.7. Light switch (7)
page 55.
11. 2.Drive on even ground with constant speed and
straight forward without wheel slip. If the slip
percentage on the instrument panel is between
0-3 % the calibration has succeeded. 9
However if the slip percentage is more than 3 % the
reason to this over 3 % may be that the ground
speed radar can not measure the speed correctly
8
(the ground may be too wet, uneven or icy also the
high vegetation under the tractor may disturb the 7
radar) so do the calibration again.
12. Working with the tractor can be continued normally.
D 2.2.6. Headlight dipper, direction

indicators etc. (6)
T D34
The rocker switch has three positions. The 1st position is

off. When the power is on and the switch is pushed to the
2nd position the parking lights are switched on. The 3rd
position switches the headlights on.
NOTE: If the lights are left on after turning the current off
the buzzer begins to sound.
When the current is off, the parking lights can be switched
6
on without buzzer sounding. This function is useful when
leaving the tractor standing with parking lights on.
D 2.2.8. Switch for hazard warning

flashers (8)
T D33
When this switch is pressed all four direction indicators
Headlight dipper: flash. Pressing the switch again stops the flashers.
Main beam/Dipped beam will change when pulling in
turn the lever towards the driver. D 2.2.9. Main circuit switch (9) (not
Direction indicators standard)
Lever in front position: LH indicators on.
Lever in rear position: RH indicators on. The main circuit switch is an extra equipment, see Extra
and alternative equipment" on page 186.
Horn
Push the button at the end of the lever.
Windscreen wiper
Operates when turning the control lever. The wiper has
drizzle position and 2 speeds.
Windscreen washer
Operates when pushing the control lever inwards.
Headlight flasher
Operates when moving the lever towards the driver when
the headlights on dipped beam are switched on.

Starting position
D 2.2.10. Upper headlights (10), extra If the automatic glowing is on, the engine can be
equipment started when the glowing light in the instrument
panel is gone out.
If automatic glowing is not used, the switch can be
turned directly to the starting position.
WARNING: Do not turn the starter key to

STOP position when driving. When the
power is off, the parking brake applies and
ALL WHEELS LOCK.
WARNING: If the engine stops while tractor
10 is moving (i.e. out of fuel) do not depress
the clutch pedal. Engine revolutions/
braking effect must be maintained to avoid
the driving wheels becoming "locked"
which will cause a severe and sudden
braking effect. Do not use CONTROL STOP
while the tractor is in motion.
The STOP position of the starter switch can
be used as an EMERGENCY STOP. The
T D107 tractor and several movements of the
implements can be stopped if any fault
occurs, by turning the starter key to the
When this switch is pressed the upper headlights are
STOP position (the engine stops, all the
switched on. When the upper headlights are on the lower
wheels lock, the transmission disengages
headlights in the front are off and vice versa.
and the movement of the linkage stops).
D 2.2.11. Starter switch (11)
11
T D108
Starter switch positions:

Stop, motor
1 Power on
When the ignition switch is turned from the stop
position to position 1, in cold conditions, while the
engine is cold, the automatic glowing is turned on
and the glow indicator light in the instrument panel
comes on.
(normal position for running the engine, which also
allows for the electrical equipment to be used when
the engine is not running)

D 2.2.12. Proline-instrument panel (12)
The driver receives information from the gauges, a
graphical display, LED warning lights, switches and a
D 2.2.12.3. Tachometer (12.3)
buzzer.
The tachometer (rev. counter) shows the engine speed in
hundreds of revolutions per minute.
D 2.2.12.1. Fuel gauge and indicator
light (12.1) D 2.2.12.4. Speedometer (12.4)
The speedometer displays the speed in kilometres per
12.2 12.5 12.3 12.5 hour (mph).
12.1 12.4
D 2.2.12.5. Indicator lights for direction

indicator (12.5)
When using the direction indicator, the indicator light for
the chosen direction flashes. If the light flashes quickly,
one of the bulbs on the tractor has failed.
12.1a
12.6 D 2.2.12.6. Indicator light for main
beam (12.6)
T D109
This indicator light comes on, when the main beam is on.
The fuel level indicator light (12.1a) comes on when about
15 l fuel is left (without extra tank). Filling the tank is
recommended immediately when the light has come on.
D 2.2.12.2. Coolant thermometer (12.2)

The zone between blue (cold) and red (hot) is the normal
operating temperature. Stop the engine if the needle
moves into the red zone. The STOP light is flashing, if the
needle moves into the red zone (see page 53).

D 2.2.12.7. Indicator lights on instrument panel (12.7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
T D110
1 Direction indicator warning light for second trailer the parking brake position. If the indicator light is on
((green). If one of the bulbs on the combination has and the STOP light is flashing, the parking brake
failed, this light will not come on.) cable is broken or incorrectly adjusted see adjusting
2 Direction indicator warning light for first trailer ((green). instructions on page 162.
If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this 16 Low fuel level (yellow), comes on when about 15 l fuel
light will not come on.) is left and the buzzer is sounding (once). If the tractor
3 Not in use is fitted with the extra tank the level will be about 30 l.
4 Engine air cleaner warning light for blocked filter 17 Battery charging (red)
(yellow), filter must be serviced -the indicator light is on, when battery charging is
- warning light is on when the engine is running and not operating and the buzzer is sounding (once)
the buzzer is sounding (once) IMPORTANT: The charging failure must be fixed at
5 Engine oil pressure (red) is too low once. When the voltage is reduced, the electric valves
-warning light is on when the engine is running and may reduce the oil pressure for the multi-disc
the buzzer is sounding continuously and the clutches and cause clutch slippage which may
stop-indicator light flashes damage the clutch discs.
6 Lit together with warnings (yellow) 18 Rear linkage (yellow) in transport position =
7 STOP indicator light (red) - flashes to indicate serious lift/stop/lower switch is in the lift position
fault, i.e. engine oil pressure too low (5), gearbox oil 19 Cruise-control (yellow) is on (constant driving speed
pressure too low (8), gearbox oil temperature too high / constant engine revs chosen)
(9), parking brake cable broken or incorrectly adjusted 20 Not in use
(15) or engine temperature too high (gauge). 21 Differential lock (yellow) is engaged
IMPORTANT: The tractor and the engine must be 22 Rear power take-off (yellow).The indicator light
stopped immediately. Must only be continued in an flashes, when the rear power take-off has been
emergency, e.g. the tractor can be moved to the activated ready to operate. Light is on continuously,
roadside. when the rear power take-off is engaged.
8 Gearbox oil pressure (red) is too low When the starter switch is turned on, all indicator lights in
- warning light is on, the buzzer is sounding (once) use will come on momentarily and the following indicator
and the stop-indicator light flashes lights will remain on until engine is started and systems
9 Gearbox oil temperature (red) is too high are operating normally:
- warning light is on and the stop-indicator light
- engine oil pressure (5)
flashes. Temperature will be shown on the LCD
- stop light (is flashing) (7)
display, instructions on page 57.
- gearbox oil pressure (8)
10 Indicator light for hydraulic pressure filters and for
- front wheel drive (11)
blocked auxiliary hydraulic return oil filter (red)
- parking brake (15)
-comes on along with the buzzer sounding (once)
- battery charging (17)
when engine is running and filter(s) requires service
- see instructions on page 148.
NOTE: light may come on when tractor is started
when it is very cold - see cold start instructions on
page 93.
11 Four-wheel drive (yellow) is engaged
12 Front power take-off (yellow) is on, extra equipment.
Light is on continuously, when front power take-off is
on.
13 Cold start glow (yellow) is on when the starter switch
is in the position 1 and the engine is cold
- see starting instructions on page 93.
14 -indicator light is illuminated when the tractor
is operating in the high power range when using the

PTO (the light is continuously on, yellow). Additionally
in some error situations the indicator light flashes, in
this instance please contact an authorized workshop.
15 Parking brake (red) is on when the shuttle lever is in

LCD-display unit (liquid
D 2.2.12.8. 2. Displays chosen with change over
crystal display) in Proline instrument switch (12.9)
panel (12.8) When the power is switched on, the display that was
selected last is put on the screen.
2.1. Functions on the top line
12.9
T D111
The display has three lines. T D114
1. Fixed displays (two functions on the bottom

By pressing the symbol side of the change over switch for
line): LCD-display unit (12.9) the display changes.
1.1. Operating hours 2.1.1. Working time
T D112 T D115
Running hours are displayed with an accuracy of plus or Working time is, for example, the time that has been
minus one decimal point when the power is on. devoted to ploughing a certain area.
Working time is stored in the memory when the power is
1.2. Clock switched off from the meter.
The operator can reset the counter. See more details on
page 58.
2.1.2. Cruise control
T D113
The clock is displayed on the bottom row, either in 12 or

24 hour display. For more details on changing the hour
display, see page 59. M D25
Setting the correct time, see page 59.
This display mode indicates the status of the cruise
control in connection with the cruise text as follows:
RPM = constant engine running speed
KMH = constant driving speed
The numerical value displays the value of programmed
constant engine revs/driving speed.
When the constant engine running speed or driving speed
is engaged the corresponding text shows with white on
dark background (constant driving speed in picture) and
also the cruise indicator light comes on in the instrument
panel.
The cruise control instructions, for more details see
page 71.

2.1.3. Driving speed km/h, mph 2.1.6. Front PTO speed (extra equipment)
T D117
T D120
The driving speed is displayed as follows:

- When driving speed is under 3 km/h (2 miles/h), the The PTO rotation speed shows beside the symbol (at the
symbol L is displayed on the screen. accuracy of 10 rpm).
- Driving speeds of 0-10 km/h (0-10 miles/h) are
displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus one 2.1.7. Engine running speed
decimal point.
- Driving speeds of 10-15 km/h (10-15 miles/h) are
displayed with an accuracy of plus or minus one
decimal point in steps of 0.2 units.
- Driving speeds of over 15 km/h (15 miles/h) are
displayed without decimals.
You can change the speed unit (km/h / miles/h) by
changing the unit of length, instructions in section 4.8. on T D121
page 60.
This display mode shows the engine RPMs in 10 of

2.1.4. Wheel slip (0-100) revolutions per minute (the gauge with a needle displays
the RPMs in hundreds of RPMs).
2.1.8. Immediate fuel consumption (l/ha,

gal/acre)
T D118
This display mode shows the percentage wheel slip. The

wheel slip percentage is attained by comparing the speed
information from the radar (ground speed) to the rotation
T D174
speed of the wheels.
The radar starts to operate at a speed 0.3 km/h (0.2
miles/h). Before that the display shows only a zero. This display mode shows the immediate fuel consumption
on the area worked.
2.1.5. Rear PTO speed The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by changing the
unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8. on page 60.
Litre, Gallon UK or Gallon US can be selected for the unit
of volume, see instructions in section 4.9. on page 61.
T D119
The PTO rotation speed shows beside the symbol (at the
accuracy of 10 rpm).

2.1.9. Average fuel consumption (l/ha, gal/acre)
2.1.12. Fuel consumption (l, gal)
T D178
T D175
This display mode shows the total fuel consumption.

This display mode shows the average fuel consumption
on the area worked. of volume, see instructions in section 4.9. on page 61.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by changing the The operator can reset the fuel consumption information,
unit of length. See instructions in section 4.8. on page 60.
see instructions in section 2.3. on page 58.
2.1.13. Position of lower links %, 0-100
The operator can reset the fuel consumption information,
2.1.10. Immediate fuel consumption (l/h, gal/h)
M D26
The display shows symbol AC/R and the position of the

lower links as a percentage scale 0 - 100. 0 = the lower
links are in the lowest position and 100 = the lower links
T D176
are in the top position. When the lower links are in the
middle position, the display shows the number 50.
This display mode shows the immediate fuel consumption 2.1.14. Lifting link position of front linkage %,
in an hour.
0-100
2.1.11. Average fuel consumption (l/h, gal/h)
M D27
The display shows symbol AC/F and the position of the

lifting links as a percentage scale 0 - 100. 0 = the lifting
T D177
links are in the lowest position and 100 = the lifting links
are in the top position. When the lifting links are in the
This display mode shows the average fuel consumption in middle position, the display shows the number 50. The
an hour. front linkage is extra equipment.
The operator can reset the fuel consumption information,

2.1.15. Sigma Power %, 0-100 2.1.18. Surface area ha, acre
T D123 T D126
The Sigma Power display shows as percentage how This display shows the area worked. The area reading
much of the maximum power is transferred through the increases only when the implement is used to work the
power take-off. soil (the linkage is not in transport position).
The worked area is stored in memory when power is
2.1.16. Gearbox temperature switched off from the meter.
The unit of area (ha, acre) can be altered by changing the
unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8. on page 60.
The operator can reset the area reading, see instructions
in section 2.3. on page 58.
2.1.19. Maintenance schedule

T D124
Temperature is displayed as follows:

- When the temperature is below +40_C (104_F), lo is
displayed.
- When the temperature is above +40_C (104_F), the
actual temperature is displayed.
- When the temperature is above +119_C (246_F), high T D127
is displayed.
If the temperature is continuously over +90_C (194_F),
clean the radiator and check the oil level. When the tool symbol and periodic maintenance hour
number are illuminated in the display, the appropriate
service work has to be carried out by an authorized
2.1.17. Travel distance m, km, yard, miles workshop. If this work is not carried out, the tool symbol
and periodic maintenance hour number are shown for 10
seconds whenever the ignition is switched on.
When the service has carried out this warning will be
deleted by simultaneously pressing the opposite side to
the symbol of the display setting switch (12.10) and
switching the ignition on. The tool symbol will illuminate
again when the next service interval has been reached.
T D125
2.2. Functions on the middle line
The travel distance is displayed as follows:
- Up to 1 km (1 mile) with an accuracy of plus or minus 1
metre (yard). The display will show the m (yard)
symbol.
- After one kilometre (mile) the display symbol changes 12.9
into km (miles) and displays the distance in kilometres
(miles) with an accuracy of plus or minus two decimals
12.10
points up to a distance of 100 km (100 miles).
- After 100 km (100 miles) the distance is shown with an
accuracy of plus or minus one decimal point.
- The maximum distance displayed is 999.9 km (999.9
T D128
miles).
You can change the unit of distance (km, miles) by
changing the unit of length, see instructions in section 4.8. Move the display change over switch (12.9) function to the
on page 60. middle line by pressing the opposite side to the symbol.
Move back to the top line functions by pressing the
The operator can reset the distance reading, see opposite side to the symbol of the switch again.
instructions in section 2.3. on page 58.
The middle line has the same functions as the top line.
Different functions can be selected to be displayed on the
top and middle lines at the same time.

2.3. Resetting the travel distance, fuel 4. Changing the parameters of the Proline
consumption, working time, and worked area instrument panel LCD display (liquid crystal
readings display)
4.1. Setting mode

12.9
4.1.1. Activating the setting mode
12.10
T D129
- Select the display to show the working time, travel

distance, fuel consumption or the area by pressing the 12.10
symbol side of the display change over switch (12.9)
(travel distance featured in the picture) T D318
- Then press and hold the opposite side to the symbol of
the display setting switch (12.10) until the display is - Activate the setting mode of the display by pressing and
reset. holding down the symbol side of the display setting
The working time, the area, fuel consumption and travel switch (12.10) for over 3 seconds.
distance are always reset at the same time. The display will show the first parameter that can be
changed, adjustment of gauge backlight level.
3. Proline instrument panel LCD display - The rest of the parameters can be displayed by
(liquid crystal display) setting switch (12.10) pressing the opposite side to the symbol of the setting
switch (12.10).
4.1.2. Exiting the setting mode

- Exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
symbol side of the display setting switch (12.10) for
over 3 seconds.
4.2. Setting the backlight level of the display unit,

1-7
12.10
12.9
T D130
To enlarge any middle line display to a height of two rows 12.10

press the opposite side to the symbol of the
T D319
switch (12.10). The top line display then vanishes. Press
the opposite side to the symbol of the switch a second
time to return the display to normal. Activate the setting the backlight level of the display unit in
the setting mode (see instructions in section 4.1.1. on
page 58).
4.2.1. Changing a parameter value
Increasing a parameter value

- Press the symbol side of the display change over
switch (12.9), the parameter value will increase one step
at a time
- or
- Press and hold down the symbol side of the display
change over switch (12.9), the parameter value will
increase continuously.

Decreasing a parameter value Changing the minute display
- Press the opposite side to the symbol of the display
change over switch (12.9), the parameter value will
decrease one step at a time
- or 12.9
- Press and hold down the opposite side to the symbol of
the display change over switch (12.9), the parameter
value will decrease continuously.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (12.10)
12.10
or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
T D134
symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
4.3. Width of the implement cm, inch Press the symbol side of the setting switch (12.10), the
minutes start blinking.
Change minutes in the same way as hours above.
Select the next parameter to be changed by pressing the
12.9 opposite side to the symbol side of the setting
switch (12.10) or exit the setting mode by pressing and
holding down the symbol side of the switch for over 3
seconds.
12.10
4.5. Clock mode 12/24
T D132
Activate the implement width in the setting mode (see

instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58). 12.9
Use the display change over switch (12.9) to change the
parameter value (see instructions in section 4.2.1. on
page 58).
12.10
4.4. Setting the clock
T D135
Changing the hour display

Activate the clock in the setting mode (see instructions in
section 4.1.1. on page 58).
Choice can be made between 12-hour and 24-hour
12.9 displays.
- Press either edge of the display change over
switch (12.9) to change the display to either 12-hour
or 24-hour display.
12.10 Select the next changed parameter by pressing the
T D133 or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
Activate the clock in the setting mode (see instructions in The display shows next the parameter Speed Ratio ppm.
section 4.1.1. on page 58). This parameter is not in use and it does not affect this
model.
When the hour display is blinking, it can be changed.
Use the display change over switch (12.9) to change the
parameter value (see instructions in section 4.2.1. on
page 58).

4.6. Direction indicator buzzer 4.8. Unit of length m, yard
12.9
12.9
12.10
12.10
T D136 T D138
Activate the direction indicator buzzer in the setting mode Activate the unit of length in the setting mode (see
(see instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58). instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58).
- Press either edge of the display change over - Press either edge of the display change over
switch (12.9) to change the display to either on or off. switch (12.9) to change the display to either Metric or
When the function is on (no cross), the buzzer is activated Imperial mode.
together with the direction indicator or the hazard warning. When the unit of length is changed between Metric /
Imperial, the following units also change according to the
table below:
Unit Metric Imperial
Speed km/h mph
4.7. Unit of temperature C, F Distance km, m miles, yard
Surface area ha acre
Implement width cm inch
12.9
12.10
T D137
Activate the unit of temperature in the setting mode (see

instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58).
switch (12.9) to change the display to C or F.
left side of the setting switch (12.10) or exit the setting
mode by pressing and holding down the right side of the
switch for over 3 seconds.

4.9. Unit of volume l, gal (UK, US) 4.11. Display for lifting link position of the front
linkage
12.9
12.9
12.10 12.10
T D218
Activate the display for lifting link position of front linkage

in the setting mode (see instructions in section 4.1.1. on
T D139 page 58).
Activate the unit of volume in tthe setting mode (see switch (12.9) to activate the display for lifting link
instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58). position of front linkage on or off.
- Press either edge of the display change over The purpose of this function is to activate the display for
switch (12.9) to change the display to either Litre, the lifting link position of front linkage with this switch if the
Gallon UK or Gallon US mode. tractor is retrofit with the front linkage.
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the If the tractor equipped with the front linkage has a cross in
opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (12.10) this display the display for lifting link position of front
or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the linkage will not be displayed (see instructions in section
symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds. 2.1.14. on page 56).
4.10. Front PTO speed display opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (12.10)
4.12. Adjusting display contrast
12.9 12.9
12.10
12.10
T D140
T D217
Activate the display contrast in the setting mode (see
Activate the front PTO speed display in the setting mode instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58).
(see instructions in section 4.1.1. on page 58). - Press the opposite side to the symbol of the display
- Press either edge of the display change over change over switch (12.9) to make the display dimmer
switch (12.9) to activate the front PTO speed display on (parameter value is decreased, min. 80) or the symbol
or off. side to make the display brighter (parameter value is
increased, max. 120).
The purpose of this function is to activate the front PTO
speed display with this switch if the tractor is retrofit with Select the next parameter to be changed by pressing the
the front PTO. opposite side to the symbol of the setting switch (12.10)
If the tractor equipped with the front PTO has a cross in or exit the setting mode by pressing and holding down the
this display the front PTO speed will not be displayed (see symbol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.
instructions in section 2.1.6. on page 55).
Select the next changed parameter by pressing the oppoĆ
site side to the symbol of the setting switch (12.10) or exit
the setting mode by pressing and holding down the symĆ
bol side of the switch for over 3 seconds.

5. Proline instrument panel graphical display Proline instrument panel LCD
D 2.2.12.10.
other functions display (liquid crystal display) setting
switch (12.10)
12.10
12.10
T D215
This warning gives information about the pressure drop of

the fuel before running faults appear.
The display is closed by pressing the opposite side to the
symbol of the setting switch (12.10).
Change over switch for

D 2.2.12.9.
LCD-display (liquid crystal display)
unit in Proline instrument panel (12.9)
T D142
The operation of setting switch for LCD-display unit i

Proline instrument panel is explained under LCD-display
unit" starting on page 58.
12.9
T D141
The operation of change over switch for LCD-display unit

is explained under LCD-display unit" starting on
page 54.

D 2.3. Right-side panel / arm rest
at a time, pressing the tortoise button reduces the speed
D 2.3.1. Driving by one step at a time.
The PS gears can also be changed with the rocker switch
on the right side arm rest. Pressing the opposite side to
D 2.3.1.1. Speed gear lever (1) the symbol of the switch increases the speed range by
one step at a time, pressing the symbol side reduces the
speed by one step at a time.
The number (A) on the display unit shows which speed
range is engaged. When the gear number is engaging it
flashes as long as the automatic is engaged.
When turning the ignition switch on the Power Shift will
2
always be in the lowest range, if the power has been
switched off for over 10 seconds. The automatic selection
remembers the previous PS preprogramming in power
shuttle.
3
Speed ranges of the Power Shift gear:
- Speed range 1: direct ratio, the display shows 1.
- Speed range 2: high range, the display shows 2.
- Speed range 3: high range, the display shows 3.
The quick-shift gear can be changed while the tractor is
moving and without depressing the clutch pedal and
2 because of the automatic selection the engagement is
1 smooth.
T D54
D 2.3.1.3. Range lever (3)
This lever (1) selects four synchronized speed gears, the
The range lever selects three different ranges.
centre position is neutral. The speed gears can be used in
all three speed ranges (lever 3, speed ranges LL, M and Front position on right (in the driving direction): crawling
H) and also in the forward and reverse gears. speed range LL
When changing gear, the clutch pedal must not be Rear position on left (in the driving direction): low range
depressed because of the HiShift-switch (4) in the lever. M
Due to the HiShift- automatic selection the engaging is
smooth. Traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible. Front position on left (in the driving direction): high
range H
D 2.3.1.2. Push buttons for Power Low (M) and High (H) ranges are synchronized. When
changing ranges the clutch pedal must not be depressed
Shift (2) because of the HiShift- switch (4) in the lever. The
engagement will be gently controlled due the HiShift-
automatic selection. Traditional use of clutch pedal in all
situations is still possible.
For more details on gear levers see page 95.
T D55
Power Shift (PS) = The 3 step gear change.

The push buttons for the Power Shift are placed both on
the speed gear lever and the range lever knob. Pressing
the hare button increases the speed range by one step

With this function it is always possible to get the maximum
D 2.3.1.4. HiShift (4) traction. This reduces wheel slip by the rear wheels when
working on slippery surfaces.
If the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes in the
automatic position, the automatic is in the error mode and
it engages the 4WD for safety reasons. The error mode
may result from:
- the speed sensors are not calibrated (instruction on
page 48)
4 - the fault in the switch (also the service function code
comes on).
Middle position (Auto): the automatic position:
- The 4WD engages, when the difference in speed
between the front/rear axle is larger than 10 %. This slip
4 percentage is different than that selected in the
instrument panel display. The slip percentage in the
instrument panel shows the true slip of driving wheels
(ground speed).
T D56 The speed has to be over 0.3 km/h.
- The 4WD disengages, when the transmission/radar slip
percentage is lower than 4 %. This slip percentage is
HiShift- switches are meant for assisting and making it the same as that selected in the instrument panel
easier to drive the tractor. Shifting for either engaging or display.
disengaging the multi-disc shuttle used as the driving The disengaging delay is 5 seconds.
clutch can be made by the fingertip control. The contact
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off):
button is placed both in the main and range gear levers,
4WD is disengaged except when:
so there is no need to use the foot clutch pedal while
shifting. Traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible, - the latched together brake pedals are pressed
and also recommended in some situations like attaching - or
the implements. - the parking brake is engaged
- or
When using the HiShift- switches (4), first press the - in the driving start- and shuttle-automatic situations, if
switch and hold it and then move the lever to the desired the 4WD engaging function is activated (= activated on
position. Then the switch can be released and the as the factory setting), see page 42, point 2.1.
engagement will be automatically controlled. Changing selection of driving start- and
Using the HiShift- switches, for more details in starting shuttle-automatic ON/OFF".
and running instructions, see page 95. -The driving start- and shuttle-automatic engages
the 4WD automatically when starting to drive and
shuttling. The 4WD is also engaged when using the
D 2.3.1.5. Switch for 4WD (5) HiShift- switch and if the driving speed is under 10
kph. The automatic function disengages the 4WD
after starting to drive or shuttling, after a delay of few
seconds.
5
D 2.3.1.6. Differential lock switch (6)
T D269
The automatic 4WD is controlled by the 3 position switch

(OFF-AUTO-ON). When the 4WD is engaged the
indicator light in the instrument panel is illuminated.
T D270
The symbol side pressed down (On): Manual on
position, 4WD is always engaged.
The differential lock for the rear axle operates electro
The four-wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged hydraulically (also available as alternative equipment for
during driving without using the drive clutch.

the front axle). The switch for the differential lock has 3
D 2.3.1.7. Switch
for Power
positions (OFF-AUTO- ON). When the lock is engaged
the indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated. Shift-automatics (7)
The symbol side pressed down (On): the lock is always
engaged except when:
- one or both brake pedals are depressed (the lock 7
re-engages when one or both pedals are released).
The differential lock can be engaged and disengaged
during driving.
Use the lock only when necessary to ensure an even grip
for the wheels. If possible, disengage the lock while
driving on public roads.
If the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes in the
automatic position, the automatic is in the error mode and
it disengages the differential lock for safety reasons. The
error mode may result from :
- the speed sensors are not calibrated (instruction on
page 48)
- the deflection angle sensor is not calibrated (please
contact an authorized workshop) T D271
- the fault in the switch (also the service function code

comes on). The switch has three positions.
Middle position (Auto): Automatic position The symbol side pressed down = automatic position 2
of PS, driver can programme the speed of the engine
Differential lock engages: revolutions where the PS- gears change (display shows
- When the speed difference between the right and left AUTO 2).
rear wheel is larger than about 14 % (do not pay The switch in the centre position = automatic position 1
attention to the front wheels slip). This slip percentage is of PS, automatically changes PS- gears according to the
different to that selected in the instrument panel display, load and the speed of engine revolutions (display shows
which shows the true slip of the driving wheels AUTO 1)
(=ground speed).
Additionally the speed difference between the radar The opposite side to the symbol pressed down =
speed (= ground speed) and the transmission has to be manual control of PS
over 10 % (this slip percentage shows in the instrument
panel). Setting changing speed of revolutions for
Differential lock disengages: Auto 2 PS:
- When the speed difference between the radar speed
(=ground speed) and transmission is lower than 6 %. - press the symbol side of the switch for automatic PS (7)
This slip percentage is the same as that selected in the display shows AUTO 2.
instrument panel display.
The disengaging delay is 5 seconds.
- The lock disengages when driving speed rises over 15
km/h or the wheels are turned more than ±10° from the D
middle position.
- When pressing the clutch pedal
- When pressing one of the brake pedals
- When pressing the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift posiĆ
tion (if the switch is already in the lift position or its posiĆ
tion does not change, it does not disengage the lock).
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (OFF): D
the lock is always disengaged.
T D60
- press the PS pre-programming button (A) for one

second, neither driving directions may be chosen.

D 2.3.1.8. Switch for automatic traction
control (8)
E
8
T D61
- after activation both, the current limit RPMs for

shifting down (B) (rpm) and the PS-stage number 1 T D272
(C) will blink.
- use the PS- push buttons (D) (with hare button When the automatic traction control is used the traction is
upwards and with turtle button downwards) to step to engaged either on or off with help of the accelerator- or
the desired downwards changing speed of revolutions. brake pedal depending on the engine revs or driving
Speed of revolutions changes every 50 rpm. speed. The switch has two positions.
The speed of revolutions can be changed between
900-2300 rpm.
- when the downwards changing engine revolutions is 1.Switching on the stand-by mode of the
reached push the pre-programming button (A). Then automatic
the RPMs for shifting up (B) and the PS-stage
number 3 (E) start blinking. The automatic traction control is engaged in the
- in the same way as before, step with the PS- push stand-by mode (but not in function), when the following
buttons (D) every 50 rpm to set the desired upwards conditions are fulfilled at the same time:
changing speed of revolutions. - the symbol side of the switch (8) is pressed down, (the
The speed of the revolutions can be changed between symbol (1) starts to flash)
1000-2400 rpm. - tractor is stationary
However the upwards changing speed of revolutions - the engine rotation speed is lower than 1000 rpm
must be for at least 100 rpm more than the downwards
changing speed.
E.g. if downwards changing limiting speed of revolution
is set into 1500 rpm, the upwards changing speed of 2 2
revolution can only be stepped between 1600-2400
rpm.
- when the upwards changing speed of revolution is
reached, push pre-programming button (A). Then the
controller saves the set speeds of revolutions and 1
reverts to normal operation.
The arrow of the chosen direction will flash if an attempt is
made to engage the driving direction when setting the
limit of the engine revolutions. This means the direction
cannot be engaged until the setting has been finished and
the lever has first moved to the parking brake position.
After engaging the parking brake position the controller
reverts to normal operation. T D63
The limit speeds of the engine revolutions still remain in

the memory after the power is switched off. When the function is in the stand-by mode, the symbol
(1) lights continuously (the power shuttle - and parking
When the automatic positions are on: brake lever has been cycled through the parking brake
position and the direction has been re-selected).
- the tractor itself ensures that the right PS- gear is
After starting the engine always switch the function on
engaged.
again by pressing down the left side of the switch and the
- in addition there is a separate Speed matching
stand-by mode will be activated again.
automatic selector when changing the main gears,
which engages the right PS- gear.
Using the PS-automatics, for more details in starting and
running instructions, see page 97.

1.1. Traction releasing D 2.3.1.9. Hand throttle (9)
When the automatic traction control is switched to the
stand-by mode, the traction control engages in the
following situations: 9
- the engine revs are under 1000 r/min A
and
- the accelerator pedal is almost up
or
- the brake pedal is depressed
and
- the driving speed is under 12 km/h
Traction releasing always happens regardless of the
position of the clutch pedal.
NOTE: When the automatic traction control is on the T D273
arrow of the selected driving direction blinks (2) in the
display. The symbol blinks for the driver to realize the
tractor starting, when the accelerator pedal is pressed The rotating knob (9) (potentiometer) operates as control
down. for the hand throttle lever. Rotate the knob
counterclockwise to increase the engine speed.
When the automatic traction control is on, the driving
direction can be changed. In this case the arrow of the When the hand throttle is used, it functions like the
selected driving direction flashes, but the selected accelerator pedal and controlling the engine revs by the
direction does not activate. one giving the larger value.
When the traction control is engaged, the switch for NOTE: The Off-switch (A) does not affect the function of
automatic traction control (8) can be switched off. the hand throttle.
However the selected direction does not engage and the
direction arrow remains flashing until the shuttle-and D 2.3.1.10. U-Pilotheadland
parking brake lever has been moved to the parking brake
position and the direction has been engaged again. automatics (10)
1.2. Traction engagement
The traction engages when the following conditions are

fulfilled at the same time:
- the driving direction is selected
- the brake pedal is not depressed
- the engine revs are over 1100 r/min
- the accelerator pedal is depressed sufficiently.
When the traction is engaged, the arrow (2) of selected
direction stops flashing and lights continuously.
The driving speed has no influence on the automatic
functions.
10
If the clutch pedal is depressed when the traction T D324
engagement starts, the traction engages in accordance
with the clutch pedal position.
2. Switching off the stand-by mode 1. General

Press the opposite side to the symbol of the switch (8) The aim of the U-Pilot system is to automate a group of
down. often used functions. A typical example is the turn on the
However the selected direction does not engage (if the headland.
traction is activated, it disengages) and the direction arrow The idea of the system is that the operator runs the whole
remains flashing until the shuttle- and parking brake lever operational cycle and presses the desired switches and
has been moved shortly to the parking brake position and the cycle is recorded to the memory of the system. The
the direction has been engaged again. operational cycle can then be started with one press of a
switch. The system has also an on-line/programmable
PAUSE-function with the switch in the arm rest that stops
the operation for a while and restarts it with a new press.
The recorded items are the pressed functions and the
travelled distance between functions. The programming
and the run can be done with different speed, the
distances keep constant while the time intervals are
changed.

DANGER: When using U-Pilot the 1 2 3
operations start automatically. Ensure that
nobody is in the danger area. 5
CAUTION: The switches on the side panel

6 4
do not show the status of equipment when
using U-pilot.
T D347
IMPORTANT: Check that the programme is for the

intended work and that all the switches and controls are in The top line of Proline display has the number of
the same position than when the programme was operation (1)/ total number of operations (2) and the
recorded. distance to the next operation (3).
The centre line displays the symbols of the recorded
2. Range operations (in the display max 5 pcs) (4).
- Tractor speed must be between 0,5 km/h and 20 km/h The symbol of the next/ongoing operation has a dark
- Max. 30 operations background (5).
- Total range under 100 m without pause The U-Pilot display will automatically appear on the
- Distance between the start of two consecutive screen when the activation/recording switch is set to the
operations under 63,5 m middle- or record position, concurrently the warning light
- Distance is measured with 0,5 m accuracy, minimum (!) (6) illuminates. The display can be changed to any
distance between operations is 0,5 m even if the other display, see instructions on page 54.
switches are pressed more closely.
- Maximum length of a pause is 5 minutes The U-Pilot operations and their symbols and settings
and limitations:
See the limitations more thoroughly in the error code table
in section 9.
LiĆ
Switch poĆ miĆ
SymĆ
3. Switches bol
Operation sition/SetĆ taĆ
ting tiĆ
The system has two switches, an U-Pilot activation/recorĆ on
ding switch (1) in the side pillar and a play/pause/stop Stop or 2),
switch (10) in the arm rest. Rear linkage up
down 3)
1. The activation/recording (OFF/ON/REC )-switch Stop or 2),
has three positions: Rear linkage down
down 3)
Opposite side to the symbol pressed down: U-pilot Stop or 2),
not in use. Rear linkage forced lowering
down 3)
Middle position: U-Pilot stand by Rear linkage forced lowering Stop or 2),
Symbol side pressed down (spring-return, push down release down 3)
locking device to the midpoint of the switch): U-Pilot
starts recording or saving. Hydraulic block 3 + Panel on 3)
2. PLAY/PAUSE/STOP -switch has three positions

both sides have spring-return. Hydraulic block 3 - Panel on 3)
When pressing the symbol side the recorded programme

starts, during the operation a press causes a pause. When Hydraulic block 4 + Panel on 3)
the programme is in pause mode a push of the symbol
side continues the recorded programme. When recording Hydraulic block 4- Panel on 3)
a push of the symbol side causes a pause in the
programme.
Front PTO on OFF 2)
When pressing the opposite side to the symbol the
recorded programme stops.The U-Pilot can be
re-activated by first pressing the OFF-side of the Front PTO off OFF 2)
activation/recording switch in the side pillar and then
pressing the symbol side of the activation/recording 1),
Rear PTO on Standby
switch. 2)
Now recorded programme starts from the beginning by 1),

Rear PTO off Standby
pressing the symbol side of the PLAY/PAUSE/STOP 2)
switch. Cruise control (constant
3)
speed) on
4. Display Cruise control (constant
3)
RPM) on
The display of the system is the Proline instrument panel.

Cruise control off 3)
Power Shift speed range 1 1)

T D343
Power Shift speed range 2 1)
- Operate the tractor for the desired operations in order.
Power Shift speed range 3 1) - When all the operations before the turn are recorded
press the symbol side of the
PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch in the arm rest to mark a
4WD on 1) pause.
- The recording continues automatically when pressing
4WD off 1) the next operation.
- When all the operations are recorded press the symbol
side of the activation/recording-switch more than 2
Differential lock on 1) secs in order to save.
- Text SAVED appears on the middle row of the display.
Differential lock off 1)
Power socket on OFF 2)
Power socket off OFF 2)

T D344
Pause in the recorded progĆ

ramme - The warning light (!) (6) is on continuously.
- The light of the symbol lens of the
End of the recorded progĆ PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch illuminates. Then the
ramme symbols of the saved operations roll on the display.
The old recorded programme stays in memory until the
1) If these operations are in AUTO-mode when recording
new one is saved instead of the old one.
the operation is not recorded. If the operation is recorded
and the switch is turned to AUTO-position before use, the The memory can be emptied by starting a recording and
switch is dominant. In that case the recorded operations saving a programme without any operations.
of that switch do not occur.
The rear PTO makes an exception. If it is in the AUTO 6. Example 1
mode a stop is recorded also when it has been stopped
with the raise of the rear linkage. In use the rear PTO is A possible recording when using a reversible plough:
stopped by the programme or the raise of the rear linkage - U-Pilot on
whichever reaches first. - Press the symbol side of the OFF/ON/REC-switch
2) The system checks before recording and play the (push down locking device to the midpoint of the
correct positions of these switches. If the position is switch), the recording begins.
incorrect the symbol of the operation blinks on the display.
3) The system does not check the adjustments of these Lift of the plough
equipments thus they must be checked and adjusted by
the operator. 4WD off
5. Programming Differential lock off
Pressing the activation/recording-switch in the side pillar

to the middle position activates the U-Pilot. The light of Power Shift speed range 1
the symbol lens brightens up. The warning light (!) (6)
illuminates. Reversion of the plough
The recording is started by pushing down the locking
device to the midpoint of the activation/recording- switch Pause
and by pressing the symbol side (REC) (less than 2 secs).
Text RECORD will appear on the middle row of the
dashboard's display. The warning light (!) (6) blinks. Lowering of the plough
4WD on
Differential lock on

Now the recorded programme starts from the beginning
Power Shift speed range 2 by pressing the symbol side of the PLAY/PAUSE/STOP
switch.
End of the recorded programme IMPORTANT: Manual use of any operation that is
included in the recorded programme and have a
significant safety risk (linkages, PTOs, hydraulics) will be
7. Example 2 performed but the ongoing programme stops immediately
and cannot be continued without reactivation.
The system can be used for the shift of the operation of a Interruption of the recorded programme causes the
switch on the side panel to the armrest. following actions:
- The hydraulic operations controlled by the recorded
Rear PTO on programme are cancelled
- The movement of the linkages is stopped
- The PTOs are disconnected if they are in the recorded
End of the recorded programme programme
- The power socket is disconnected
- The differential lock is disconnected
8. Use - The cruise control is disconnected
- The state of 4WD does not change
- The state of Power Shift does not change
Pressing the activation/recording-switch in the side pillar
to the middle position activates the U-Pilot. The light of The error code is displayed on the LCD-instrument
the symbol lens brightens up. Then the symbols of the panel. The error is set off by pressing the setting
saved programme roll on the middle row of the display switch (12.10) of the display.
and the number of the operation/total number of the After the interruption the U-Pilot has to be reactivated.
operations and the distance to the next operation on the
top row. The light of the PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch
illuminates brightly.
IMPORTANT: The operator must check the positions and
adjustments of the other switches before starting the
recorded programme. Check also that the programme is
for the intended work.
NOTE: The U-Pilot checks the position of the switches of
the linkages, rear PTO and power socket. If a switch that
is included in the programme is in wrong position its
symbol blinks on the display. The symbol disappears
when the switch is in the correct position.
If the work needs the use of the front PTO or the power
socket their switches must be set to off-position after the
programming.
The recorded programme starts by pressing the symbol
side of the PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch and continues until
a pause or the end of the recorded programme. The
warning light (!) (6) illuminates.
Any time during the programme a press of the symbol
side of the PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch causes a pause.
A pause in the recorded programme is ended by
repressing the symbol side of the
PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch.
By pressing the opposite side to the symbol of the
PLAY/PAUSE/STOP-switch the recorded programme
ends immediately. STOP text appears on the display.
T D345
The recorded programme cannot be continued and the

system must be reactivated by turning the
activation/recording-switch to OFF-position and then to
ON-position.

9. Error codes D 2.3.1.12. Change over switch for side
pillar display (12)
Code Cause of error
U-Pilot 01 Driving speed over 20 km/h. Recording or
run cancelled.
U-Pilot 02 Driving speed over 20 km/h or under 0,5
km/h. The recorded programme does not
start.
U-Pilot 03 Driving speed under 0,5 km/h. Recording
cancelled temporally.
U-Pilot 04 Not in use.
U-Pilot 05 Recording cancelled. Time limit 30 s for
driving speed under 0,5 km/h exceeded.
U-Pilot 06 Recording cancelled. Time limit 60 secs
for the first operation exceeded.
U-Pilot 07 Recording cancelled. Time limit 60 secs
for next operation exceeded.
U-Pilot 08 Recording cancelled. Driver left the seat
for more than 5 secs.
U-Pilot 09 Recording cancelled. Distance between
consecutive operations over 63,5 m.
U-Pilot 10 Recording cancelled. The travel length of
the programme exceeds 100 m without 12
pause. T D245
U-Pilot 11 Recording cancelled. Programme has over

30 operations. When pressing the symbol side of the switch (12) the
following displays are shown in turn on the lowest sector
U-Pilot 12 Recorded programme cancelled. Driver in the side pillar:
left the seat for more than 5 secs.
- Rear power take-off rotation speed
U-Pilot 13 Recorded programme cancelled. Time liĆ - Outdoor temperature
mit 10 secs for driving speed under 0,5 - Driving speed
km/h exceeded. - Wheel slip percentage
U-Pilot 14 Recorded programme cancelled. Time liĆ The numerical values with the symbols are the same as in
mit 300 secs for pause exceeded. the Proline instrument panel LCD display, except the
U-Pilot 15 Saving or deleting the programme failed. display for the wheel slip percentage (only numerical
value).
D 2.3.1.11. STOP-indicator light, extra D 2.3.1.13. Cruise

control
equipment (11) (Cruise-panel) (13)
9 13
11 13.1
13.2 13.3
T D244
T D302
The STOP indicator light in the rear instrument panel is

needed when driving with reverse drive controls. The operator can choose either constant driving speed
adjustment or constant engine revs adjustment.
If the light starts to flash, the tractor and the engine
must be stopped immediately. When this light is on When the cruise control is on, the indicator light is
only use the machine in an emergency, e.g. to move illuminated in the instrument panel.
the tractor to the roadside (for more details see point 7 The cruise control does not operate simultaneously with
on page 53). the automatic traction control.

Cruise control OFF-switch (13.1) throttle if the greater speed/revs value than with
accelerator pedal has been set with it. (NOTE: Control the
- With this switch (reversible push button) the cruise position of the hand throttle knob (9) before disengaging
control function will be disengaged the cruise control).
Cruise control setting switch ( / ) (13.2) 2. Decreasing the Cruise control setting (-)
- With this switch (3 positions, spring returned to the
middle position) will be set/select either 2.1. When a programmed Cruise control is on:
-the constant driving speed - Press the switch (13.3) right side to lower the speed or
-or engine RPMs, depending on which setting has been
-the constant engine revs selected with the switch (13.2).
- When stopping pressing, the new setting stays on and
is stored in the memory.
Cruise control setting switch (+/-) (13.3)
- With this switch (3 positions, spring returned to the 3. Increasing the Cruise control setting (+)
middle position) the cruise control can be
increased/decreased 3.1. When a programmed Cruise control is on:
Hand throttle knob (9) - Press the switch (13.3) left side to increase the speed or
engine RPMs, depending on which setting was selected
- With this knob the revs can be temporarily increased
with the switch (13.2).
when the cruise control function is on.
- When stopping pressing, the new setting stays on and
is stored in the memory.
1. Cruise control setting/selection kmh/rpm
D 2.3.2. Linkage /PTO
1.1. Programming the cruise control ( / ):
Using the hydraulic lift see "Operating Instructions"
- Set the driving speed or the PTO speed to the desired section on page 108.
value with the accelerator pedal or hand throttle.
On models T180CR and T190CR the linkage version Ds is
- Press the or side of the cruise control setting standard.
switch (13.2) for more than three seconds (Cruise
indicator light flashes in the instrument panel indicating
that the setting value can be stored in the memory). D 2.3.2.1. Rear linkage (1)
After releasing the switch the value restores and the
indicator light is on continuously.
1. Diagnose light (1.1)
1.2. Activating a programmed constant speed:
- If a programmed constant speed is not on, press the 1.1
or side of the cruise control setting switch
(13.2) for a while. The last setting stored then comes
into effect.
1.3. Constant driving speed ( ) is turned off

when one of the following is pressed:
- Clutch pedal
T D248
- Brake pedal
- Cruise control OFF- switch (the cruise control function
turns off) When the tractor power switch is on, the light illuminates
- HiShift-switch, returning to the used value after for a moment, goes out again and illuminates again.
releasing the switch. When the diagnostic light is on, it shows that the linkage
- or when moving the shuttle lever. has not been activated.
The linkage is activated by turning the lift/stop/lower
1.4. Constant PRMs ( ) are turned off when switch (1.3) to lift or lower position, then the light goes out
one of the following is pressed: and the linkage switches can be used. The activation must
be done when the main power has been switched off, and
- Cruise control OFF- switch (the cruise control function when the inner switch for connecting an implement or the
turns off). push button control has been used.
When the cruise control function has been turned off, the The flashing of the diagnostic light informs of the system
tractor speed/revs will return to the speed set by the hand failure. In this case contact your dealer.

2. Position control knob (1.2) 4. Lift/lower indicator lights (1.4)
1.4
1.4 T D249
1.2
The lift indicator (red = upper) is lit when the lower links
are lifting, the lower indicator (green = lower) when they
T D69
are lowering. Neither indicator is lit when the links are
stationary.
The linkage is lifted when this knob is turned clockwise
and lowered when it is turned counter-clockwise. The 5. Lowering speed selector (1.5)
knob allows continuous control of the position of the lower
links. It sets the position of the lower links when the
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is in the lower position.
1.5 1.6 1.7
3. Lift/stop/lower switch (1.3)
1.3
1.8
T D250
The lowering speed is increased when this knob is turned

clockwise, and nine different positions are available. A
slow lowering speed should be selected with heavy
implements. The lowering speed is independent of the
T D327 load.
The lift/stop/lower switch has 3 positions: 6. Transport height selector (1.6)

- Symbol side pressed down the linkage lowers = The transport height (i. e. the upper position of the lower
Autocontrol position. links) is increased when this knob is turned clockwise.
- Centre position stops the arms. Nine different positions are available. This knob limits the
- Opposite side to the symbol pressed down the lifting height when either the position control knob (1.2) or
linkage lifts = transport position the lift/stop/lower switch (1.3) is used. The height limit is a
By switching the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift position, useful feature when there is a danger that the implement
the operator can use this switch to lift the implement into could hit the cab, etc.
the transport position; by switching it to the lower position
the implement is then lowered to the right depth (as CAUTION: This knob does not limit lifting
selected with the position control knob 1.2). height when the inner switch for connecting
implement in the cab or the push buttons on
Linkage movement can be stopped by placing the the mudguards are used.
lift/stop/lower switch in the centre position.
7. Draft control selector (1.7)
This knob should be turned to the P position when the
position control is being used (base position). This
ensures that the linkage will remain in the selected
position without draft control. When draft control is used
(e.g. when ploughing) the knob should be turned to one
of the six (1-6) sensitivity levels.

8. Draft control indicator light (1.8) Slip control
This is lit when the draft control selector (1.7) is in one of The slip control system is used with towing equipment on
the draft control positions 1-6. the draft control area. The slip control system lifts the
linkage a little when the wheels exceed the slip limit and
9. Drive balance control switch and slip lowers the implement back to the depth which has been
set, when the wheel slip is again under the slip limit.
control (1.9)
By turning the knob to the common position of the
balance control and the slip control, the balance control is
on when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lifting position
and the slip control is on, when the lift/stop/lower switch is
1.9 in the lower position.
By continuing to turn the switch clockwise to the slip limit
position, only the slip limit is on.
The slip control system can not be adjusted.
The slip control system calibration is made automatically
when transmission speed- and ground speed signals
correspond to each other (e.g. tyres wearing out).
In addition the implement sensors can be connected to
the linkage version Ds.
1.10 1.11
T D251 Radar
Drive balance control switch

The drive balance control switch has two positions.
The drive balance control system is used when
transporting heavy implements on the linkage for
balancing the tractor while driving. Driving the tractor is
more even and stable. The system operates only in the
transport position in other words when the lift/stop/lower
switch is in the lift position.
The balance control system begins to work when the
adjusted limit is exceeded (about 8 km/h adjusted in the
factory, adjustable). In this instance the linkage lowers
automatically by about 4 % (shown by the lowering light).
So that the linkage has enough movement in both
direction. For these movements, lift the linkage high
T D214
enough.
When the driving speed drops 25 % below the adjusted
value, this stops the balance control system functioning The tractors equipped with the slip control have a radar
and the linkage raises again to the starting position (under the cab on the right side), because when all the
(shown by the lifting light). The corresponding speed limit wheels slip the real speed can only be measured from the
value can be changed in the following way: ground speed with the radar.
1. Adjust the lowering speed to the minimum position DANGER: DO NOT go under a tractor
2. Adjust the position control knob to the maximum equipped with a radar (slip control models)
position. until the ignition switch is turned off. -
3. Drive the desired connecting speed (at least 0.5 km/h), Danger to eyes.
this ensures, that the drive balance control is not in
position when the tractor is stationary. The radar has an influence:
4. Press the lift/stop/lower switch 4 times to the lift - on the slip control, by transferring the load signal from
position in three seconds. the linkage to the wheels
After this the diagnostic light (1.1) flashes three seconds - on the function of the automatics for the differential
to notify of the change. locks
- on the function of the 4WD automatics
- on the calibration of the speed sensors (after tyre chanĆ
ge)
If you doubt that the slip and 4WD automatics are not
working correctly, drive straight forward on the firm
ground. Then the instrumentation has to show 0-3 % slip.
10. Drive balance control light (1.10)

When the drive balance control is ready, the light is on.

11. Slip control light (1.11) CAUTION: The transport height selector
(1.6) does not limit the lifting height when
When the slip control is ready, the light is on. If the tractor these switch/push buttons are being used.
stationary for about 30 seconds the light goes out and the
slip control has to be started again.
The lower link position sensor does not limit the lifting
height when the switch/push buttons are used; instead the
12. Passing switch for position control knob arms are moved to their extreme positions when the
= forced lowering switch (1.12) switch/buttons are pushed.
D 2.3.2.2. Front linkage (2), extra equipment

1.12
Front linkage, for more details see page 215.
D 2.3.2.3. Rear power take-off (3)
1. PTO control lever (3.1)
3.1
T D328
By pushing the switch, the lower links lower under the

position, which has been set by the position control
knob (1.2). After freeing the switch the lower links go back
to the value, which has been set by the position control
knob (1.2). The switch is spring-returned. The forced
lowering operates only when the lift/stop/lower B
switch (1.3) is in the lowering = Autocontrol position.
When using the forced lowering switch it uses the
lowering speed set by the lowering speed selector.
13. Inner switch for connecting T D157
implement (1.13)
The required PTO speed is independent of the driving
clutch and is first selected mechanically with the lever. The
tractor has some of the following PTO speed alternatives:
1000/540E
- lever in left position; PTO 1000 engaged
- lever in centre position; PTO disengaged
- lever in right position; PTO 540E engaged
1000 EHD
- lever in left position; PTO 1000 engaged
- lever in centre position; PTO disengaged
- lever in right position; not in use
The indicator light flashes on the instrument panel.
The RH inner position is for the ground speed PTO (as
extra equipment).
1.13 T D230
The PTO shaft is easy to change.
Important: Before engaging the PTO make sure that the
The lower links are raised and lowered by the switch in
correct PTO shaft is fitted (changing instructions are given
the cab and by push button on the rear mudguards.
in the "Operating Instructions" section on page 103).
These are useful, for instance, when implements are being
attached. The lower links lift or lower as long as the The PTO can be temporarily disengaged by pushing the
corresponding switch/button is pressed. lever (3.1) outwards (to the direction of arrow B) (but not
After these switch/buttons have been used the position when using the ground speed PTO). This disengagement
control system must be activated by operation of the is useful e.g. when you must stop the PTO fast
lift/stop/lower switch (1.3). (emergency stop). The PTO should be started with
switch (3.2).

2. PTO switch (3.2) 2.2. Stopping:
Temporary stopping
- Press the symbol side of the switch (3.2) down and
release = the starting/off position.
- You must not leave the cab other than going to use the
rear starting push-buttons (extra equipment).
Longer time stopping

- Press the opposite to the symbol of the switch (3.2)
down = the off position and move the PTO selector
lever (3.1) to the centre position.
Stopping with the rear push-buttons (extra

3.2 equipment)
The PTO can also be stopped by pressing once the rear

starting push-button (A) (extra equipment). After this
T D278 the push-button operates as starting button, when it is
pressed for more than 3 seconds.
The power take off switch has 3 positions: Using switch (3.2) the PTO is engaged electro-
- The symbol side pressed down (spring-return) is the hydraulically, the indicator lamp on the instrument
starting position or off position. panel illuminates. Disengagement occurs electro-
- The switch in the centre is the on position or standby hydraulically. The indicator light on the instrument panel
position. flashes and shows that the lever (3.1) is engaged.
- The opposite to the symbol pressed down is the off Using switch (3.2) disengagement is only temporarily.
position.
WARNING: When you do not need PTO,
The desired rotatingspeed has to be selected through always keep the opposite to the symbol of
the PTO selector lever (3.1) before starting. the switch (3.2) pressed down = on off
position.
2.1. Starting:
WARNING: The actual disengagement and
Press the symbol side of the switch (3.2) down and engagement of the PTO must be done by
release = the starting/off position. PTO control lever (3.1). E.g. when leaving
the cab, the lever has to be moved to the
Starting with the rear push-buttons (extra centre position, except when using the push
buttons on the mudguards (extra
equipment)
equipment).
T D79
C
The power take-off can also be started by using the rear
starting push-buttons (A) on the rear mudguards (extra
equipment). The switch (3.2) has to be pressed to the T D80
centre position before you leave the tractor. The power

take-off starts, when one or the other rear starting When the PTO is rotating the symbol (C) for power
push-button is pressed continuously for at least 3 take-off is shown in the display. The smooth engagement
seconds (starting begins after 0.5 seconds). If the is controlled by the electronic control unit.
pressing is interrupted during 3 seconds, the power
take-off stops.

2.3. The emergency stop PTO disengages
- when the linkage is raised into the transport position
On the rear wall outside the cab is an emergency stop - and
socket (A) with a contact plug and wire which connects - the three seconds delay time has passed
the electrical circuit. By removing the plug the PTO stops.
The emergency stop outside the tractor can be connected NOTE: Start the PTO after automatic stop.
to operate in two different ways:
Method 1. Connect a rope from the operating position on
the implement to the stop plug.
3.2
T D278
2
The PTO does not re-engage though the linkage is
lowered. The PTO has to be started with the rocker
switch (3.2) start position (symbol side depressed).
T D81
D 2.3.2.4. Front PTO (4), extra equipment

Method 2. Connect a longer loop of cable to the plug and
have an emergency switch fitted in the loop close to the
Front power take-off, for more details see page 189.
operator.
After an emergency stop or after stopping the tractor
engine the PTO will only start by pressing the switch (3.2)
in the starting position, similarly if the ignition is switched
off.
For more details about the power take-off, see
"Operating Instructions" on page 103.
3. Rear PTO automatic stop (3.3)
3.3 T D279
The switch has two positions.

Symbol side pressed down (On): AUTO-position (PTO
automatic stop).
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off):
automatic stop of PTO is Off.

D 2.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics
The properties of the auxiliary hydraulics valve blocks 1-4 Floating-position
can be adjusted with rotating switches (the valves 5 and 6
have no rotating switches). The adjustable properties for - the valve block allows an implement to move freely, for
the valve functions are as follows: example following the ground level, see adjusting
instructions in section F, Floating position" on page
111.
Position lock
- when using a single-action, see adjusting Instructions
-a valve block function can be set to remain on, see in section F, Using the valves as single-action " on
adjusting instructions in section F Position lock" on page 111.
page 111.
Flow function (flow adjustment)
Position lock hold time (timer adjustment)
- flow adjustment through the valve
- a valve block function can be set to hold for a desired - the output stays as adjusted independent of the other
time. valves (if the pump output has enough capacity).
2 3
4
13
1
5 15
6 3a
8
9
7
10 6a
6b
11 11
14
12 12
10 6c
6d
T D326
The four contact buttons on the side panel (1, 2, 3 and 4)

will activate the operation electrics for working the
Valve blocks 3 and 4 (green and
D 2.3.3.2.
hydraulics. white) activation switch for control
The contact buttons have no memory, thus the parts of lever 9 (2)
working hydraulics must always be re-activated after
electric power failure and start. Not in all tractors.
NOTE: Use the contact buttons (1, 2, and 3) to activate By pressing the switch (2) the valve blocks 3 and 4 (green
the part of the working hydraulics desired. and white) will be activated for the control lever 9 and at
the same time the indicator light comes on in the
activation switch. At the same time the valve blocks 1 and
Valve blocks 1 and 2 (blue and
D 2.3.3.1. 2 will be activated for the levers 11 (extra equipments). By
brown/yellow) activation switch for pressing the switch again the activation for the control
levers will be stopped and the indicator light goes out.
control lever 9 (1)
By pressing the switch (1) the valve blocks 1 and 2 (blue D 2.3.3.3. Auxiliary hydraulics, activation
and brown/yellow) will be activated for the control lever 9 of adjustment panel (on/off) (3)
and at the same time the indicator light comes on in the
activation switch. At the same time the valve blocks 3 and By pressing the switch (3) the operating switches for
4 will be activated for the levers 11 (extra equipments). By auxiliary hydraulics on the right side control panel (3a)
pressing the switch again the activation for the control and on the armrest will be activated (valve block 1
levers will be stopped and the indicator light goes out. lowering (6a) and lifting functions (6b) and valve block 3
lowering (6b) and lifting functions (6c)), at the same time
the backlights for these operating switches and the

indicator light for activation switch comes on. By pressing - 6a = lowering function (blue -) of valve block 1
the switch again the panel function stops and the indicator - 6b = lifting function (blue +) of valve block 1
lights go out. - 6c = lowering function (brown -) of valve block 3 (extra
equipment)
- 6d = lifting function (brown +) of valve block 3 (extra
D 2.3.3.4. Auxiliary hydraulics, STOP- equipment)
switch (4) Activating the Position lock- function, see section F, point
Position lock" on the page 111.
Always, when one of the activation switches of the
working hydraulics (1, 2 or 3) will be activated at the same Activating the Floating position- function, see section F,
time in the STOP-switch (4) the indicator light comes on. point Floating position" on the page 111.
Pressing the STOP-switch turns out all the functions of

the auxiliary hydraulics (control levers, operating switches, D 2.3.3.7. Auxiliary hydraulics, regulating
oil flow and indicator lights). switches for the timer (7)
The control levers and operating switches have to be
reactivated with activation switches (1, 2 or 3) again Use this rotating switch to adjust the time for the desired
before use. oil flow. A choice can be made from 12 different
possibilities ; OFF...10 and .
D 2.3.3.5. Auxiliary hydraulics, indicator - position OFF = the timer (the valve function is on only
until the operating switch (6) is pressed)
lights for valve blocks (5) - positions 1...10 = the time in seconds (the time needed
to drive the implement cylinder to end position so called
The indicator lights (yellow and green) inform you about kick-out function")
the operating state of adjusting switch of the timer:
- position = continuous flow (Position lock" on the
Yellow = warning, time programmed (position lock) page 111)
- the yellow indicator light comes on, when the time (>0 The time can be adjusted separately for both flows (+)
s) has been pre-programmed for the valve block and (-).
function (+/-) by the adjusting switch (7).
The timer adjustments work only when using the
WARNING: Make sure the yellow indicator operating switches for valve blocks on the right side
light does not come on unnecessarily. control panel or on the armrest. The adjustments have
nothing to do with the control levers.
WARNING: Make sure the yellow indicator
Green = press/flow on light does not come on unnecessarily,
- the green indicator light stays on, until the remove the unnecessary time adjustments
corresponding activation switch (6) is pressed or after by turning the switch in OFF"-position.
the adjusted time (7) switch (6) is pressed, if the yellow
NOTE: When regulating the timer check also the position
indicator light is on.
of the flow adjusting switch.
Auxiliary hydraulics, operating

D 2.3.3.6.
switches for valve blocks (6) D 2.3.3.8. Auxiliary hydraulics, regulating
switches for the flow (8)
By these operating switches the valves can be controlled
and the position lock/floating position for both directions Use these rotating switches to adjust the flow output of
(+/-) in the valve blocks be activated / de-activated. the desired direction (+/-). A choice can be made from
12 different possibilities:
Press the activation switches for at least for 0,6 seconds to
- position 1 = about 5 l/min
activate the desired functions.
- positions 2...11 = about 6 l/min per step
- position max = about 80 l/min
In the input side of the valve block (-) is the
6a 6b position ". This position will be used, if you want
the floating position function for the valve and when using
the single-action cylinder (in case there is no limit for the
lowering speed), see section F, point Floating position"
on the page 111.
6c
The flow adjustments work only when using the operating
switches for valve blocks on the right side control panel or
on the armrest. The adjustments have nothing to do with
the control levers.
6d
NOTE: When regulating the flow adjustment output check
also the position of the timer regulating switch.
T D329
The parallel operating switches of the valve blocks 1 and 3

on the arm rest:

D 2.3.3.9. Auxiliary hydraulics, control D 2.3.3.11. Auxiliary hydraulics, control
lever for valve block (9) (blocks 1 and 2 blue levers for valve blocks (11) (blocks 3 and 4
and brown/yellow, blocks 3 and 4 green and white) or blocks 5 and 6, extra equipment)
11
T D330
T D258
Forward and backward movements parallel to the arm rest
for control of valve block 1 or 3, and transverse movement The control levers are extra equipments for blocks 3 and
controls valve block 2 or 4. 4. If there are on the tractor extra equipment blocks 5 and
To keep the lever in function, the hydraulic levers must be 6, the contol levers are for them.
activated with the switches 1, (blocks 1 and 2 blue and When using electric linear levers the valve blocks (1 or 3
brown/yellow) or 2, (blocks 3 and 4 green and white) on or 5, left and 2 or 4 or 6, right, it depends on which valve
the right side control panel, on page 78. variation the tractor has and which levers are activated)
operations are controlled as follows:
- by pulling the lever parallel to the seat backwards =
D 2.3.3.10. Auxiliary hydraulics, limit
increase operation (+)
screws for the flow adjustment (10) - by pushing the lever parallel to the seat forwards =
(blocks 1 and 2 or blocks 3 and 4) (only for special use, decrease operation (-)
adjustment in an authorized Valtra workshop)
Auxiliary hydraulics, limit
D 2.3.3.12.
screws for the flow adjustment (12)
10 (blocks 3 and 4 or blocks 5 and 6, extra equipment)
(only for special use, adjustment in an authorized Valtra
workshop)
10
T D331
12 12 12
With these screws, under the plastic covers, the maximum
oil flow can be "adjusted" individually, from increase (+)
and decrease (-) direction as follows:
- when turning the selected screw with the screwdriver in
a clockwise direction, the maximum oil output will be
limited to certain level. T D259
When using the control lever of the selected direction,

after the certain point (adjusted before), the output does When using these screws (break the seal if needed) the oil
not increase any more, even if the lever is turned more. flow output can be adjusted" separately from (+) and (-)
direction as follows:
These operations with limit screws effect only the control
of the valve oil flow made by the control lever (see the - when turning the screw of the selected direction with the
auxiliary hydraulics, the regulating switch for the flow point screwdriver clockwise, the maximum oil output will be
8 on page 79). limited to certain level (e.g 40 l/min).
When now using the control lever of the selected

direction, the oil flow will be adjusted with the length of the
lever between 0- 40 l/min (adjusted before).
D 2.3.3.14. Contact buttons (extra
equipment) (14)
These operations with limit screws effect only the control
of the valve oil flow made by the control lever (see the
auxiliary hydraulics, the regulating switch for the flow point
8 on page 79). 9
14
Change over switch for
D 2.3.3.13.
directing oil pressure of valve block 1
(on some variations valve block 4) from
one quick-action coupling to the
other (13) (extra equipment)
13 T D333
A
The tractors with front loader or front loader ready have a
new joystick control lever with two contact buttons.
T D260
With this switch (13) the valve block 1 (on some variations
valve block 4, thus on the switch symbol there is number
4) oil pressure can be changed from the one
quick-action coupling to the other additional
quick-action coupling. The quick-action coupling can be
placed either in the rear or in the front (together with front
linkage).
The switch has two positions:
The symbol side pressed down:

- In this switch position the working hydraulics oil is
directed to the standard quick-action coupling. When
pressing down the symbol side, push down locking
device (A) to the midpoint of the switch.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down:

- In this switch position the working hydraulics oil is
directed to the extra quick-action coupling When
pressing down opposite side to the symbol, push down
locking device (A) to the midpoint of the switch.
The different valve variations with additional quick-action
couplings are given in the Operating instructions" section
(beginning of page 112).

Release switch for equipment
D 2.3.3.15.
locking (front loader use; buckets, press for bales
etc., extra equipment) (15)
14B
14A
15
A
15 A
14A
14B
T D335
By pressing the contact buttons of the control lever (9)

you can get power outputs from the pin socket (A) attaĆ
ched the plan. By pressing the lowest switch (14B) of the
control lever, the position of the switch (15) effects on the
T D332 function. The symbol side of the switch (15) has to be
pressed all the function time, because it is spring-reĆ
turned (releasing and fixing the equipment locking). When
the contact buttons of the control lever are not pressed,
the poles are disconnected (the column on the right siĆ
de).
IMPORTANT: Do not turn the joystick round its vertical
axis, the joystick may damage and the cables can breake.
A 1. Most common functions
1. 1. Control of extra cylinder with change valve
9
14B
T D334
From the poles (A) of the pin socket on the right tractor
side in the loader frame (standard trailer socket connecĆ
tor) the power can be taken by the different way when
pressing the contact buttons (14A and 14B) of the control
lever (9) and the side panel switch (15 the equipment locĆ
kingswitch). With the power output flows (max. 10 A) you
can control different devices, among other things the funcĆ
tion of the change valve. When using the change valve the
flow is simultaneously controlled by the transverse moveĆ T D336
ments of the control lever.
By pressing the lowest the contact button (14B) and siĆ
multaneously turning the control lever (9) to the left e.g.
the press for bales can be closed and correspondingly
opened by turning to the right.

1. 2. Equipment locking D 2.3.4. Side pillar control panel
6
15 5
9
7
4
14A
14B
8
3
9 2
T D332
1
By pressing down simultaneously the contact button
(14A) and the symbol side of the switch (15) and turning
the control lever (9) to the left the locking pins for equipĆ
ment locking retract and release the equipment from the
loader frame.
T D337
In the examples before the upper contact button (14A) is
free for other functions.
D 2.3.4.1. Switch for U-Pilot headland
D 2.3.3.16. Front pump switch (combined automatics (1)
hydraulics), (extra equipment) (16)
For more details see page 67
D 2.3.4.2. Rear window wiper + washer

(2), extra equipment
The switch has 3 positions:
The symbol side pressed down, spring-return: The
rear window washer is on.
The switch in the centre position: The rear window
16 wiper is on.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (OFF):
Park function.
D 2.3.4.3. Light switch for trailer hitch (3)

T D281
T D263
The trailer switch light is situated in the PTO cover to light
Front pump switch, for more details see page 217. the trailer hitch.

stop-light comes on (see on page 53).
D 2.3.4.4. Switch for rear working
lights (4) Control stop prevents the possibility of more serious
damage to the engine or in the transmission. If control
The parking lights must be switched on before the rear stop stops the engine the fault must be found and
working lights function. Working lights can be adjusted if repaired before the engine can be started again.
needed. NOTE: When starting the engine the control stop must be
The switch for rear working lights has 3 positions: disengaged.
The symbol side pressed down (Manu): The on NOTE: The control stop is useful when the tractor is drivĆ
position manually, the lights are always switched on. ing an implement and there is no control from the tractor.
Do not use when driving.
The centre position (Auto): The automatic position
The rear working lights switch on when the reverse drive D 2.3.4.7. Switch for front working
is engaged. The lights switch off when the reverse drive is lights (7)
disengaged.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down (Off): The parking lights must be switched on before the front
Lights off working lights function.
D 2.3.4.5. Switch for rotating warning D 2.3.4.8. Switch for extra front working
lights (5), extra equipment lights (8)
The parking lights must be switched on before the front
D 2.3.4.6. Control Stop switch (6) working lights will illuminate. The working lights can be
adjusted if needed.
The control stop can be switched on and off with the
"Control Stop" switch located in the right-hand side pillar.
D 2.3.4.9. Floor fan (9)
- The symbol side pressed down = on
- The opposite side to the symbol pressed down = off (2-speeds) (extra equipment)
The cut off is useful when the tractor is driving an
implement (e.g. compressor, pump etc.) and there is no The fan blows air into the lower part of the cab.
control from the tractor.
T D156
The control stop automatically stops the engine if the

D 2.3.5. Other controls
13 12 13
11 8
7
6
10
3
4
5
2
1
9
T D368
D 2.3.5.1. Storage compartment (1) Indicator light for implement

D 2.3.5.7.
signal connection, extra equipment (7)
A storage compartment for small items.
When the indicator light illuminates continuously, the
D 2.3.5.2. Place for implement remote implement signal system is in order. If the indicator light
flashes, stop the engine and turn off the current and start
control (2) (cutter etc.) the engine again. If the light flashes again make contact
wirh an authorized workshop. The Implement signal
connection, more details see extra equipment on
D 2.3.5.3. Lighter (3) page 187.
It can also be used for electric power output.

D 2.3.5.8. Implement signal connection,
extra equipment (8)
D 2.3.5.4. 2-pin power socket (4)
The implement signal connection more details see extra
Round two-pin power socket for electrical extra equipment on page 187.
equipment (cutter etc). The socket provides 12 V DC,
max. 8 A.
D 2.3.5.9. Ashtray (9)
D 2.3.5.5. Power switch for 2-pin power The ashtray can be removed for emptying.
socket (5)
The switch has two positions. D 2.3.5.10. Switch for rear fog light (10),
extra equipment
The symbol side pressed down: pin socket (4) charged
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down: pin Standard in some marketing areas.
socket (4) disconnected
ISOBUS terminal connector,
D 2.3.5.11.
D 2.3.5.6. Programming power socket (6) ISOBUS system, extra equipment (11)
Computer adapter for the control and adjustment of For the ISOBUS terminal connector, see more details in
system (only for authorized service). the extra equipment section K on page 187.

Bus extension connectors,
D 2.3.5.12. D 2.3.5.13. Mounting brackets, extra
ISOBUS system, extra equipment(12) equipment (13)
For the Bus extension connectors, see more details in the For the mounting brackets, see more details in the extra
extra equipment section K on page 187. equipment section K on page 187.
D 2.4. Controls on rear side
7 6
1 5
T D9
Trailer hitch release

D 2.4.1. D 2.4.2. 3-pin power socket (2)
control (1), extra equipment
b
1
T D99
T D98
The 3-pin power socket (type is ISO/TR 12369) is placed
on the under side of the cab rear cross member. Direct
The towing hook can be released by pulling the control
current can be taken out of it ((a) 5A through the ignition
after the lower links have been raised to their uppermost
switch, (b) 25A direct from battery) for different regulating
position by using inner switch for connecting implement
elements, implements etc. (the male connection part
(1.13) (see Operating *Instructions" on page 205).
number is 33615500).

and moving the window rearwards the window can be
D 2.4.3. Rear window opening locked in the open position a little. By repeating this, the
device (3) window can be opened completely.
D 2.4.4. Steering wheel (4), extra equipment
D 2.4.5. Accelerator pedal (5), extra

equipment
3
D 2.4.6. Brake pedal (6), extra equipment
D 2.4.7. Clutch pedal (7), extra equipment

Controls (4 -7) are for the reserve drive controls, see
on page 196.
T D100
By turning the handle on the lower part of the rear window
D 2.5. Controls on LH side
5 4
3
1 T D10
D 2.5.1. Locking lever for fold-out D 2.5.3. Storage compartment (3)

platform (1)
The fold-out platform can be locked in the horizontal or D 2.5.4. Storage space for books (4)
lower position.
The storage space is suitable for books of A4 size.
D 2.5.2. Side window opening

D 2.5.5. Storage space for bottle (5)
device (2)
Pull the handle upwards and push the window to the open
position.

D 2.6. Roof console on the front side
1 4
2
2
3 3a
T D11
the lights after a certain time (from 5-10 minutes), so that

D 2.6.1. Cab light switch (1) the battery does not drain, if the power or parking lights
are not switched on, when the cab light turns off, or when
The cab light switch has 3 positions. The switch positions the door is closed.
are:
- centre position (Off)= light off
- left position (Auto)= door position/step light - right position (Manu)= light on
There are two delays in use with the cab lights: the door In this position the cab lights can be switched on.
closed / open.
After closing the door for a few seconds (5-10 seconds) D 2.6.2. Ventilation nozzles (2)
the cab light delays the turning off of the cab light. When
entering the cab there is the possibility to switch the
In the upper part of the cab there are six nozzles, which
starter key on, when the cab lights are on and even when
can be turned to the desired direction. The window
the door is closed.
surfaces can be cleared of ice or condensation by turning
the nozzles towards the glass.
D 2.6.3. Sun visor (3)

By pulling the sun visor it can be lowered and by pulling
the string (3a) the sun visor can be raised.
D 2.6.4. Recirculation control (4)

On the front part of the roof console there is an adjustable
suction grille for air recirculation. When opening this grille
the outside air channel is partially closed.
If the grille is open (fully open when the knob is on the left
hand side):
- The cab will heat up faster
T D159 - The heating capacity will be higher
- Higher cooling capacity, if air conditioning is fitted.
When opening the door, the step light on the left cabin If the grille is closed (the knob is on the right hand side):
side illuminates the steps. Both, the cab and step light - The windows will demist faster
have the same delay time for turning off. - The pressure in the cab will be higher (reduces dust
If the door is left open, the time delay circuit switches off quantity).

D 2.7. Roof console on the right side
1 4 2
N D21
D 2.7.1. Roof fan (1) (4-speeds) D 2.7.3. Radio (3) (extra equipment)
This fan blows air through the ventilation nozzles in the
roof console. D 2.7.4.Air conditioning control
knob (4) (extra equipment)
D 2.7.2. Temperature control (2)
Air conditioning see page 202.
Turn control clockwise for higher temperatures.

D 2.8. Driver's seat
11 10
3 6
4 4A 5
T D213
WARNING: Do not attempt to adjust the seat

while driving, increased risk of an accident. D 2.8.2. Forward/rearward adjusting (2)
Lift up the lever and push the seat forwards or rearwards.
The seat can be adjusted as follows:

D 2.8.3. Lock for turning the seat (3)
Lock for adjustment for
D 2.8.1. Release the lock by pulling the control upwards. The seat
forwards/rearwards (1) can now be turned 180° clockwise.
With the lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards it is The seat can also have set positions; locked at 10°,
possible to divide the forwards/rearwards adjustment area floating" 20-30°, locked at 59° and 74° (e.g. can be
(2) into two parts. used when ploughing).
Position 1 NOTE: If the seat has been adjusted further back than the
- Locking is achieved by moving lever (A) to right and lock limits, the seat will touch the cab side trim when
upward to lock it in the uppermost position (you will turning.
hear a clicking sound). Using this control the seat can
be turned 180°. D 2.8.4. Seat suspension control (4)
Position 0
- The lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards is Turn the control clockwise to make the suspension harder.
unlocked. In the rearmost positions the seat touches the The decal (4A) shows settings for different driver weights.
cab side trim when turning the seat.

- The arm rest is mounted to the seat with a screw
D 2.8.5. Lock for longitudinal through an oblong hole in the arm rest lug. Open the
suspension (5) screw to adjust the arm rest height.
When the lever is set as in drawing, the longitudinal - Open the locking wheel (1) in the middle of the arm rest
suspension is locked, the seat does not move in the right side for longitudinal adjustment and move the arm
longitudinal direction. By turning the lever to the front rest to the desired position.
position (clockwise 180°) the lock for longitudinal
- The arm rest is hinged so that it can be lifted up. Adjust
suspension is released.
the longitudinal tilt angle lower limit using the limit screw
(2) under the arm rest rear part.
D 2.8.6. Vertical adjustment (of - The arm rest can also be turned sideways. The turning
seat) (6) angle is limited to 15°.
Raising: Lift the seat to the desired position. The seat will
automatically lock in position. D 2.8.10. Switch for seat heating (10)
Lowering: Lift the seat to the top position and allow it to Seat heating switch is placed on the left side of the seat
drop to the bottom position, then lift it up to the desired back.
position.
D 2.8.11. Place for books (11)

D 2.8.7. Seat belt anchor point (7)
Behind the seat back is a place for books (A4).
The anchor points for the seat belt are located on the seat.
Air suspension-driver's seat (extra equipment), see
page 200.
D 2.8.8. Seat back inclination (8)
Pull this lever up then set the back rest to the desired
position.
D 2.8.9. Arm rest adjustment (9)

Adjust the left side arm rest by removing the cover and
changing the arm rest position in the mounting slot.
1
2
T D6
Adjust the right side arm rest as follows:

D 2.9. Other controls
T D14
The mirror is adjusted inwards/outwards by opening the

lock.

E. Starting and running
Make sure you understand all the instruments and the started. Keep an eye on the instruments while driving.
functions of the controls before you start driving your new
IMPORTANT!
tractor. Also read the Safety Precautions at the beginning
of the manual. Always carry out daily maintenance of the tractor before
working.
Check all instruments immediately after the engine has
E 1. Points to note during the first 50 hours running

Drive smoothly and vary the loading in order to run the - Avoid driving in the same gear and at the same engine
tractor in correctly. This will give the tractor a longer speed for long periods at a time.
service life and make it more economical. NOTE: Check that all bolts and nuts are properly
- Do not race the engine and do not run it at maximum tightened (wheels, exhaust system etc.).
speed.
- Do not pull a heavy load at a low engine speed, i.e.
don't make the engine labour.
E 2. Starting the engine

WARNING: Never run the tractor in an 5. If the engine fails to start in 10 seconds, stop starting
enclosed building. and try again following instructions at point 3 (the pre
heating of induction air does not function during
starting the engine). When the engine starts to fire,
keep the starter motor engaged until the engine has
WARNING: Never start the engine unless
started.
you are seated in the tractor.
When turning the ignition switch to the on position, the
indicator lights for the parking brake and 4WD must be
illuminated. These will illuminate for approximately 0.6
seconds after the switch has been turned. This delay is for
E 2.1. Normal start/cold start security in order for the system to carry out starting
checks.
The engine starting process is carried out so that the IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start the first time,
emissions are reduced when starting. wait until it is completely stopped before trying again.
The running of the engine when cold, is adjusted by the
temperature (smooth engine running, good engine E 2.1.1. Cold start, special instructions
starting, minor smoking...).
1. Ensure that the shuttle/parking brake lever is in the NOTE: Turn off all unnecessary equipment that uses
parking brake position. electrical power, because their circuits remain closed in
2. Turn the hand throttle knob to the low idling position the glow and start positions.
(counter-clockwise).
3. Turn the ignition switch to start the position 1 If the starter motor does not start to engage immediately
- -If the glow indicator light on the dashboard does not when the ignition switch is turned to the START position,
light up (= engine is warm enough), turn the ignition stop the starting attempt for a moment and try again.
switch to the start position. IMPORTANT: Starting the tractor when it is very cold the
-If the glow indicator light on the dashboard lights up, indicator lamp for blocked hydraulic filters may be
wait until it extinguishes and then turn the ignition switch illuminated. Then the oil goes through the by-pass valve
to the start position. unfiltered. Do not race the engine and avoid using the
-Release the ignition switch after the engine starts. Use linkage until the oil has warmed up so that the indicator
the accelerator pedal to control the engine running lamp is not lit any longer.
speed. First warm up the engine and hydraulics for a little while at
After starting the cold engine the glow indicator light might low engine revs. You can speed up the warming of the
turn on again in cold conditions ( under +15°C). This hydraulic system by turning the steering wheel (not to the
afterglow reduces white smoke and keeps the cold engine limit positions). Do not use the auxiliary hydraulic valves
running smooth. when the oil is cold.
4. Reduce the engine speed as soon as the tractor has If you have to start the engine without the aid of the
started. Never "race" a cold engine. electric heating of induction air when it is very cold, keep
- Observe the oil pressure. After 3-4 seconds it the starter motor engaged (for a maximum of 30 seconds
should be normal (especially for the lubrication of at a time) until the engine has started.
the turbocharger).
Starting the tractor when it is very cold is easier if the
battery is kept in a warm place when not working.
Never race a cold engine. Run the engine with a light load
until it has reached its normal operating temperature.
-93- E. Starting and running

IMPORTANT: Always use the engine heater (standard - Check that the auxiliary batteries have the same voltage
equipment), when the temperature is below 0°C, when as the standard batteries.
possible. - Open the battery plugs to avoid risk of explosion.
This ensures the start in cold conditions and reduces the -WARNING: A fully charged battery
wear on the engine. 2-3 hours warm up before starting is connected directly to a dead battery can
enough. When the engine heater is connected to the plug cause a current surge which can cause the
socket you can hear a hissing sound which means that batteries to explode. The correct procedure
the warm up is on. is as follows:
- Connect the (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery to the
NOTE: If tractor driving is for a short-distance, make sure
(+) terminal on the tractor battery. Then connect the
that the battery is charged enough to ensure starting.
other jump lead from the (-) terminal of the auxiliary
battery to the e.g. attaching bolt of the battery ground
E 2.2. Starting gas cable.
- When the engine has started, first disconnect the jump
lead between the ground and the (-) terminal of the
CAUTION: The use of STARTING auxiliary battery. Then remove the jump lead between
AEROSOLS is absolutely forbidden (due to the (+) terminals.
the automatic glowing). DANGER OF
EXPLOSION. Start the engine using the ignition switch. Always follow
the correct procedure. Never try to start the engine by
shortĆcircuiting leads.
E 2.3. Starting with an auxiliary Having started the engine, declutch, select the correct
battery (jump starting) gear, release the parking brake and select the desired
driving direction. Steadily increase the engine speed, and
When starting with the aid of auxiliary batteries the release the clutch pedal slowly.
following points should be noted:
E 3. Driving start
- In cold conditions warm the engine to normal operating - Move the shuttle lever (1) to the desired driving direction
temperature before loading it hard. Remember that and release the foot brake pedal.
there is more wear on the engine when it is running cold In cold conditions (colder than -5°C) it is recommended
than at normal operating temperature. to run the tractor engine for a little while to warm the
When the power shuttle is in the neutral position (or the power transmission oil.
parking brake is applied) the multi-discs are disengaged
and shifting between main- and/or group gears is
possible without using the clutch pedal or push button. E 3.1. Accelerator pedal
3 2
T E29
Use of the accelerator pedal makes it possible to exceed

the engine speed set by the hand throttle (1). When the
1 accelerator pedal is released, the engine speed returns to
that set by the hand throttle. If you are using the
accelerator pedal, the hand throttle (1) must be placed in
T E2
the closed position.
When starting to drive:

- The shuttle lever (1) must be in the neutral position.
Keep the tractor stationary by depressing the foot brake
pedal.
- Choose the desired range with the group lever (2).
- Choose the desired range with the gear lever (3).
E. Starting and running -94-

E 4. Driving
Keep an eye on the indicator lamps and gauges. does not move. The shifting of the clutch control by the
foot pedal is available in any situation. Note that the
WARNING: Don't turn the starter key to the
engagement of the power transmission is not automatic,
STOP position when driving. When the
but the movement of the foot clutch pedal controls the
ignition is off, the parking brake applies and
engagement.
all wheels lock.
WARNING: When coupling implements or
WARNING:
other operations where precise movements
1. Do not keep your foot on the clutch
are needed the foot pedal must always be
pedal, or maintain it at a mid-way position.
used.
2. Do not descend slopes with the tractor in
gear and the clutch disengaged. WARNING: When using the HiShift- switch
3. When turning on headlands with heavy, always be ready to operate the clutch pedal
mounted implements, reduce the engine if needed.
speed to 1300 revs/min.
4. If the engine is not running the steering is
DANGER: If the tractor engine is left
not power-assisted.
running be sure not to leave anybody in the
WARNING: Keep always the HYDRAULICS cab as the push buttons can be easily
OFF while driving on the road. operated. The parking brake must always be
applied.
- Select the ratio which gives the optimum fuel

consumption without overloading the engine and the
E 4.2. Power shuttle
transmission. Bear in mind at the same time that soil
conditions can vary within a matter of a few yards in the
same field. Select a ratio which allows the engine to
operate comfortably at about 75 % of its maximum
power.
The highest speed ranges for the single gear ratio are in 1
the speed range table (on page 173). 3 3
When engaging the creeper range (LL) the tractor must be
stationary.
IMPORTANT: The crawling speed range (LL) can not be
used for bigger drafting force than which is reached with
Low range (M). 2
If the engine stops when driving due overload etc., the
current must be switched off before a new start.
E 4.1. HiShift- switch

T E4
The power shuttle (1) can also be operated while the

tractor is moving. There is no need to use the clutch pedal
(traditional use of clutch pedal is still possible when
desired).
The engagement of the shuttle is automatic. It stops the
1 tractor smoothly.
The Power shuttle can also be operated at high speed,
but does not automatically start braking until the speed is
under 10 kph.
If the shuttle is going to be changed when the tractor
speed is over 10 kph, the chosen direction arrow flashes
1 and the shuttle is in neutral. When the vehicle speed goes
below 10 kph, the shuttle engages and the chosen
direction arrow shows.
If the shuttle lever is returned to the original direction
T E3
when the speed is over 10 kph, the traction engages
immediately.
When driving the shifting can be done normally by using It is recommend that power shuttle is operated
the HiShift- switch (1) both in the main gear lever and in however in lower speed, then there is less stress in
the range gear lever. The engagement is automatic. the power transmission.
When using the HiShift- switches (1) the clutch pedal

E 4.2.1. Programming of Power Shift E 4.4. Power Shift
When needed the desired PS-gear can be
preprogrammed to engage automatically (button 2) at the
same time as the power shuttle (preprogramming (3) is
also shown in the display panel). E.g. in loader working
when changing the direction to forward the PS 1 can be 1
1
engaged and when changing the direction to backward
the PS 3 can be engaged. In the preprogramming 1
situation while driving the PS- gears can be changed
1
manually, as normal. If preprogramming is not done, the
chosen PS is engaged while changing direction.
3
E 4.3. Automatic traction control
T E35
Because of the Power Shift-gearing on the tractors there

1 are 36 forward and 36 reverse gears. The PS- gears
are controlled either with push buttons (1) (on the speed
gear lever and on the range lever knobs) or with rocking
switch (2) (on the right side arm rest). PS- gear
changings can be done without depressing the clutch
pedal.
Each speed range can be increased by pressing the
Power Shift hare button or by pressing the symbol side of
the rocking switch and decreased by pressing the turtle
T E30
button or by pressing the opposite side to the symbol of
the rocking switch.
The automatic traction control (1) is useful e.g. in road
driving when stopping at crossings. It is not necessary to The same automatic selection controls the Power Shift -
disengage the traction with the speed gear, range gear or gear changings as the power shuttle. This makes the PS-
shuttle lever or with the clutch pedal/HiShift- switch. To gear engagement very smooth.
start moving again simply press the accelerator pedal. When the 2nd or 3rd gear of the PS is engaged both
Similarly in many working conditions, when the traction tractor models have larger output area in use = + Power
control is engaged, e.g. hydraulic implements can be output range.
used at low revs and then engage the traction by simply
depressing the accelerator pedal. The display panel displays the engaged PS- gear (3).
The PS- gear can be changed quickly e.g. from the
lowest to the highest by a double click. The automatic
selector shifts smoothly through the intermediate steps
and flashes the number of the speed range, for which the
PS is selected, the number continues to be displayed after
the speed range is finally engaged.

Use the selection switch (1) (also programming with this
E 4.4.1. Power Shift-automatics switch) to set either a constant programmed driving speed
(kmh) or constant RPMs (rpm) by pressing the
relevant side of the switch.
1 Use the setting switch (2) to increase or decrease the

currently set RPMs/driving speed, the change will also be
stored in the memory.
The tractor will maintain the set constant RPMs/driving
speed, if the engine can keep the RPMs constant.
3 2 When you quick-shift during driving, the set constant
driving speed remains if it is in the normal RPM range of
the engine, and the engine can maintain the RPMs in
question.
When using the brake/clutch pedal, the HiShift switch, the
OFF-switch (3) or the shuttle lever in connection with the
constant driving speed or using the OFF-switch in
connection with the constant driving speed/RPMs, the
function will be disconnected. (NOTE: Check the position
T E31 of the hand throttle knob (4) before switching off the
cruise control).
When needed the automatic PS- gear shifting program If the tractor has been shut down and re-started, the
(1) can be switched on either automatically in accordance constant speed must be set again.
with load and engine revs functioning (AUTO 1) or in
When using the hand throttle and Cruise Control
accordance with engine revs changing (AUTO 2) (the
together, e.g. when working on the field.
chosen program is also shown in the display panel (2)).
The program always changes to the optimum PS-gear. In - When working on the field the Cruise Control is On
Auto 2 position the driver can program the engine revs as - The lower driving speed is needed when coming to the
to where the PS- gears will be changed. headland. Then the Cruise Control will be disengaged
and the previous setting of the hand throttle activated.
In addition when the automatic PS is switched on with the
main gears, the separate Speed matching automatically
operates trying to even out speed differences which are
too high by engaging the right PS- gear. When changing
a higher main gear the PS- gear engages a lower one
and vice versa.
When using the automatic operation, the display will flash
showing the number of the next chosen speed range (3)
before the automatic speed range changes. After the
speed range has been engaged, the number stops
blinking and remains steadily lit on the display.
Cruise control
E 4.5.
(Cruise-panel)
4 3
1
2
T E32
The use of cruise control is detailed in section

Instruments and controls" on page 71.

while driving without using the clutch pedal.
E 4.6. Brakes
If a wheel starts to slip, engage the differential lock. Do
WARNING: When driving at speed or on the not engage the differential lock if a wheel is already
road, the two brake pedals must be locked slipping. For optimum performance, engage the
together by means of the latch. differential lock when starting a run.
With alternative equipment the front axle differential lock
can be electro hydraulically operated at the same time as
To achieve brake function at the front wheels, the 4WD
the rear axle.
always engages when both brake pedals are pressed.
E 4.8. Front wheel drive
T E16
T E34
The STOP position of the starter switch can The switch for the 4WD automatic has 3 positions. The
be used as an EMERGENCY STOP. The functions are described on page 64.
tractor and several movements of the
implements can be stopped if any fault The 4WD can be engaged and disengaged while driving
occurs, by turning the starter key to the without using the clutch pedal.
STOP position (the engine stops, all the Four wheel drive is also engaged when braking with both
wheels lock, the transmission disengages pedals.
and the movement of the linkage stops). With this function it is always possible to get the
maximum traction. This reduces wheel slip by the rear
wheels when working on slippery surfaces.
E 4.7. Differential lock
E 4.8.1. Driving on the road
Leave the front wheel drive disengaged while driving on
the road, if front wheel drive is not required.
Tractors are not allowed to use 4WD at speeds of over 15
kph, if conditions are good on the roads.
T E33
The rear axle differential lock automatic switch is on the

right hand side panel.
The switch has 3 positions. The functions are described
on page 64.
The differential lock can be engaged and disengaged

E 5. Stopping
Lower the implement (and in cold weather lower links WARNING: Do not have the parking brake
without implements) and apply the parking brake and on when driving, all wheels will be locked.
stop the engine. For the safety reasons the parking brake
applies only at speeds under 2 kph.
When the engine is not running, the parking brake is
automatically on independently of the parking brake lever
position.
When the parking brake is on, the 4WD is on, all wheels
are braking.
WARNING: If the parking brake cable
breaks or the adjustment is wrong, the
STOP light begins to flash. The fault has to
be repaired/adjusted before continuing
driving (see further instructions on page
162).
IMPORTANT: Before stopping the engine, reduce the
engine speed to idling, for about one minute, to allow time
for the engine temperature to stabilise. Turn the starter key
T E11 to the "stop" position.
The engine stopping sequence is carried out so that the
WARNING: ALWAYS apply the parking emissions are reduced when starting the engine.
brake when parking the tractor. The parking
brake applies automatically when stopping Fill up the fuel tank when finishing work for the day in
the engine. order to prevent condensation.
E 6. Action to be taken during use

Permitted driving inclinations
E 6.1. E 6.3. Off-road driving
for a tractor on a slope
During off-road driving, the lowest steps can be locked
(continuous driving) to ensure in the up-turned position or removed.
sufficient lubrication
E 6.4. Door limiting
Up and down slope, with either front or rear end up:
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38° When mounting twin wheels, check that the door does not
make contact with the wheels. If needed change the gas
Sideways to slope to right or left: spring to another hole.
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38°
Combined slope angles; left or right/up or down slope: E 6.5. Rear mudguards adjustment
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35°/33°
Rear mudguards width can be easily adjusted on the
WARNING: Angles for safe driving should be smaller tractor.
than stated to avoid the tractor tipping over.
NOTE: The mudguard edges must at least be level with
the tyre edges in the traffic tractors (50 km/h, Finland)
E 6.2. Using chains (after trasnsport the mudquards have to be moved if
necessary to the outermost position). In the 40 km/h
models the mudguards edges can be narrower than the
On 4WD models chains may only be fitted to the front
tyres.
wheels if the rear wheels are fitted with chains. Make sure
that the chains are correctly tensioned to avoid damaging
the mudguards.

D
A A
B
A
C
T E20
To adjust the mudguard:

- Loosen the attaching bolts for mudguard
extensions (A).
- Slacken the center link attaching nut (B), then the
adjusting can be carried out.
- Adjust them to the suitable width and tighten the center
link attaching nut (B).
- Drill new holes to the extensions by the mounting holes
and fasten the attaching bolts (A).
The mudguard extensions already have the holes for
widths 2280 mm and 2550 mm.
The maximum width permitted is 2550 mm (if the larger
width is not national allowed).
If the width measured from the mudguards edges is over
2460 mm, the new reflectors (C) have to be mounted on
the extension edges. At the same time the old
reflectors (D) have to be removed.
E 6.6. Front mudguards

After transportation the front mudguards have to be
checked/adjusted for max turning axle, and moved to the
right width so that the mudguards do not touch the tractor
chassis.
E 6.7. Towing the tractor

If possible towing should be avoided when the engine is
not running, because the pressure lubrication of the
gearbox does not operate. If towing can not be avoided,
the parking brake must be adjusted to off (see Adjusting
parking brake" on page 162, the tractor is equipped with
the keys, after this only the brake pedals are working), the
range lever must be in neutral (the rightmost lever) and
the gear lever in gear 4. Towing speed must not exceed
20 kph.

F. Operating instructions
Operating instructions for the extra and alternative
equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment.
12 13
11
8
10
9 9
9 9
1 1
5 5
2
2
7
4 6 4
3 3
T F1
1. Lifting links 8. Top link

2. Levelling gear 9. Quick-action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics
3. Lowering links 10. Auxiliary hydraulic system return coupling
4. Check links 11. Emergency stop plug for PTO
5. Trailer hitch lifting links (optional equipment, with the 12. Trailer socket
trailer hitch) 13. Inlet cover, remote control cables
6. Power take-off shaft (safety cup)
7. Towing hook (optional equipment, many alternatives
see page 205)
-101- F. Operating instructions

F 1. Power take-off (PTO)
Operation of the PTO is described "Operating
Instructions" on page 75.
Before attaching implements to the tractor PTO unit, make
sure the implement is designed for 540 R.P.M PTO or
1000 R.P.M PTO.
Implements for 540 r/min

(at engine speed 1874 r/min)
- Normally 6-spline shaft (as standard), diameter 13/8"
(35 mm).
- As alternative equipment it is possible to get a power
take off at nominal speed of 540E rpm, which gives an
economical 540 rpm at engine speed 1539 r/min.
When using the 540E range note, that when increasing
engine revs the PTO shaft can rotate up to 800 r/min.
- The ISO-norm does not limit the power of 540 r/min
6-spline with a diameter 13/8" (35 mm) PTO. In practice
for power over 50 kW it is better to use a 1000 r/min
output to ensure durability of the PTO shafts.
T F2
Implements for 1000 r/min
(at engine speed 2080 r/min) WARNING: Stop the engine and disengage
- Normally 21-spline shaft (extra equipment), diameter the PTO before attaching any implement to
13/8" (35 mm). the tractor.
Check that the implement's working area is
Heavy use clear before engaging the PTO.
- For heavy use power take-off shafts of 13/4" (45 mm) WARNING: When a PTO driven implement is
dia. are recommended being used no personnel are allowed near
- If necessary, a torque limiting clutch with maximum the PTO shaft. Service work on the PTO
torque of 1000 Nm should be used. shaft should be carried out only with the
- When engaging the PTO wait, that the clutch of PTO PTO disengaged, the engine stopped and
shaft is totally engaged (for 5 seconds) before loading the key removed from the ignition switch.
it, especially when the oil is cold. WARNING: After the PTO is disengaged the
implement continues to rotate for some time
Working instructions (regardless of braking).
- On the tractor both PTO nominal speeds can be used Do not approach the implement until it has
regardless of the type of shaft fitted to the tractor. stopped completely.
- Always engage the PTO at a low engine speed in order IMPORTANT: When the PTO shaft is connected between
to protect the clutch and PTO mechanism. the tractor and the implement the implement must be
- After starting in freezing weather let the tractor run for a attached to the tractor. Otherwise the implement can start
few minutes before engaging the PTO. to rotate with the PTO shaft.
- The power take-off is equipped with a brake, which
prevents the PTO shaft from rotating when the multiĆdisc
clutch is disengaged.
If the tractor engine stops e.g. for overloading when using
PTO, the ignition switch must be turned off before new
starting to prevent an unintentional engagement of the
PTO.
F. Operating instructions -102-

F 1.2. Power take-off shafts
- 21-splines (standard ISO 500), shaft diameter 1 3/8"
(35 mm), extra equipment
- 20-splines (standard ISO 500), shaft diameter 1 3/4"
(45 mm), standard
- 6-splines (standard ASAE) (Valtra 1203), shaft diameter
1 3/4" (45 mm), extra equipment
- 8-splines (standard GOST 3480-58), shaft diameter 38
mm, extra equipment
T F3
WARNING: The safety cover (A) over the

PTO shaft end should always be attached
when the PTO is not in use.
Observe all safety precautions in any operation

involving implements driven by the PTO.
B
F 1.1. Sigma Power T F4
The tractors are Sigma Power models. Its principle

function is, that the tractor power take-off has been Change the PTO shaft by removing the inner circlip (B)
constructed to transfer larger output and torque than the and spacer ring. Pull the shaft out and fit the new shaft
tractor driving transmission. The engine has three different fully home (check that the shaft seal is undamaged). Fit
power and torque areas (on the model T180CR the two the spacer ring and circlip (B). Never run tractor without
largest power areas are equal), which two are controlled the PTO shaft. Check that the circlip is correctly
automatically through an electronic controller. positioned. Change the circlip if damaged.
The largest power and torque areas are on as follows:
1. Transport boost power area, when the main gear is H2 F 1.3. Proportional ground speed
or higher and DPS boost area, when quick-shift is 2 or
3. The trans boost and DPS boost power areas are
PTO
equal.
2. Sigma power area , the largest output/torque area,
when the power transferred through the
1
power-take-off is large enough. The symbol
(B) is illuminated in the instrument panel.
T F27
The proportional ground speed PTO is an alternative

equipment.The ground speed PTO is engaged by moving
B A the control lever (1) to the inner position and to the right.
T F26
The ground speed PTO must not be engaged when the
tractor is moving.
When the power take off is on, the display (A) shows (on
top/centre line) as a percentage, how much of the power
is transferied through the power take-off.

ground speed PTO should be disconnected. In addition
the trailer should be equipped with a means of
disconnecting the drive from the trailer.
IMPORTANT: When driving with proportional ground
speed PTO, the crawling speed range (LL) can not be
used.
Before putting a trailer with a powered axle into service,
make sure that the drive is compatible with the PTO of
the tractor. The speed of the trailer should be 0-3 % lower
than that of the tractor.
2 Checking the transmission

F 1.4.
ratio of a PTO driven trailer for
use with proportional ground
T F75
speed PTO
When the ground speed PTO is engaged the PTO switch 1. Select a flat, hard-surfaced area or road.
(2) does not function and the warning light on the 2. Check tyres for correct pressure
instrument panel does not illuminate. For heavy 3. Remove PTO transmission shaft
proportional use (or in heavy PTO use) it is recommended 4. Fasten wire or tape indicators to the power take-off
that the 1 3/4" (45 mm) shaft is used. shaft on the tractor and to the trailer drive shaft: the
The 4WD can be used independently of the ground speed indicators should be aligned.
PTO. 5. The tractor (together with the trailer) is pulled slowly
forwards: two people should count how many
WARNING: When using the proportional revolutions the tractor and trailer shaft make. Counting
ground speed PTO the speed of the PTO stops at 100 revolutions of the tractor shaft; the figures
shaft varies according to the ground speed for the tractor and trailer shafts are then compared.
of the tractor. When the tractor is reversed 6. If the number of trailer drive shaft revolutions is higher
the PTO shaft also rotates in the reverse than 100 (the revolutions of the tractor shaft), the trailer
direction. is slower than the tractor, and vice versa.
7. The trailer should be 0-3 per cent slower, i.e., the
The proportional ground speed PTO is primarily used in
trailer shaft should have revolved 100-103 times. If the
the low range (M) area. The proportional ground speed
number of revolutions is greater than this, the trailer's
PTO is designed for the highest torque values of the low
braking effect is too great; if it is smaller than 100, the
range (M) area. In the high range (H) area the
trailer will tend to push, which can endanger the tractor
transmission shaft rotates faster, and consequently the
steering.
F 2. Trailer
Total weight of the trailer = load + empty trailer weight
F 2.1. Trailer socket
The kind of trailer can be connected to the tractor
depends among other things on whether the trailer has
brakes, how much of the trailer weight is on the hitch, the
slackening of the tractor brakes and whether the trailer
has one or more axles.
For further information, contact the dealer.
When loading the hitch be sure that at least 20 % of the
tractor weight is on the front wheels.
Do not exceed the max allowed wheel- or hitch loading.
Tyre loadings are given in the "Technical specifications"
section (on page 169) and the trailer hitch loadings in the
Extra and alternative equipment" section (on page 205).
T F7
WARNING: If the trailer hitch is worn-out
or otherwise damaged so, that it is
possible that the drawbar eye can be 1. Brake light (red)
detached from the trailer hitch. The hook 2. Direction indicator left (yellow)
must be replaced. 3. Ground (-) (white)
4. Direction indicator right (violet)
5. Parking light right (brown)
6. Parking light left (black)
7. Continuous current, max. 15 A. The possibility to switch
off the current supply is only available in the tractors
with a main switch or a rear fog light.

F 3. Three-point linkage
F 3.1. Lifting links
T F9
The length of the lifting links can be adjusted by lifting the

T F8 levelling screws up and turning them in the required
direction. After adjustment the levelling screws must be
The models T180CR and T190CR are supplied with lowered back down to the locked position.
Category 3 hook end lower links. IMPORTANT: If the tractor has automatic check links
WARNING: Ensure that the hooks latch (extra equipment) and you adjust the right side lifting link
correctly. shorter, check at the maximum lifting hight, that the check
link does not contact the return oil filter.
To enable unlatching of the hook type ends from the cab,

cables can be fitted via the guides on the three-point
linkage unit.
The top link has three different attaching holes on the
tractor, and thus it is possible to get different lifting
geometries for different implements. When the top link is
in the lowest hole the implement inclines forwards and the
upper hole gives almost horizontal lifting movement.
When using the hydraulic top link, ensure that it operates
normally when you are attaching an implement. Do not
use the hydraulic top link in the lowest hole in the
mounting bracket, as this may damage the bracket. (It is
possible to get a foul condition in the bracket).
1
T F64
The lifting links can be attached to the lower links at one

of four holes. Different holes give different lifting ranges
and lifting power for the lower links.
In addition, the carrier pin (1) can be fitted to the lower
links at two different positions; one gives a fixed position
and the other allows slight vertical movement of the lower
links.

F 3.2. Check links F 3.3. Quick couplings for lower
links
1 2
3
D
4A 4B
T F61
T F11
1. Pull the lever to release the implement.
2. The lock can be left open by pulling the lever backward
Check links are used to limit the lateral movement of the
(e.g. for de-mounting an implement).
lower links.
3. Release the lock by pulling the lever forward.
By changing position of the check link attaching pin (A), 4A,B The ball joints lock automatically when attaching the
different lateral positions for the lower links can be implement. In the locked position the clamp (C) is in
obtained. If the pins are fitted in the long holes, the lower view and the lever (D) is in the lower position.
links have a floating position in the lateral direction.
IMPORTANT: Clean, if necessary the quick couplings and
The automatic check links are available as extra ball joints for the lower links before attaching the implement.
equipment, more details beginning on page 214. DANGER OF THE IMPLEMENT RELEASING!
The quick couplings can be controlled in the cab using
the wire.

F 3.3.1.Release wire setting of quick F 3.3.2. Quick couple ball joints for
couplings for lower links lower links
2 Cat 3
2
1
Cat 3/2 Cat 3/2

3 3
4 4
T F108
The figure shows the different ball joints for attaching an

implement. The part number are found below the ball
T F109
joints. The ball joint on the left is equipped with a guide
cone to make attaching an implement easier.
Fasten the wire (1) to the socket bracket (2) on the cab
rear wall. Pass the wire through the controller (3) and
fasten it to the quick coupling lock (4).

F 4. Using the hydraulic lift
3 5 4 10
8 12
7 11
2
T F110
F 4.1.Lift/stop/lower switch F 4.2. Position control

(Autocontrol switch)
The position control is used with implements which run on
the ground (mowers, rakes, sprayers etc.).
The lift/stop/lower switch (2) has 3 positions. When the
symbol side is pressed down the lower links are lowered NOTE: When the position control is being used the draft
to the height which is set by the position control knob control selector (4) must be set to the P position. This
(1). When the opposite side to the symbol side is ensures that the linkage will remain in the position
pressed down the lower links raise to the height set by the selected without draft control.
transport height selector (6). The lower links stop
moving when the switch is set in the centre position. The lower links are raised when the position control
knob (1) is turned clockwise and lowered when it is turned
counterĆclockwise. When the knob is set to an
F 4.1.1. Activating the linkage intermediate position the lower links take up and maintain
the corresponding position.
The position control is activated by switching the The percentage position (0-100) of the lower links can be
lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lift position or to the lower seen on the graphical display of the Proline instrument
position. After this the diagnosis light (3) goes out and the panel, when the AC-display is selected on the top/centre
lower links move slowly to the position which has been line using the change over switch, see page 52.
pre-set. The linkage has to be activated every time the
tractor has been switched off or when the push buttons NOTE: The implement can be lifted up by switching the
mounted on the mudguards or inner switch for connecting lift/stop/lower switch (2) to the lift position (= transport
implement in the cab have been used. position, the upper position chosen by knob 6) and
lowered back to the same depth (lower position set by the
position control, 1) by switching to the lower position.
NOTE: The control panel is fitted with lights (8) to indicate
whether the lower links are being lifted or lowered. There
is also a draft control indicator light (7).

F 4.3. Setting transport height F 4.6. Lowering speed control
The transport height selector (6) can be used to limit the The choice of lowering speed depends on the type of
lifting height. Switching the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift implement being used. A slow lowering speed must be
position or using the position control knob (1) will result in used with heavy implements. The lowering speed is
the links being lifted to the upper limit set by the selector. increased as the knob (5) is turned clockwise and vice
The numbers of the position control knob (1) and versa. The lowering speed is independent of the load.
transport height selector (6) correspond with each other.
Nine different heights can be selected using this knob.
This selector does not limit the lifting range when the push Override switch for position
F 4.7.
buttons on the mudguards or inner switch for connecting control knob = forced lowering
implement are used.
switch
F 4.4. Floating-position The override switch for position control knob (9) can be
used on jobs, where lower links have to be temporarily
The floating position is used when working with certain lower than the value which has been set by the control
types of implements, which have to follow the ground knob. This is useful e.g. when ploughing. This switch
surface (e.g. sowing machine, roller etc.). The position allows quicker entry of the plough to the correct depth at
control knob (1) is turned to the extreme counter- the beginning and better maintenance of depth at the exit
clockwise position and the lower links can then move from the end.
freely up and down following the movements of the
implement. The lower indicator light (8) is lit continuously.
F 4.8. Drive balance control switch
WARNING: When working with implements, which follow
the ground surface, use the FLOATING position,
otherwise the implement may be damaged.
A 10
F 4.5. Draft control
Draft control is used when working with implements that
operate below the surface of the ground (ploughs,
cultivators etc.). The draft control sensitivity is set by
turning the selector (4) from the position (P) to one of six
different sensitivity positions (1-6).
The linkage is adjusted to regulate the working depth, 1 =
small influence ... 6 = very large influence.
Position 3 is normally used for ploughing. If larger draft
control is required, position 4 can be used instead and the 11 T F71
ploughing depth is not significantly affected.
NOTE: The ploughing depth can be adjusted with the
The best use of the drive balance control is in driving at
position control knob.
high speed when a heavy implement is attached to the
The lift/lower indicator lights (8) show the speed at which three-point linkage. It can also be used on the field.
the draft control is operating. The drive balance control is activated, when switch (10) is
turned to position A (indicator light 11 lights). Then when
NOTE: The lower links allow a certain amount of sideways
lifting the linkage with the lift/stop/lower switch (2), the
movement to the implement, and this also affects the
drive balance control is on if the engaging speed is
range of the draft control. Therefore the sideways
exceeded, on the linkage version Ds about 8 km/h
movement of the links should be adjusted to about 70 mm
adjusted in the factory (adjustable). On the linkage version
(3 inches) at the ends of the arms.
Ds the engaging speed has to be adjusted low enough so
NOTE: When draft control is not in use the selector switch that the balance control can be used while working in the
should be turned to the P position. On the linkage version field (adjusting instructions on page 74).
Ds the control panel is fitted with an indicator light to show
when draft control is in use at any particular time.
When the draft resistance exerted by the implement on
the lower links rises to the value set, the linkage lifts the
implement in order to counteract the increase in
resistance to keep it constant.
When the draft control is operating the weight of the
implement is automatically shifted to maintain traction. If
pulling resistance increases the hydraulic lift raises the
implement and some of the weight is transferred to the
rear wheels. Thus the driving wheels maintain maximum
traction.

(position B, the indicator light (12) lights) and when the
F 4.9. Slip control draft control switch (4) is on the draft control area (the
draft control indicator light 7 lights) the slip control is on.
When the wheels spin over the adjusted slip limit the
B linkage lifts the implement. When the slip decreases, the
C linkage lowers back to the same depth. If the tractor is
10 stationary for about 30 seconds, the indicator light goes
out and the slip control has to be activated again.
When switch (10) is turned between drive balance and slip
control positions (position C) the drive balance control is
on (indicator light 11 lights), when the lift/stop/lower
switch (2) is on the lifting position and the slip control is
on (the indicator light 12 lights) when the lift/stop/lower
switch (2) is in the lowing position.
7 12
11
T F72
When turning the switch (10) to the slip control position
F 5. Auxiliary hydraulic valves

The tractor has two valve blocks with electric control as Additional valves (blocks 3 and 4; 5 and 6), as
standard, they are controlled with a separate lever (in arm extra equipment. Blocks 3 and 4 only as a pair,
rest). Both valve blocks have a float position. similarly blocks 5 and 6.
In the tractor's rear/front end there are Push-Pull type
quick action couplings with decompression valves for the 3. Valve (V3)
possible coupling, even if the female quick coupling is - 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating);
under pressure. adjustable flow, adjustable time1), (0-leakage);
WARNING: Before connecting or (single-action valve cylinder lowering with floating
disconnecting the quick couplings for front position)
loader adjust the loader blocks into the 4. Valve (V4)
floating position with the blue and brown - 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating);
adjusting switches in the control panel (the adjustable flow, adjustable time1), (0-leakage);
tractor has to be running and the parking (single-action valve cylinder lowering with floating
brake engaged). position)
NOTE: Make sure the quick coupling does not leak after 5. Valve (V5)
disconnecting the hose. - 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating);
For the available volume of oil for the auxiliary hydraulics adjustable flow, adjustable time1), (0-leakage);
see Technical specifications" on page 179. (single-action valve cylinder lowering with floating
position)
6. Valve (V6)
F 5.1. Valve functions
- 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating);
adjustable flow, adjustable time1), (0-leakage);
There are 2-valves as standard (max 6 valves+ 6/2 valve) (single-action valve cylinder lowering with floating
The valve block control and operating switches vary in position)
different valve and implement variations, see different vaĆ 6/2 valve
riations beginning at page 112. - connects the 1. valve, either as to standard - or
additional quick-action couplings
Standard valves (blocks 1 and 2) 1) adjustable time: 0...10 s or continuously on
1. Valve (V1, in the right hand driving direction) The blocks J5 and J6 have no adjustment panel so they
- 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating); have no position locking and floating position functions.
adjustable flow, adjustable time1), single-action valve
The valves which are controlled with levers J5 and J6 have
cylinder lowering with floating position
only 3 positions (out-hold-in).
2. Valve (V2)
- 4-positions (out-hold-in-floating);
adjustable flow, adjustable time1), (0-leakage);
(single-action valve cylinder lowering with floating
position)

F 5.1.1. Position locking F 5.1.2. Floating position
b c
d
e
c d
a
b
T F67 T F68
In position locking position the oil is flowing continuously In the floating position the oil can circulate freely and the
through the valve (out/in). Adjust the valve to the position implement follows the ground contours. Adjust the floating
locking position as follows: position as follows:
- select valve block (1, 2, 3 or 4), e.g. 4 - select the valve block (1, 2, 3 or 4), e.g. 1
- select the desired flow direction (+/-) and with the - select the input flow direction (-) and with the flow
adjusting switch (a) of the timer for this flow direction adjusting switch (a) the position "
the desired active state time for the flow, the yellow - select with the adjusting switch (b) of the timer for this
signal light (b) goes on flow direction the desired active state time for the flow,
- press the operating switch of the flow direction (c) at the yellow signal (c) goes on
least for 0.6 seconds, then the position locking is - press the operating switch of the flow direction (d) at
activated (green signal light d) least for 0.6 seconds, the floating position is activated
- the green signal light (d) will remain active for the set (green signal light e)
time (for 1...10 seconds or continuously by the - the green signal light (e) will remain active for the set
position ). time (for 2...10 seconds or continuously by the
The position locking stop before the adjusted time is out: position ).
- by pressing the opposite direction activating switch The floating position stop before the adjusted time is out:
(-/+) - by pressing the opposite direction activating switch (+)
- by moving the control lever of the activated valve block - by moving the control lever of the activated valve block
(the control lever must also be activated) (the control lever must also be activated)
- by pressing the STOP-button (all functions of working - by pressing the STOP-button (all functions of working
hydraulics stop, see point (4) page 79). hydraulics stop, see point (4) page 79).
WARNING: To avoid serious injury or death
due to falling loads resulting from F 5.1.3. Valve adjustment to single-
inadvertent raising or roll-back of the
loader, DO NOT connect loader hydraulics action
to any tractor auxiliary valve that has Adjustment to single-action is carried out as in floating
detents which cannot be locked out or position.
removed, except for the float function in the
loader lower circuit. If the tractor is
equipped with such a valve, a dedicated,
properly configured loader valve MUST be
installed.
2 2
1 1
T F19
When using the valve as single-action valve connect the

probe to quick-coupling (1), when pressing the + knob pressure, if there are not any extra quick-couplings).
(from side panel/arm rest) the oil is flowing to the hose. Connect the tipping device probe to coupling (1,+). The
When pressing the - knob (from side panel/arm rest) valve must always be adjusted to single-action =
both quick-couplings (1, 2) are open to tank, when the floating-position.
floating position is selected.
F 5.1.4. Tipping a trailer

WARNING: Ensure that the yellow indicator b
lights for tipping a trailer instrument panel
do not illuminate or the timers are not on.
c
DANGER: Remember in emergency that all
the auxiliary hydraulic functions will stop
when pressing the HYDRAULICS OFF a
switch. Additionally, all the tractor functions
will stop when turning the ignition switch to
the STOP position.
T F69
In this example with blue control panel (this example

tractor has a valve coupling variation where the 1 valve
block is controlled with the blue control panel)
- select with the adjusting switch (a) for - flow direction
the position "
- The tipping device rises when pressing the + operating
switch (b) (or when pulling backwards the control lever
in the arm rest)
- The tipping device lowers when pressing the -
operating switch (c) (or when pressing the lowering
1 switch in the arm rest for 1 valve block).
If the tractor is equipped for example with the front loader,
the blue and brown panel in the side panel is reserved.
T F62 Then the tipping device has to be connected to valve
block coupling (+) controlled either with green or white
For single action, used for tipping a trailer, it is panel.
recommended to use the right side valve (the least back
F 5.1.5. Summary, valves and couplings

All the different variations of auxiliary hydraulics and their The valve output couplings have the same corresponding
operating devices are described in figures below. The colours and also + and - symbols.
tractor is equipped with one of the following 16 variations.
NOTE: The valve 1 (blue) has to be used for
NOTE: The corresponding numbers for valve colors are: single-action cylinder, eg. for tipping device.
- 1 = blue colour, also the lowering and lifting switches in NOTE: In the variations on the following pages some tracĆ
arm rest tors have not the switch B and there is yellow colour inĆ
- 2 = brown colour stead of brown and red instead of grey.
- 3 = green colour, also the lowering and lifting switches
in arm rest
- 4 = white colour
- 5 = black colour
- 6 = grey colour

F 5.1.5.1. 2 valves (variation 1)
T F81
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1)

and control lever J (joystick, longitudinal movements,
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the
switch A) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+).
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2)
and control lever J (joystick, transverse movements, when
blue and brown control panels are activated with the
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+).

F 5.1.5.2. 4 valves (variation 2)
T F98
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3)
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements,
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the when green and white control panels are activated with
switch A) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+). the switch B) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-,
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve 3+).
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+). when green and white control panels are activated with
the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = green quick
4+).
couplings at the rear (3-, 3+) will be activated with the
switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 control = white Simultaneously the valve 1 control = blue quick couplings
quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) for the lever J4 at the rear (1-, 1+) will be activated with the switch B for
(levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment). the lever J1 and the valve 2 control = brown quick
couplings at the rear (2-, 2+) for the lever J2 (levers J1
and J2 as extra equipment).

F 5.1.5.3. 2 valves + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the rear) (variation 3)
T F83
The valve 1, which has the change over valve (GV), is

controlled with the blue control panel (1) and control lever
J (joystick, longitudinal movements, when blue and brown
control panels are activated with the switch A) = blue
quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+ and R-, R+).
Change valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve.
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve.
and control lever J (joystick, transverse movements, when
blue and brown control panels are activated with the

F 5.1.5.4. 4 valves + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the rear) (variation 4)
T F99
The valve 1, which has the change valve (GV), is The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3)
controlled with the blue control panel (1) and control lever and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements,
J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, when blue and when green and white control panels are activated with
brown control panels are activated with the switch A) = the switch B) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-,
blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+ and R-, R+). 3+).
Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV). Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve. Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve. The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, when green and white control panels are activated with
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+). 4+).
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = green quick Simultaneously the valve 1 control, which has the change
couplings at the rear (3-, 3+) will be activated with the valve (GV) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+
switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 control = white and R1-, R1+) will be activated with the switch B for the
quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) for the lever J4 lever J1 and the valve 2 control = brown quick couplings
(levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment). at the rear (2-, 2+) for the lever J2 (levers J1 and J2 as
extra equipment).

F 5.1.5.5. 4 valves + front linkage (variation 5)
T F100
switch A) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+). the switch B) = front linkage.
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+). the switch B) or with the control lever J4 (extra
equipment) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+).
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = front linkage will be
activated with the switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 Simultaneously the valve 1 control = blue quick couplings
control = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) for at the rear (1-, 1+) will be activated with the switch B for
the lever J4 (levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment). the lever J1 and the valve 2 control = brown quick

F 5.1.5.6. 4 valves + front linkage + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the
rear) (variation 6)
T F101
The valve 1, which has the change over valve (GV), is The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3)
controlled with the blue control panel (1) and control lever and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements,
brown control panels are activated with the switch A) = the switch B) or with the control lever J3 (extra
blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+ and R-, R+). equipment) = front linkage.
Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV). Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve. Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve. The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, when green and white control panels are activated with
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+). 4+).
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = front linkage will be Simultaneously the valve 1 control, which has the change
activated with the switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 valve (GV) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+
control = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) for and R1-, R1+) will be activated with the switch B for the
the lever J4 (levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment). lever J1 and the valve 2 control = brown quick couplings
at the rear (2-, 2+) for the lever J2 (levers J1 and J2 as
extra equipment).

front) (variation 7)
T F102
switch A) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+). the switch B) or with the control lever J3 (extra
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve equipment) = front linkage.
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, The valve 4, which has the change over valve (GV) is
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the controlled with the white control panel (4) and control
switch A) = brown quick couplings at the rear (2-, 2+). lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements, when green
and white control panels are activated with the switch B)
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = front linkage will be
= white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) and at the
activated with the switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4
front (F4-, F4+).
control, which has the change valve (GV) = white quick
couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) and at the front (F4-, F4+) Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
for the lever J4 (levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment). Simultaneously the valve 1 control = blue quick couplings
at the rear (1-, 1+) will be activated with the switch B for
the lever J1 and the valve 2 control = brown quick

F 5.1.5.8. 4 valves + front loader + implement control (variation 8)
T F122
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve Implement control
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, functions
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. loader use (extra equipment)
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = green quick Simultaneously the valve 1 control = front loader
couplings at the rear (3-, 3+) will be activated with the lift/lower will be activated with the switch B for the lever
switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 control = white J1 and the valve 2 control = front loader bucket for the
quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) for the lever J4 lever J2 (levers J1 and J2 as extra equipment).
(levers J3 and J4 as extra equipment).
The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3)
and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements,
when green and white control panels are activated with
the switch B) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-,
3+).
Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve

F 5.1.5.9. 4 valves + front loader + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the reĆ
ar) + implement control (variation 9)
T F121
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the The valve 4, which has the change over valve (GV) is
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. controlled with the white control panel (4) and control
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements, when green
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve and white control panels are activated with the switch B)
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) or with the control lever J4 (extra equipment) = white
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+ and R4-, R4+).
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. Implement control
Simultaneously the valve 3 control = green quick - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra
couplings at the rear (3-, 3+) will be activated with the functions
switch A for the lever J3 and the valve 4 control, which - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
has the change valve (GV) = white quick couplings at the loader use (extra equipment)
rear (4-, 4+ and R4-, R4+) for the lever J4 (levers J3 Simultaneously the valve 1 control = front loader
and J4 as extra equipment). lift/lower will be activated with the switch B for the lever
The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3) J1 and the valve 2 control = front loader bucket for the
and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements, lever J2 (levers J1 and J2 as extra equipment).
the switch B) or with the control lever J3 (extra
equipment) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-, 3+).

F 5.1.5.10. 6 valves + front linkage + quick couplings to the front (variation 10)
T F90
switch A) = blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+). the switch B) = white quick couplings at the front (4-,
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve The valve 5 is controlled with the control lever J5 = black
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) quick couplings at the rear (5-, 5+).
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements,
The valve 6 is controlled with the control lever J6 = grey
quick couplings at the rear (6-, 6+).
the switch B) = front linkage.

rear) + quick couplings to the front (variation 11)
T F91
The valve 1, which has the change over valve (GV), is The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
controlled with the blue control panel (1) and control lever and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
brown control panels are activated with the switch A) = the switch B) = white quick couplings at the front (4-,
blue quick couplings at the rear (1-, 1+ and R-, R+). 4+).
Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV). The valve 5 is controlled with the control lever J5 = black
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve. quick couplings at the rear (5-, 5+).
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve.

F 5.1.5.12. 6 valves + front loader (variation 12 a or b)
T F120
Variation a, front loader connection Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
The valve 5 is controlled with the control lever J5 = black
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) quick couplings at the rear (5-, 5+).
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the The valve 6 is controlled with the control lever J6 = grey
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. quick couplings at the rear (6-, 6+).
Implement control
Variation b, couplings of the valves 1 and 2 beĆ
- Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra funcĆ
hind tions
The implement can be connected to the quick hose - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
couplings of the valves 1 and 2 in the rear of the tractor, loader use (extra equipment)
which is controlled with the same operating devices as
the front loader in the variation A.
E.g. for front loader use, the loader hydraulics can be
connected with hoses to the rear couplings. If the front
loader is not needed, the valves 1 and 2 can be used for
other works.
the switch B) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-,
3+).

F 5.1.5.13. 6 valves + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the rear) + front
loader (variation 13 a or b)
T F119
Variation a, front loader connection The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3)
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) when green and white control panels are activated with
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, the switch B) = green quick couplings at the rear (3-,
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the 3+).
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. Parallel switch (3-) for - function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve Parallel switch (3+) for + function of the green valve
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve The valve 4, which has the change over valve (GV) is
The valve 2 is controlled with the brown control panel (2) controlled with the white control panel (4) and control
and control lever J (joystick A2, transverse movements, lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements, when green
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the and white control panels are activated with the switch B)
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+ and R4-,
R4+).
Variation b, couplings of the valves 1 and 2 Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
behind The valve 5 is controlled with the control lever J5 = black
The implement can be connected to the quick hose
couplings of the valves 1 and 2 in the rear of the tractor, The valve 6 is controlled with the control lever J6 = grey
which is controlled with the same operating devices as quick couplings at the rear (6-, 6+).
the front loader in the variation A.
E.g. for front loader use, the loader hydraulics can be Implement control
connected with hoses to the rear couplings. If the front - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra
loader is not needed, the valves 1 and 2 can be used for functions
other works. - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
loader use (extra equipment)

F 5.1.5.14. 6 valves + front loader + front linkage (variation 14)
T F118
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) quick couplings at the rear (6-, 6+).
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements,
Implement control
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra funcĆ
tions
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve
- Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
loader use (extra equipment)
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd.
The valve 4 is controlled with the white control panel (4)
and control lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements,
the switch B) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-,
4+).

F 5.1.5.15. 6 valves + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the rear) + front
loader + front linkage (variation 15)
T F117
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) and white control panels are activated with the switch B)
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+ and R4-,
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the R4+).
switch A) = front loader lift/lower. Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve The valve 5 is controlled with the control lever J5 = black
Parallel switch (1+) for + function of the blue valve quick couplings at the rear (5-, 5+).
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. Implement control
The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3) - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra
and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements, functions
when green and white control panels are activated with - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
the switch B) = front linkage. loader use (extra equipment)
The valve 4, which has the change over valve (GV) is
controlled with the white control panel (4) and control
lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements, when green

F 5.1.5.16. 6 valves + 6/2 valve + additional quick couplings (to the front) + front
loader + front linkage (variation 16)
T F116
The valve 1 is controlled with the blue control panel (1) = white quick couplings at the rear (4-, 4+) and at the
and control lever J (joystick A1, longitudinal movements, front (F4-, F4+).
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the Change over valve (GV) is controlled with switch (GV).
switch A) = front loader lift/lower.
Parallel switch (1-) for - function of the blue valve quick couplings at the rear (5-, 5+).
when blue and brown control panels are activated with the Implement control
switch A) = front loader bucket crowd. - Contact buttons (FL) for front loader use for extra
The valve 3 is controlled with the green control panel (3) functions
and control lever J (joystick B3, longitudinal movements, - Release switch for equipment locking (EL) for front
when green and white control panels are activated with loader use (extra equipment)
The valve 4, which has the change over valve (GV) is
controlled with the white control panel (4) and control
lever J (joystick B4, transverse movements, when green
and white control panels are activated with the switch B)

F 5.2. Return coupling
T F21
The tractor has, as standard, an auxiliary hydraulic return On the market there are also male connectors, not accorĆ
coupling A (1/2 inch). If the back pressure is too high, the ding to standards, which do not open correctly the quick
1" or 3/4" coupling is also available as extra equipment. couplings. This may occur e.g as slow lowering when
For information about back pressures, see Technical using the tipping device.
Specifications.
DANGER: When auxiliary cylinders and
NOTE: When using auxiliary hydraulics, the return hydraulic motors are connected, ensure that
coupling of the implement has to be connected to the the hoses are attached to the correct
return coupling (A) of the tractor. couplings. If the hoses are incorrectly
attached the functions will be reversed.
F 5.3. Connecting auxiliary All quick-action couplings are the type ISO7241-1
and serie A.
hydraulics
It is easier to connect and disconnect quick couplings by F 5.4. Action to be taken during
doing it as follows: operation
1. Release the load from hydraulics (specially from
hydraulic cylinders) and after that stop the flow through WARNING: It is prohibited to transport
the auxiliary valves. anything on auxiliary hydraulic valves while
2. Set all the - side adjusting switches to the floating driving on the road. The load, the trailer link
position and ensure the panel is activated. Press all the steering etc. have to be locked (e.g.
- switches in turn the valves then go to the floating mechanically).
position and the pressure exhausts from the quick
couplings. In this way the valves are not left in the WARNING: Implements connected to the
locked floating position which can be dangerous. linkage or the auxiliary hydraulic system
3. Stop the engine. must be lowered during maintenance.
4. Connect or disconnect the quick couplings.
5. Turn the flow knobs and the time knobs to the positions As extra equipment two additional valves, a trailer brake
wanted and start the engine. valve and an extra pair of quick-action couplings:
The valve control devices (the levers and operating - Valves are the same as the standard valves.
switches) and quick-action couplings are marked in the - Valve for trailer brakes which takes pressurized oil from
same way with colour codes and +/- symbols. the high pressure circuit when the brake pedals are
IMPORTANT: Clean the quick-action couplings pressed.
thoroughly before connecting any auxiliary hydraulic - The additional quick-action coupling pair will be
equipment. The caps on the couplings should be fitted installed either in the right side rear mudguard or front
when auxiliary equipment is not connected. (if equipped with the front lift).

Notice the temperature of the transmission oil !
F 5.5. Hydraulic motor Attention must be paid to the oil temperature, because
high temperatures is bad for the lubrication and due to
It is recommended that the hydraulic motor is connected that the pump or the engine can be damaged.
to the right side couplings, looking from behind= the right The recommended working temperature is under 80°C,
side valve block (not to the couplings in the mudguard). but the absolute top limit is 93°C, when the engine has to
be stopped (the transmission oil temperature can be seen
When rotating the hydraulic motor only in one direction
in the Agroline/Proline instrument).
the return coupling can be connected to the tractor return
coupling without the shock valve. IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic motor rotating decelerates
When rotating the hydraulic motor in both directions because of the load, the load must be decreased. In this
(= connecting to both +/- ports), the separate shock situation the excess of the pump capacity runs through
valves have to be mounted to the hydraulic motor, if not the pressure relief valve, the oil gets overheated quickly
already standard in hydraulic motor and the pump may be damaged.
F 6. Attaching implements
When attaching implements to the three-point linkage
(this also applies to the drawbar) the lift/lower push-butĆ F 6.1. Using PTO shafts
tons located on the mudguards or inner switch for conĆ
necting implement in the cab must be used. When PTO-powered implements are used, always make
sure that the PTO shaft is of the correct length, so that it
DANGER: Before engaging or disengaging can work at full deflection vertically and horizontally. If the
an implement turn the draft control selector shaft is too long it will cause damage. Follow the
to the position control P position. In the instructions of the manufacturer when fitting the shaft.
sensitive positions even a small turn of the
position control knob may cause an DANGER: When fastening the PTO shaft
unexpected linkage movement. check that its shield is undamaged. Always
Always use the push-buttons situated on fasten the shield to a stationary part of the
mudguards or inner switch for connecting tractor frame or implement.
implements when engaging or disengaging
implements.
When engaging or disengaging implements
with push-buttons, always stand outside
the implement and beside the tractor. Never
stand on the implement or between the
implement and the tractor.
NOTE: After these buttons or inner switch for connecting
implements have been used the position control system
must be activated by operation of the lift/stop/lower
switch.
WARNING: When coupling or decoupling an
implement it should be supported to
prevent it from falling.
Make sure that the implement is correctly attached before

putting it to work and that the implement does not strike
against the cab when raised to the top position. When
transport driving with implements carried by the hydraulic
lift, the check links must be locked with pins.
Always follow the implement manufacturer's instructions.
Remember that correct adjustment of harrows, plough
and cultivators greatly reduces the required power.
An incorrectly adjusted plough for instance creates a badĆ
ly shaped furrow, tries to twist the tractor away from the
travelling direction, increases fuel consumption and cauĆ
ses loss of power because of wheel slip.
When attaching implements to the hydraulic lift, make
sure that at least 20 % of the tractor weight still rests on
the front wheels. When required use a sufficient number of
front ballast weights.

F 7. Ploughing
F 7.1. Recommendations when
ploughing with a fully mounted
plough A
B
A+(10-15) cm
T F23
- Keep the stabilising links free when starting. When

the plough has centralised and is running true set
A the pins (A) in the long holes in the stabilising links.
The draft control will not operate if the lower links
are fixed.
IMPORTANT: If the links remain in the fixed holes damage
may occur, any sideways force will increase draft and
C
consequently fuel consumption.
- If the tractor is equipped with automatic check links
(extra equipment), use floating position" with them
when ploughing, see instructions on page 214.
- Adjust the lowering speed to a suitable rate. Adjust the
plough according to the manufacturer's instructions.
- Choose the draft control position 3 or 4 and use the
position control knob to choose correct ploughing
depth. After this you can lift the plough to the transport
position and lower it directly to the correct ploughing
depth using the lift/stop/lower switch.
- If wheel slip increases, turn the draft control selector
D clockwise to increase sensitivity. The automatic weight
transfer to the rear wheels now increases and the tyres
get a better grip. After that turn the draft control selector
back to its original position (counter-clockwise).
NOTE: The position control knob should not be used
when increased wheel slip occurs. Only use the draft conĆ
T F22
trol selector.
A = space between rear wheels = track width rear - rear HINT: Write down the settings found to be optimal in the
wheel width table below for further use:
B = imagined pulling point Distance between pin centres
C = pulling centre of the tractor
D = side strength - in the top link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
Track width: With all plough types the most suitable - in the leveling screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm
distance between tyres when ploughing with the wheels - draft control No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on one side in the furrow is the distance between the
insides of the rear tyres which corresponds to the width of - lowering speed No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
three furrows (slices). The distance between the insides of
the front tyres should be 10-15 cm greater than that of
the rear wheels.
E.g. 16" plough:
3 x 16" (40 cm) = 48" (120 cm)
Distance between rear tyres 120-130 cm
Distance between front tyres 130-135 cm
- Attach the lifting links to the foremost holes of the lower
links in a fixed position (not to the long holes for the
floating position) by turning the locking plate horizontal.
- Adjust the lifting link almost to its shortest length. This
gains more lifting height.
- See the section on How to use the top link.

F 7.1.1. Points to note when adjusting F 7.2. When using a semi-mounted
ploughs plough
Disc coulters: Adjust the disc coulters so that they run The following exceptions from the instructions for the fully
10-15 mm (0.4-0.6 in) outside the land side of the mounted plough apply:
plough body and about 10-15 mm (0.4-0.6 in) above the - Adjust the lowering speed by turning the lowering
point of the plough, but make sure that the bearing does speed selector.
not drag on the ground. - Adjust the lifting links to same length.
Cross shaft: Adjust the cross shaft so that the bends are - Adjust the correct ploughing depth of the rear plough
vertical (the left-hand bend should be pointing upwards with the support wheel of the plough.
and the right-hand bend downwards). Adjust the width of - Fit the adjustable stops on the plough support wheel
the first furrow (slice) by moving the plough on the cross and adjust the height of the front end of the plough with
shaft. The width of the furrow (slice) should be the same the position control knob so that the plough always
as the width that the plough is designed to cut. returns to the correct ploughing depth.
A single-acting control valve is sufficient for lifting and
Support wheel: Adjust the support wheel of the plough lowering the rear end of a semi-mounted plough.
so that it presses lightly against the ground and thereby NOTE: Leave the control valve in the lowering position
prevents unwanted increase in the ploughing depth where until the rear plough has reached the correct ploughing
the soil is soft. depth and the support wheel has reached the stop device.
The upper link: The length of the upper link can be adĆ
justed with the turnbuckle. The upper link should be attacĆ
hed so that it is parallel to the ground and to the travel
F 7.3. Ploughing with a reversible
direction of the tractor. plough
The lower links: Seen from the side. The lower links
should be horizontal or the front ends slightly higher than The following exceptions from the instructions for the fully
the rear ends. mounted plough apply:
- Select a suitable slow lowering speed (turn the selector
The levelling screw: The sideways inclination of the counter-clockwise).
implement is adjusted with the levelling screws. - Adjust the lower links to exactly the same height above
For more information, see the implement manufacturers' the ground before attaching the plough, about 30 cm
manuals. under the cross shaft.
During ploughing the leveling screw must not be used
to adjust the leveling.
F 7.1.2. Examples of how to use the
upper link
Lifting height
When transport driving with, for example, long ploughs
where the surface is very uneven, the rear plough may
catch the ground. Increased lifting height is obtained by
connecting the top link as high up as possible on the
plough. If necessary, it is also possible to shorten the lifĆ
ting links.
Lifting force
Maximum lifting force at the rear end of the lower links is
obtained by connecting the top link as parallel as possible
to the lower links.
Ploughing depth
It is sometimes a problem to maintain a constant plougĆ
hing depth when the soil is hard (clay or soil mixed with
clay), it is also difficult to make the plough go down to the
desired ploughing depth. Under these circumstances it is
important that the weight transferred to the tractor is kept
as low as possible. Therefore, connect the upper link as
close to the horizontal position as possible.
If the upper link is connected horizontally, the plough
will maintain the set ploughing depth even if the
ground is hard.

F 7.4. Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary
5 3 8
4
2
T F111
Always read the plough adjusting instructions - and - On the linkage version Ds it is useful that the drive
ploughing instructions and adjust accordingly. balance control switch (8) is between drive balance and
- Set a suitable lowering speed for the implement with the slip control positions. In this case when lifting the
selector (4) (e.g. position 4). linkage to the upper position at the end of the run, the
- Choose a suitable transport height for implement with drive balance is working. In addition the automatic slip
selector (5) (e.g. position 8). control is on when the linkage is lowered down.
- Choose a suitable position with the draft control selector
(3) e.g. position 4.
- Set a suitable working depth with the position control
knob (1) (e.g. position 4 or 5). After selecting these
settings the plough can be lifted and lowered to correct
depth using the lift/stop/lower switch (2).
- If wheel slip is excessive, turn the draft control selector
(3) temporarily to a more sensitive position i.e.
clockwise. When slipping decreases turn the selector
back to the original position.
- If the lift/lower indicator lights sometimes light slightly
turn the draft control selector (3) clockwise. Check and
adjust the ploughing depth if necessary using the
position control knob (1).
- If further adjustments are required it is possible to use
the passing switch (7) as a position control. Especially
when starting ploughing at field ends by momentarily
using the passing switch, the plough will go to the right
ploughing depth quicker. In the same way when
finishing at the field ends the right ploughing depth can
be maintained at the end of ploughing.

G. Maintenance schedule
G 1. Service
Correct maintenance at the right time is essential for - Preferably carry out lubrication with bearing points and
reliable operation of the tractor. Maintenance costs are joints unloaded and with the bearings in different
small compared with repair costs resulting from lack of positions.
maintenance. The most important measures are those
which you carry out yourself which include lubrication and
various checks and adjustments.
G 1.2. Lubrication and maintenance
The service intervals shown apply for normal operating
schedule
conditions but in more severe conditions servicing should
be carried out more frequently. NOTE: All intervals are counted from zero hours on the
hour recorder. For example, the 500 hours service is
carried out after 500, 1000 hours etc. even if the measures
General instructions
G 1.1. have been carried out at the 100 hours service.
Example: The 1000 hour service contains all items
concerning oil checks and oil mentioned under the daily and the weekly checks as well
filling as the 500 hour service.
- Always stop the engine before starting work.

- Apply the parking brake to ensure the tractor cannot G 1.3. Service inspection (after 100
move. If the ground is uneven the wheels should be hours)
blocked.
- Wash down the tractor first so that the work can be
Your dealer gives a cost-free service inspection
done easily and quicker.
(excluding oil and filter costs) to all new tractors after 100
NOTE: Do not let the water get to the electrical
hours running.
equipment when washing the machine. Do not wash the
inside of the cab with a pressure washer. The service procedure is as follows:
- Always observe the utmost cleanliness in all
maintenance work. Thoroughly wipe off filler caps and
plugs as well as surrounding parts of the tractor before 20 Engine
filling up with fuel or oil. - Change engine oil and filter
- Inspect the oil and filters when changing. - Change prefilter, fuel system
Large amounts of dirt (e.g. heavily clogged filters) can - Change fuel filter
point to a fault which could cause extensive and costly
repairs if not corrected in time.
40 Power transmission
- When carrying out checks the tractor should stand on
level ground. - Change pressure filters and hydraulic return filter
- Levels should be checked in the morning when the oil is
cold and has had time to run down to the bottom of the 60 Front axle and steering system
unit concerned.
- When changing the oil, bear in mind that the oil can be - Change oil in differential
very hot when it drains from the tractor. - Change oil in hubs
- Avoid touching the exhaust manifold, turbocharger and
other hot parts of the engine. Other points
- Keep the engine surfaces clean in order to avoid the risk
of fire. - Lubricate according to chart
- The fuel, lubricating oil and coolant cause irritation to - Road test tractor. Check during the road test all the
skin if in contact for long periods. functions of the controls and instruments. After the road
- After completion of service work replace all safety test, check for oil leaks, check the coolant and fuel
covers etc. system.
- Waste oil, liquid waste, oil filters and batteries should be
handled carefully and disposed of properly.
Greasing lubricating points fitted with

grease nipples
- Always clean the grease nipples before applying the
grease gun.
- Apply grease through the nipples until clean grease
oozes out (unless otherwise instructed).
- Wipe away superfluous grease which has been pressed
out at the lubricating point.
G. Maintenance schedule -134-

G 2. Recommended fuel and lubricants
All volumes are with filters.
Volume, when
Part of machine Valtra-grade SAE-grade API-grade
changing (liter)
Engine Valtra CI-4
10W-40: -25°C...+40°C 19
- T180CR, T190CR Engine CR (ACEA E7)
Hydraulic system and 55 min
transmission max 65
Combined hydraulics Valtra HT 60: -30°C...+30°C
(extra equipment) GL-4
Transmission HT 100: -10°C...+40°C
- front tank 68
- return filters 10
Industrial front axle Valtra Axle LS
8
- differential (Limited Slip) 80W-90 GL-5
- hub reduction gears Valtra Axle 2x1.5
Front PTO (extra equipment) Shell Donax TX 22
2.2
Fuel tank 165
Diesel fuel which conforms to EN 590 norm
- Extra fuel tank 170
water + anti freeze agent (standard ASTM D3306
D3306-86a
86a or BS
Cooling system
6580:1985) 31
Brake fluid reservoir Brake fluid SAE J1703 0,3
Windscreen washer Washer fluid 11
G 2.1. Oil recommendations according to outdoor temperature

When starting the tractor in a warm garage, oil meant for warmer areas may be used.
HT 60
10W-30
15W-40 / HT100
80W-90
-30°C -20°C -10°C 0°C +10°C +20°C +30°C +40°C

T G1
ISO 15380 class HEES (synthetic esters) bio oils can be used as transmission and hydraulic oil. The oil must fulfil the
technical requirements of tractor transmission oil. The bio oil cannot be mixed with mineral oil.
-135- G. Maintenance schedule

G 2.2. Quality requirements of engine fuel
Property Requirement Test standard

Specific weight +15°C 0,82...0,84 kg/dm3 EN ISO 3675:1998, EN ISO 12185
Viscosity +40°C 2,0...4,5 mm2/s EN ISO 3104
Sulphur content max. 350 mg/kg EN ISO 14596:1998
Cetane number min. 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
Water content max. 200 mg/kg prEN ISO 12937:1996
Lubricity/ HFRR max. 460 µm ISO 12156-1
The fuel must conform to the EN 590 standard. G 2.2.3. Filter system
IMPORTANT: To mix fuel with any admixing materials is not - The engine's standard filter system gives sufficient
allowed. protection for the injection system from impurities that
can be present in well-tended distribution systems.
- The control of distributor-type injection pumps is
G 2.2.1. Fuel based on internal pressure, which will drop if the fuel
- The properties of light fuel oil that is only intended for system is clogged. If the pilot pressure drops too low,
warming use do not meet the requirements of modern engine power is reduced, smoke increased and starting
diesel engines and cannot be used as fuel. becomes more difficult. Additionally, water in the
- In particular, distributor-type injector pumps require the injection system will destroy it in a very short time. For
fuel to have sufficient lubricity, because they do not this reason, the water trap and the filters must
have oil lubrication in the same way as typical always be serviced according to the specified
multi-element pumps. Adding oil to diesel fuel is not amount of running hours.
recommended, because it causes carbon build-up, - It is also important always to use original Valtra (or Sisu
and if oil is mixed with even a small amount of water it Diesel) fuel filters. They guarantee sufficient filtration,
will clog the filter. preventing impurities from damaging the fuel system.
- Additionally, various fuel quality requirements imposed There are many cheap filter kits (so-called pirates) on
by taxation and seasonal changes have to be taken into the market, with lower quality and performance in order
consideration. to minimise the cost. Among other things, the quality
and amount of filter paper are often insufficient. There
are also often dangerous defects in the basic structure
G 2.2.2. Fuel storage that may cause expensive damage even in a short
- Storing and distributing fuel must be arranged in period of time.
conditions where no water or impurities can enter the
storage tanks. The storage tanks must be installed in a G 2.2.4. Biodiesel fuel
slanted position, so that water and impurities are
collected at the opposite end from the suction pipe of The only possible alternative fuel to use is RME
the pump. The suction pipe of the pump should not (Rapeseed Methyl Ester) Biodiesel according to European
reach the bottom of the tank. norm EN 14214 or US norm ASTM D6751. When using
- Water must be periodically drained from the tank in Biodiesel the engine capacity is almost the same as using
order to prevent problems. Refueling at the same time diesel fuel.
the tank is being refilled must be avoided without
exception. In Tier 3 SisuDiesel engines with Common Rail fuel
- When the tank is filled with winter-quality fuel in good injection system only max 5% dilution of Biodiesel (B5) is
time, the engine is guaranteed to run flawlessly during allowed.
the cold season.

G 3. Grease
Always use the following greases in Valtra tractors. Each Valtra Grease Moly, NLGI2
point requires it own type of grease.
Moly Grease
Valtra Grease, NLGI2 Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines.
Universal grease Lithium-based universal grease. Molybdenum sulphide
as an additive (1-3%) improves greasing in places
Lithium-based universal grease. Is suitable for exposed to shock loads.
greasing all heavy machines. -25° ... +130°C
-25° ... +130°C Universal grease of high quality, lithium based grease for
Universal grease of high quality, lithium based grease for vehicle use. It is recommended for greasing wheel
vehicle use. It is recommended for greasing wheel bearings, chassis water pumps, catepillar rollers etc. The
bearings, chassis water pumps, catepillar rollers etc. The grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists
grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists water and varying temperatures.
water and varying temperatures. Temperature range is -25° ... +130°C.
Temperature range is -25° ... +130°C.
Avoid repeating skin contact.
Valtra Calsium LF, NLGI2 Protect nature and take care of empty packages.
Calsium Grease LF
Is suitable for greasing all heavy machines. Long fibre
grease. Colour red. Especially good for greasing points
exposed to water.
-25° ... +80°C
Calsium LF is of long fibre, high quality and calsium based
universal grease for vehicle use. It is recommended for
greasing chassis, water pumps, pins etc.The grease is
adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists water and
varying temperatures.
Temperature range is -25° ... +80°C.
G 4. Maintenance schedule
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE-schedule (according to Observe when doing the services that if the tractor is
operator's manual) is recommended for all tractors and equipped with extra equipment like towing device, air
specially for tractors, which have more than 1000 running condition, air pressure brakes etc. the periodical
hours in one year. The periodical maintenances from 50 maintenances and checks for them must be carried out.
hours onwards can also be ordered from the authorized The extra equipment which needs servicing is given in the
workshop. In that case the periodical maintenance is end of this manual in section "K".
carried out by Valtra authorized and trained service
personnel.
YEARLY MAINTENANCE-schedule should be carried
out by an authorized workshop, but for tractors which
have under 1000 running hours in one year the operator
has to carry out the normal service routines according to
the following table (like daily and weekly periodic
maintenance).

The same numbering system as used on the detached
maintenance schedule are placed in brackets where G 4.3. Every 500 hours
applicable.
12. Grease door hinges 146
13. Change engine oil and filter (or yearly), in extremely
G 4.1. Daily dusty conditions at 250-hour 146
14. Check brake fluid level 146
See page 15. Clean cab ventilation air filter (more often if
1. Check engine oil level 141 needed) 147
2. Check coolant level, radiator fins and front grilles of 16. Check wheel nuts tightness 147
the engine cover 141 17. Check brake pedal free travel 148
3. Check for oil and fuel leaks 142 18. Change pressure filters of the transmission and
hydraulics and also auxiliary hydraulic return oil filter
or if the filter indicator lamp illuminates 148
G 4.2. Weekly 19. Check oil level in front axle differential and hubs 149
4. Grease three-point linkage 142
NOTE: When carrying out servicing you must follow
5. Grease brake mechanism (high pressure grease) 142
the service intervals, you must also do all previously
6. Grease nipples for front axle mounting 143
7. Check oil level in transmission and hydraulics 143 mentioned items. For example, when doing 500 hours
8. Check belt/belts tightness (replace belts if service you must also do the servicing required at
necessary) 143 weekly and daily.
9. Check fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl 144
10. Check electrolyte level in battery 145
11. Check tyre pressures 145
13
11 16 5 15 13 9 13 16 19 1 11 13 2
4
7
11 18 16 5 17 18 10 14 2 6 11 19 16 8 6
T G19

G 4.4. Every 1000 hours/yearly G 4.5. Every 2000 hours/every other
See page
year
20. Change oil in transmission/hydraulics and clean
32. Clean cooling system 154
suction strainer 149
33. Change brake fluid 155
21. Change oil in front axle differential and hubs 150
34. Check and clean injectors 155
22. Change cab ventilation air filter and recirculation
filter 151 NOTE: When carrying out servicing you must follow
23. Change fuel filter and prefilter 152 the service intervals, i.e., you must also do all
24. Change air filter and safety filter 152
previously mentioned items. For example, when doing
25. Grease flywheel ring gear 152
26. Check/adjust front wheel toe-in 153 2000 hours service you must also do the servicing
27. Clean fuel tank 153 required at 1000, 500 hours, weekly and daily.
28. Adjust valves 153
29. Change transmission housing breather 153
30. Accelerator pedal calibration and checking of
power shuttle operation 153
31. Tighten frame nuts and bolts 153
29 20 22 27 30 25 32 23 26 21 32
20
20
20 22 33 32 24 28 26 21
34 T G20

H. Periodic maintenance
H 1. General
Periodic maintenance for the extra and alternative
equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment.
NOTE: When the tool symbol of periodic maintenance is
illuminated in the display, the service work has to be
carried out before the tool symbol is deleted.
H 1.1. Air filters A
1
1
T H72
A low-pressure indicator with a warning lamp is

connected to the air cleaner. When the lamp (A) lights up
on the instrument panel, the filter must be cleaned. If the
warning light illuminates quickly in dusty conditions,
check the ejector pipe (1) is fitted properly.
Cleaning
2
Always stop the engine before cleaning. A blockage of the
air filter is indicated by a change of the engine beat,
smoky exhaust and reduction of engine power.
- Check the inside of the air cleaner housing and the inlet
pipe. Dirt on these parts indicates that the filter element
is defective or has not been fitted properly.
- Clean the filter element with compressed air, max.
pressure 500 kPa (5 bar = 73 lbf/in2), or with an
effective vacuum cleaner.
NOTE: The filter element must not be cleaned more than
5 times, after which it must be replaced. The filter must be
changed every 1000 hours in accordance with the
maintenance requirement:- change of the safety filter.
- Hold the filter element up against the light (or shine a
flashlight through the centre hole) and inspect the
T H71 element.
- If any holes are noticed the filter element must be
changed.
Change air filter (1): Filter fitting, see maintenance point 24 on page152.
- At least once a year
- After every 1000 hours
- After 5 cleanings, when the indicator light for the air
cleaner has illuminated 5 times
Change safety air filter (2):

- At least once a year
- After every 1000 hours
Unless it is necessary do not open the cover of the air
cleaner housing. Only associated with the situations
mentioned before. During the maintenance check, that the
cover of the housing, pipes and unions are in good
condition.
H. Periodic maintenance -140-

H 2. Maintenance daily
with new coolant.
H 2.1. Check engine oil level (1) IMPORTANT: Never use just water as a coolant.
H 2.2.2. Check also radiator grilles and

2
clean if needed
1
A
T H73
5
The oil level should come between the max. and min. 3 4
marks on the dipstick (1). Adding oil should be done
through the oil filler cap (2). Stop the engine and allow it 2
to stand for a few minutes before checking the level so 1
that all the oil has had time to run down into the sump.
For the correct oil grade, see Recommended fuel and
lubricants on page 135.
H 2.2. Check coolant level, radiator

grille and the front grille of the
engine cover (2)
T H5
2
When cleaning use air pressure, a water hose (not
pressure washer) or a soft brush (be careful not to
damage the cores). Direct the spray against the air
streaming direction. When opening the grill (A) up, the
tractor is equipped with the following coolers/radiators :
- Front PTO oil cooler (1), extra equipment
- Air conditioning cooler (2), extra equipment
- Engine intake air cooler (3)
1 - Gearbox/hydraulics oil cooler (4)
- Engine coolant radiator (5)
T H4
The expansion tank (2) has a fluid level sign (1) where the
fluid level must be when it is cold. Hot fluid level is higher.
IMPORTANT: There is a drain hole under the water pump.
It should not be blocked. If coolant drips out of the hole,
the pump seal is damaged and must be replaced. In a
new engine some leakage may be possible until the pump
settles in.
H 2.2.1. Freezing point of coolant

Check the freezing point of the coolant at the beginning of
the cold season. If the freezing point is too high, drain off
some of the coolant and top up with anti-freeze. Run the
engine for a while until the anti-freeze has been mixed in,
then re-check the freezing point of the coolant. Drain the
cooling system completely every second year and refill
-141- H. Periodic maintenance

cleaning easier when the holders (6) are turned to open
position sideward. Now the gearbox/hydraulics oil cooler
6 (4) can be turned sidewards and the engine coolant
radiator (5) cleaning is easier.
H 2.3. Check for leakage (oil,

fuel, coolant) (3)
6
Check that there are no leakages.
T H6
The air conditioning cooler (2) turns forwards to make
H 3. Maintenance weekly
H 3.1. Grease the three-point H 3.2. Grease brake cam (5)
linkage (4)
4 4 1
1
3 3 É ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
5 5 T H7
Use Valtra Grease Universal.

- 1. levelling screws (2 nipples) T H8
- 2. top link (2 nipples)
- 3. lifting cylinder lower pins (2 nipples)
- 4. lifting cylinder upper pins (2 nipples) One nipple on both sides.
- 5. hydraulic trailer hitch (extra equipment), 2 nipples Grease sliding surfaces in the brake mechanism also,
shown by the arrows.
Use Valtra Calsium LF grease when greasing.

H 3.3. Grease nipples for front axle Adjusting the air conditioning
H 3.5.1.
mounting (6) compressor belt (extra equipment)
1
A
10 mm
A
T H66
T H58
Use Valtra Grease Universal. The adjustment is done by turning the compressor (1) in
Mounting: One nipple on both bearings. its fasteners. All the three attaching bolts (A) have to be
slackened when doing the adjustment. The belt tension is
suitable with a deflection of approx. 10 mm.
Check oil level in power
H 3.4.
transmission/hydraulic system (7) Adjusting the pressure air
H 3.5.2.
compressor belt (extra equipment)
10 mm
E
T H11
10 mm
Steering, transmission and hydraulics have the same oil.
The oil level should be between the min. and extra max.
lines on the dipstick. Top-up if necessary, filling
instructions on page 150. For the correct oil grade, see
Recommended fuel and lubricants on page 135.
Occasionally empty the leakage oil reservoir for the D
quick-action couplings. 10 mm M H6
H 3.5. Check belt/belts tensions (8) The pressure air compressor belt tension is adjusted with
the adjustment belt pulley (D) by slackening the belt
The fan/generator belt has an automatic belt tensioner. pulley nut (E). The belt tension is suitable with a deflection
of approx. 10 mm.
When checking belt tension, ensure that the belt is in
good condition. A slack, worn and/or oily belt can cause
problems with battery charging and the cooling system.
Always keep a spare fan belt handy.

H 3.5.3. Changing the belts H 3.6. Check fuel system prefilter
and sediment bowl (9)
1
M H7
2
When changing the belt/belts loosen the Visco- fan (1) 1 T H74
from the belt pulley by unscrewing the nut (2).
IMPORTANT: The nut is left hand thread. Drain the fuel prefilter into a container, NOT ON THE
GROUND, by opening the tap a little (1) at the bottom of
the prefilter.
Close the tap (1) when the filter is empty.
When needed, drain water also from the fuel filters by
opening the tap (2) below it.
If necessary bleed the fuel system, see instructions on
page 156.
Drain the water traps more often if reguired.
4
M H8
When changing the multi-grooved fan belt loosen the

belt by turning the automatic belt tensioner (4) with a 1/2"
wrench (3).The belt can be changed without detaching
the fan.

WARNING: Be careful with the battery
H 3.7. Check electrolyte level in solution - it is corrosive!
battery (10)
Also check cables and battery terminals and clean them if
3 necessary.
After service fasten the covers and the steps.
1
H 3.8. Check tyre pressures (11)
2
NOTE: Check the tyre pressures regularly (values are
4 listed in Technical Specifications on page 169).
DANGER: Avoid over inflation as excess
pressure may cause the tyre to explode.
It is recommended that the changing of tyres and wheels

T H16 is carried out in a professional tyre workshop which is
equiped to handle this type of work.
In the forest equipment version (extra equipment) the DANGER: When welding the discs the tyre
battery locates behind the engine. must be away from the rim/ disc, DANGER
- Open the locking (1) for the steps and set them under OF EXPLOSION!
the tractor.
- Open the latch (2) and move the toolbox (3) from its When mounting the tyre on the disc the pressure limit is
place. 250 kPa. If the tyre does not go on the disc properly,
- Open the latch (4) and turn the battery casing to open remove it and refit. When the tyre is positioned correctly
position. on the disc, inflate to correct pressure.
- If necessary remove the cowl panel on the battery upper
right end (under the toolbox bottom).
T H17
- The battery electrolyte level should be on the level

marked on the battery. If the battery has not that mark
check that the electrolyte level is approx. 5-10 mm
(0.2-0.4 in) above the cell plates in the battery.
- Top up with distilled water if required.
- Under no circumstances should you attempt to
replenish the battery acid yourself.
- Never use a naked flame to check the level of the
electrolyte.
NOTE: If the water in the battery evaporates too quickly, it
may be a sign that the charging voltage is too high. Keep
the battery clean and dry on the outside. Protect the pole
studs and the cable terminals with grease.
IMPORTANT: During the cold season it is important that
the engine is allowed to run for a while after topping up
with distilled water, otherwise the water may freeze before
it has had time to mix with the battery acid.

H 4. Maintenance every 500 hours
H 4.1. Grease door hinges (12) H 4.2.2. Changing oil filter
There are nipples on door hinges. Use Valtra Universal
Grease.
H 4.2. Change engine oil and

filter (13)
2
1
In extremely dusty conditions, the oil and filters should be
changed every 250 hours.
3
If the amount of operating hours is low, the oil and filters
T H76
should be changed at least once per year.
- Unscrew the filter (1).
- Wipe off any oil which has run out onto the chassis.
H 4.2.1. Oil changing - Lubricate the new gasket and tighten the new filter by
hand (not too tight).
Fill with the recommended oil through the filler hole (2) to
the prescribed level, the upper mark on the dipstick (3).
For the correct oil grade, see "Recommended fuel and
lubricants" on page 135.
H 4.2.3. Oil capacity

For the correct oil grade, see Recommended fuel and
To the upper mark of the dipstick including filter:
- T180CR, T190CR: 19,0 l
NOTE: After changing the oil and the filter run the engine
and check for possible leaks. Then start the engine in the
usual way. Run the engine for a while and check the oil
level.
H 4.2.4. Breatherpipe
Check, that the breather is not blocked.
H 4.3. Check brake fluid level (14)
T H75
Drain the oil when the engine is warm, by removing the

plug from the engine sump, with the tractor standing on
level ground.
Clean, refit and tighten the drain plug.
T H77
The fluid level should be between the max. and min.

marks. Top up with new fluid if necessary, see
recommended fuel and lubricants on page 135.

WARNING: Normally there will be no need
2
to top up the fluid. If leakage has occurred,
it must be repaired immediately, before
driving. If necessary, contact the authorized
Valtra-workshop.
The brake fluid level should be checked frequently. Use
1
recommended fluid only.
WARNING: Brake fluid is corrosive and
poisonous and must be handled carefully at
all times (it also corrodes the paint). 4
3
H 4.4. Clean cab ventilation air
filter (15)
T H21
- Open the latch (1) and move the toolbox (2) from its
place.
- Remove the cowl panel (3) under the toolbox.
- The common reservoir cap can be found in the right
rear corner of the housing (4).
During the cold season you must use an anti-freeze
agent in the fluid.
T H79
H 4.5. Check wheel nuts

tightness (16)
CAUTION: Regularly check the tightness of
the wheel nuts also the wheel disc/rim bolts
(values are listed in Technical
Specifications on page 168).
T H78
Do the cleaning more often if needed.

Open the filter housing cover from the upper LH corner of
the cabin roof and remove the filter. Knock the filter
element against the palm of your hand, clean it with the
vacuum cleaner from the outside in or blow it clean with
compressed air from the center outwards. Make sure that
the air pressure is not too high. Check the condition of the
filter. A damaged filter must be changed.
WARNING: The air filter element does not
remove chemicals from the outside air.
Also check the windscreen washer fluid level in the

reservoir (common for both the front and rear
windscreens). Fill with fluid if necessary, see the filling
table on page 135.
In the forest equipment version (extra equipment) the
bigger reservoir is directly fastened to the steps.

H 4.6. Check brake pedal free Change pressure filters
H 4.7.
travel (17) (power transmission and
hydraulic system) and return oil
filter of auxiliary hydraulic (18)
T H24
The free travel should be 70-80 mm (2,2-2.6 in) with the

pedals latched together. Adjust the free travel if necessary
(see Checks and Adjustments on page 161.
Parking brake adjusting instructions can be found under
Checks and Adjustments on page 162. B
C
A
T H25
NOTE: Change pressure filters (A and B) and return oil

filter (C). The filters are similar.
If the lamp indicating a blocked filter (D) is illuminated
(common indicator light for all three filters) when the oil
has been warmed, then change all three filters.
If the indicator lamp illuminates when using auxiliary
hydraulics it is probable that the auxiliary hydraulic return
filter is blocked. This can be checked by disconnecting
the pressure sensor wires and running the engine. If the
indicator lamp does not light now, the fault is in the return
filter. Then only the return filter need be changed.
- Fit a suitable container under the filter and clean the
filter housing and the surrounding area. Remove the
filter housing and filter element.
- Wash the filter housing in diesel fuel and fit a new
element (lubricate new seal). Do not use the old seal.
- Refit the filter housing and tighten with a suitable
wrench to a torque of about 200 Nm.
IMPORTANT: Always change the pressure filters (A and
B) if repairs have been carried out due to impurities in the
hydraulic system.
If one or the other of the pressure filters illuminates,
indicator lamp (D), both filters have to be changed.
If the tractor is equipped with combined hydraulics (extra
equipment), change also system return oil filter/filters, see
maintenance point 4.2. on page 219.

H 4.8. Check oil levels in front axle H 4.8.2. Hubs
differential and hubs (19)
H 4.8.1. Differential
T H28
T H64
Turn the wheel until the oil surface indicator line is
horizontal. The oil surface should be level with the hole.
The oil should be level with the inspection hole. Add more Add more oil if necessary (recommended oil and
oil if necessary. lubricants on page 135).
H 5. Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly

Clean and refit the plugs.
Change oil in power
H 5.1.
transmission/hydraulics system H 5.1.2. Cleaning suction strainer
and clean the suction
strainer (20)
H 5.1.1. Draining
2 1 2 2
T H29
Run the tractor until the gearbox and hydraulic lift are 1
T H60
warm as this will speed up the oil drainage and most of
the impurities will come out with the oil. Lower the
hydraulic lift. 1. Remove the cover (1) and the suction strainer (2).
2. Wipe off any oil which has run out on to the chassis.
Remove the drain plugs under the gearbox (1) and brake 3. Clean the insert in diesel fuel and dry it with comĆ
housings (2) and drain the oil into a suitable container. pressed air. Change the insert if damaged.
4. Refit the suction strainer (2) and the cover (1).
IMPORTANT: In conditions where the hydraulic system
becomes dirty quickly, the suction strainer has to be

cleaned more frequently. If the operating sound of the
pump changes to a shrieking noise, the engine must be Change oil in front axle
H 5.2.
stopped, the suction strainer cleaned and the oil checked differential and hubs (21)
to ensure that its viscosity corresponds to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
H 5.2.1. Differential oil
H 5.1.3. Filling
1
1
2
T H65
2 Unscrew the drain plug (1). Clean the plug and refit it. Fill
with new oil up to the level of the inspection hole (2).
T H31
Oil capacity 8 liters
For the correct oil grade see "Recommended fuel and See Recommended fuel and lubricants on page 135.
lubricants" on page 135.
When changing oil it is recommended to refill by pump H 5.2.2. Hub reduction gear oil
through the hydraulic return coupling (3), then the oil goes
through the return filter. When filling the oil through the
filler cap (1), care must be taken with cleanliness.
The oil level should reach the min mark on the
dipstick (2); this is equivalent to 55 liters. Then there is
capacity of oil with 30 liters for the auxiliary hydraulics.
The normal oil level is between min and max mark.
If more oil is needed for the auxiliary hydraulics, fill up to
the max. mark on the dipstick. This is equivalent to
65 liters of oil; with 40 liters for the auxiliary hydraulics.
As well the brake cooling improves with the larger amount
of oil.
After filling the system, start the engine and check the oil
level.
If the tractor is equipped with combined hydraulics, 68
litres for the front pump and 10 litres for it`s return oil
filters must be added to the above mentioned volumes. Oil
filling, see maintenance point 4.3.2. on page 219.
T H28
IMPORTANT: When attaching implements to the auxiliary
hydraulics. Note if there is dirty oil in the implement it will
contaminate the clean oil in the tractor. Implements also Unscrew the plug and drain the oil. Turn the wheel until
require oil changes from time to time. the line of the inspection hole is horizontal and fill up with
oil to the level of the hole.
IMPORTANT: After driving for a short while check through
the filler hole that the oil does not foam. Foaming is a Oil capacity 2 x 1.5 liters
symptom of a leaking cover gasket. If the oil foams, For the correct oil grade see Recommended fuel and
tighten down the cover or change the seal. lubricants on page 135.

H 5.3. Change cab ventilation air filter H 5.4. Change fuel filter and
and recirculation filter (22) prefilter (23)
H 5.3.1. Change cab ventilation air Change fuel filter

filter
T H78
Open the filter housing cover from the cab roof upper LH
corner and replace the filter with a new one.
Change filter more often if necessary. T H80
H 5.3.2. Change recirculation filter IMPORTANT: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a
filter wrench.
- Open the locking ring (1) and remove the filter
2 element (2).
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
- Install a new filter element. NOTE: the filter fits in one
1 position only.
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until you hear a
clicking sound.
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
Change prefilter
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ 3
1 8
4
T H35
Remove the recirculation control knob (1) and grille (2)

and extract the filter (3). Change the new filter. It may be 7
necessary to change the filter more frequently. 5 T H81
IMPORTANT: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a

filter wrench.

- Slightly open the drain cock (5) at the lower part of the filter so that no dirt enters the induction pipe.
prefilter (4) and drain the fuel into a container, NOT ON - Take out the main filter
THE GROUND. - Remove the safety filter
- If the bleeder-screw is opened (6) in the prefilter's
mounting frame, the fuel drains more easily. After
draining has been completed, close the bleeder-screw.
- Unfasten the water trap (7) from the prefilter.
- Open the locking ring (8) and remove the filter 3
element (4).
- Install a new filter element. NOTE: The filter fits in one
position only. 2
- Screw the locking ring CLOSED (ON) until a clicking
sound is heard.
- Fasten the water trap to the lower part of the prefilter. 4
IMPORTANT: Change the prefilter more often if
necessary.
If necessary bleed the fuel system, see instructions on 1
page 156. T H82
H 5.5. Change air filter and safety Filter fitting

filter (24) - check that seals are in good condition
- check that the sealing surfaces are clean
- fit the safety filter and make sure that it is correctly
1 positioned in the housing. Tighten the nut (1) to hold it
in place.
- fit the main filter and make sure that it is correctly
positioned in the housing. Tighten the fastener (2) of the
filter until the filter comes into contact with the end of
filter housing.
Do not over tighten the nut (3) on the air cleaner housing
(approx 1-1,5 turns after the flange seal has come into
contact with the surface of the housing). The cover of the
housing must be mounted so that the ejector pipe (4) is in
the lower position.
H 5.6. Grease flywheel ring

gear (25)
2
T H83
T H71
On the left-hand side of the clutch housing there is a hole
The main air filter (1) has to be changed no later than (remove the shield plug) through which the ring gear can
1000 hours together with the safety filter (2) if it has not be greased. Apply a little grease (one stroke with a grease
been cleaned 5 times previously and changed earlier. The gun) at a few points on the ring gear. With use the grease
safety filter protects the engine if the main filter should will spread round the gear. Use Valtra Grease Moly.
become damaged. The safety filter must not be cleaned, it
should always be replaced.
IMPORTANT: Never run the tractor without the safety filter.
Take the greatest possible care when removing the safety

clearance of 0.35 mm (0.014 in). The valve clearance can
H 5.7. Check and adjust front wheel be adjusted when the engine is either warm or cold.
toe-in (26) Checking and adjustment should be carried out by an
authorized workshop.
See "Checks and Adjustments" on page 162.
Change transmission
H 5.10.
H 5.8. Clean fuel tank (27) housing breather (29)
T H41
Always clean the fuel tank at the start of the winter T H43
season. This avoids problems with condensation in the
fuel tank. Always make sure that the tank is as full as
possible, so that condensation is prevented. If the tractor is used continuously in dusty conditions, the
breather should be changed more frequently.
- Empty the tank and rinse it with clean diesel fuel. Fit the
drain plug. Unscrew the old breather. Lubricate the seal on the new
- Fill with new fuel. Use a fine metal gauze when filling the breather and tighten it by hand.
tank.
IMPORTANT: Never use methylated spirit as an
anti-freeze in the fuel. It may cause clogging of the fuel
Accelerator pedal calibration
H 5.11.
filter and impairs the lubricating ability of the fuel. and checking of power shuttle
operation (30)
H 5.9. Check and adjust valve
clearance (28) Accelerator pedal calibration and checking of power
shuttle operation has to be done after 1000 operating
hours. Contact an authorized workshop.
H 5.12. Tighten frame nuts and

bolts (31)
T H42
Both inlet and exhaust valves should have a valve

H 6. Maintenance every 2000 hours (or every other year)
H 6.1. Clean cooling system (32)
If problems occur with the function of the cooling system
this could be a sign that the whole system needs to be
thoroughly cleaned as follows:
Clean the cooling system using a special cleaning agent
available from your dealer. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
4
H 6.1.1. Draining coolant
Always stop the engine before draining coolant.
T H84
- Open the drain cock (4) on the cylinder block.

- On models with an oil cooler also open the drain plug
A on the oil cooler. The cooler locates between the engine
block and the oil filter.
- Turn the heater control in the cab clockwise.
H 6.1.2. Filling
Mix the antifreeze and water according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
3
Before filling, close:
T H55
- The radiator drain cock (3)
- The drain cock (4) of the cylinder group
- The drain plug of the oil cooler
- Open the cap (1) of the expansion tank. Open the
expansion tank cap carefully. When running the Before filling up the radiator check that the restrictor (A),
tractor the expansion tank has overpressure (1.0 placed in the union going to the engine block, is open.
bar).
- Connect a hose from the radiator's draining cock (3) to
a clean container and open the cock.

- the fluid brakes of the trailer, see the bleeding instructiĆ
ons on page 194.
- the air pressure brakes, see the bleeding instructions on
page 193.
WARNING: Brake fluid is corrosive and
poisonous and must be handled carefully at
all times.
The correct amount of brake fluid is 0.3 liter.

6
H 6.3. Check injectors of fuel bleeding
system (34)
The correct running of the engine requires that the
T H47
injectors are in good working condition. Checking and
cleaning should be carried out by an authorized Valtra
workshop with the Valtra-test instrument.
- Fill the system to the expansion tank fluid level mark (6).
CAUTION: If the finger guards are removed
make sure you re-fit them.
H 6.1.3. Coolant volume

- T180CR, T190CR: 31 l
Ensure that a recommended coolant is always used.
IMPORTANT: Never fill up with cold fluid while the engine
is warm. Do not use plain water as a coolant.
After changing the fluid run the engine for a time and
check the level of fluid.
H 6.2. Change brake fluid (33)
T H86
It is recommended that the brake fluid be changed every

second year or after 2000 hours of operation.
- Empty the brake fluid reservoir, open the bleed nipples.
It is better to place hoses from the nipples into a
container, as the fluid corrodes the paint. Pump the
brake pedal until all brake fluid in the pipes and
cylinders has run out.
- Fill the brake system with new brake fluid.
- Bleed the brake system of air (see Checks and
Adjustments on page 162).
If the tractor is equipped with the trailer brake valve and/or
air pressure brakes as extra equipment, open also their
bleed nipples to drain the hoses. The brakes must also be
bleeded from the nipples in question:

I. Checks and adjustments
Check and adjustment instructions for the extra and
alternative equipment are in section K, after each extra
equipment.
I 1. Engine
I 1.1. Bleeding fuel system I 1.2. Air filter
Low pressure circuit 1

The fuel system bleeds air automatically due to the
electric feed pump. If the engine is not restarted, air is
bled from the fuel system by holding the ignition switch in
position 1 when the feed pump is rotating for one minute
at a time. If the engine fails to start, move the ignition
switch back to the STOP position, bleed again in the
position 1 and start the engine.
High pressure circuit

In Common Rail engines let the pump run for 30 seconds
and the start for 10 seconds in turn (the high pressure
circuit bleeds only when the high pressure pump is
rotating).
WARNING: The fuel system connectors are 2
not allowed to be opened when the engine
is running and not in 30 seconds after
switching off the engine. The pressure in
injection type of engines (CR models) is
over 1000 bar. If the jet of the high pressure
fuel contacts your skin, the fuel penetrates
the skin causing serious injuries. Contact
your doctor immediately .
Only an authorized person is allowed to
repair the fuel system.
T I39
The air cleaner prevents dust and other particles from

entering the engine with the induction air. Engine wear is
largely dependent on the cleanliness of the induction air,
so it is very important to check the air cleaner regularly
and to maintain it correctly.
IMPORTANT: The safety filter (2) inside the main filter (1)
must not be cleaned but must always be changed
according to the maintenance schedule. The purpose of
the safety filter is to prevent damage to the engine if the
main filter should fail.
I. Checks and adjustments -156-

I 1.2.1. Maintenance of main filter I 1.3. Maintenance-cooling system
T I5
T I3 The following action should be taken to make sure that

the cooling system functions correctly:
The air filter must not be cleaned more than five times, - Check the coolant level (see maintenance point 2 on
after which it must be replaced. Check when cleaning that page 141).
the filter and its seals are undamaged. A damaged filter - Check the fan belt (belts) tensions (see maintenance
must always be changed. point 8 on page 143).
- Clean the radiator honeycomb externally using
IMPORTANT: Never clean or remove the air filter unless it compressed air or by flushing with water.
is absolutely necessary. When removing the air filter there
is always the possibility that dirt may enter the induction
system of the engine. I 1.3.1. Coolant
The cooling system is filled with a mixture of water and
Cleaning of the main filter anti-freeze agent on delivery. The anti-freeze agent also
Use clean and dry compressed air with a max. pressure of prevents rust from forming in the cooling system.
500 kPa (5 bar = 72.5 lbf/in2). However, the anti-rust properties of the agent diminish
with time, so it is important to change the coolant at
regular intervals. A suitable mixture is one part anti-freeze
agent to one part water, but the manufacturer's directions
should always be followed (see maintenance point 32).
T I4
1. First, direct the air flow against the inside of the filter
along the folds. Do not hold the filter along the folds.
Do not hold the nozzle closer than 3-5 cm (1.2 - 2.0
in).
2. Then, direct the air flow against the outside of the filter
along the folds and after that, against the inside of the
filter again.
3. Check the filter and its sealing surfaces using a
flashlight. Change the filter if any holes or other defects
are discovered.
IMPORTANT: See maintenance on page 140.
-157- I. Checks and adjustments

I 2. Electrical system
- Remove the battery caps during charging to prevent the
I 2.1. Battery checks and build up of explosive gases in the battery.
maintenance Do not connect any additional electrical equipment, as
this may damage components of the existing electrical
system.
I 2.3.1. Welding
IMPORTANT: The battery leads (negative first), the
alternator wiring and the engine management multipole
connectors (3 pcs) have to be disconnected before arc
welding is carried out on the tractor or an implement
which is attached to it.
1
T I6
- Check the charge in the battery using a hydrometer

("acid tester"). The density of the electrolyte should be
at least 1,23.
- Make sure that the fan belt (belts) are always correctly
tensioned.
- Keep the battery clean. It can be washed with lukewarm
water after removal from the tractor (always disconnect
the negative lead first). 2
- Also clean the pole studs, the cable terminals and the 3
battery retainer thoroughly. Wash off oxidized spots with
water. Wipe the outside of the battery when it is clean,
and coat the pole studs and the cable terminals with
petroleum jelly.
- Refit the battery (always connect the positive lead first).
DANGER: Avoid sparking or naked flames

near the battery. The battery gives off
explosive hydrogen gas!
Battery electrolyte is corrosive. T I40
- The engine control unit (1) is placed in the left side of

I 2.2. Alternator the engine. The cover of the connectors must first be
disconnected. The demountable connectors are three.
The tractor has a negative-grounded alternator which
All the connectors (2) will be dis- and reconnected in the
can easily be damaged if incorrect connections are made
same way. Turn the connector locking device (3) upwards
in the electrical system. For example, connection of the
to disconnect the connector, then the connector opens.
battery with wrong polarity can burn out the alternator or
When re - connecting turn the locking device back to the
rectifier. The electrical charging circuit must not be broken
locking position.
when the engine is running.
I 2.3. Safety precautions for the

electrical system
- Always connect the battery with the correct polarity.
- Disconnect the negative lead of the battery first and
connect it last.
-Never open the charging circuit while the engine is
running.
- Disconnect the negative battery lead before removing
the alternator.

I 2.4. Fuses
T I53
The fuse box, which is positioned under the instrument F18 5A INSTRUMENTS, WARNING LIGHTS,
panel, should always be kept clean. It contains 30 fuses. AUTOCONTROL
The nominal current rating of the fuses is between F19 10A WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER, HORN,
5-25 A. If any of the fuses blow, the fault must be traced F20 10A REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER, RADIO,
and remedied. Fuses must not be replaced with ones of (TRAILER HITCH LIGHT)
a higher rating, as this may cause damage to the F21 15A AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL, FLOOR FAN,
electrical equipment. The fuse diagram is placed under FUEL FEED PUMP 4)
the fuse box (it is shown in the figure above). There is F22 10A 4WD, PTO, POWER SHIFT, (FRONT
space for reserve fuses between the fuses. SUSPENSION)1)
F22 10A SENSORS HITECH, 4WD, (FRONT
When a continuous electrical supply is needed the cab
SUSPENSION)2)
has two connections for power output (see pages 85
F23 10A REAR WORKING LIGHTS, OUTER
and 86). In addition power can be taken from the trailer
F24 10A RESERVE1)
connection (see page 104).
F24 10A AC-5, SEAT DIRECTION2)
Power for optional equipment can also be taken from the F25 15A AIR SUSPENSION SEAT/SEAT HEATING, REAR
spare fuses or unused optional equipment fuses. A STEERING PREVENTION, ELECTRICAL FRONT
continuous current source can be connected from the LOADER VALVES
main current pole of the starter motor (on the models with F26 10A BACK BUZZER, (SIGMA), HISHIFT
main circuit breaker, current is switched off with main F27 10A BRAKING LIGHTS, DIFFERENTIAL LOCK,
switch) through the new fuse. EXHAUST BRAKE
F28 10A RESERVE
F29 10A CIGARETTE LIGHTER, 2-PIN CURRENT
I 2.4.1. Fuse list SOCKET
F30 10A 1A IF HF*
F1 15A HAZARD BLINKERS, WATER PUMP F31 30A CR-CONTROL UNIT SUPPLY
F2 5A RADIO, INSTRUMENTATION, TELEPHONE,
ELECTRIC MAIN SWITCH, TACHOGRAPH *IF HANDS FREE IS FITTED
F3 15A HIGH BEAM 1) 6000 Series, Nc, 2)HiTech, Nh, 3)Engine
F4 15A LOW BEAM control, Bosch VE,4) Common Rail engine
F5 10A PARKING LIGHTS, LEFT
F6 10A PARKING LIGHTS, RIGHT
F7 25A FRONT WORKING LIGHTS I 2.4.1.1. Relays
F8 25A LIGHT SWITCH
K1 RELAY, FRONT WORKING LIGHTS
F9 15A TRAILER SOCKET/FOG LIGHT, REAR,
K2 RELAY, REAR WORKING LIGHTS
ELECTRIC MAIN SWITCH
K3 RELAY, FOG LIGHT, REAR
F10 25A 3-PIN CURRENT SOCKET
K4 RELAY, STARTER SWITCH
F11 5A AUTOCONTROL (+BAT), BUZZER1)
K5 RELAY, STARTER SWITCH
F12 10A ROT. WARNING LIGHT, CABIN LIGHT
K6 RELAY, FAN/AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
F13 10A RESERVE
K7 RELAY, 4-WHEEL BRAKING
F14 15A STARTER SWITCH
F14 15A PREHEATING OF ENGINE INDUCTION AIR;
FUEL PUMP3)
F15 25A FAN, AIR CONDITIONING
F16 10A REAR WORKING LIGHTS, INNER
F17 10A DIRECTION INDICATORS, FIELDMASTER, ISO
ADAPTER

I 2.4.2. Electric preheating of engine
induction air
T I41
F52 250A FUSE FOR ELECTRIC PREHEATING OF

ENGINE INDUCTION AIR
I 2.4.3. Electric power center A4 in engine bulkhead
M I12
The electric power center is at the rear end of the engine,

including the following fuses:
F 1 10A FUEL FEED PUMP
F 2 10A PILOT RELAY FOR ELECTRIC PREHEATING OF
ENGINE INDUCTION AIR
F 3 10A EEM-CONTROLLER SUPPLY
F 4 25A VP-PUMP SUPPLY

I 2.5. Headlight adjustment
Correct adjustment of the headlights is very important B = Distance between headlight centers
when running on the public road. H = Height of headlights above ground minus 50 mm (2
in)
Headlight adjustment can be carried out quickly and
accurately by using an optical headlight adjusting unit. If If tractor has up lifted full/dipped beam headlights (on the top
no optical instrument is available, adjustment can be done part of the cab), the lights have to be adjusted so that the
as follows: light pattern shines on the mark at a distance of 30 m on even
ground.
Check before adjusting the headlight that the tractor Lights which can be mounted under the lower part of the
loading is normal and tyre pressures are correct. With front frame can not be used on general roads.
dipped-beam switched on, the cutoff edge of the light
pattern should come at height H when the tractor is at
distance L. With full-beam switched on, the distance
between the light points should be B. Any necessary
adjustment is done using the headlamp adjusting screws.
T I9
Measurements: L = 5 m
I 3. Brake system
I 3.1. Adjusting travel of brake pedals
1-2 mm
2A
1
1
3 3
É ÉÉ
É ÉÉÉÉ
T I10
The pedal free travel should be 70-80 mm with the - Fit blocks in front of the front wheels to prevent the
pedals latched together. It can be checked as follows: tractor from moving

- Raise the rear wheels off the ground so that they can be
turned by hand. I 3.3. Bleeding brake system of air
- Tighten the adjusting nut (1) until the wheels cannot be
turned by hand any further. NOTE: Check that the brake fluid reservoir is full before
- Slacken the adjusting screw 1.5-2 turns and check that starting to bleed the system.
the wheel can rotate freely.
- Check that the brake action is the same on both wheels Bleed the brake system in the following way
while driving with the pedals latched together. (the brake pedals should not be latched
Check the pedal free travel. together):
- Depress one of the brake pedals and at the same time
I 3.2. Adjusting parking brake open the bleed nipple on the brake which is being
actuated by the pedal. Before depressing the brake
The parking brake is controlled with a spring return pedal and opening the bleeding nipple, pump several
pressure cylinder and it is connected to the foot brake times on the pedal in order to build up pressure in the
mechanism by a cable. 0 system.
The parking brake is adjusted in the factory and - Depress the brake pedal fully and close the nipple and
slowly let the brake pedal up again.
re-adjustment is not necessary unless parts of brake
- Repeat the pumping action with the brake pedal until
mechanism have been changed (the parking brake is
the brake fluid which runs out at the bleeding nipple is
affected when the foot brakes are adjusted).
completely free of air.
IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before - The procedure for bleeding the brake is the same on
adjusting the parking brake. both sides.
- Check the brake fluid amount in the reservoir after
When adjusting, the parking brake has to be off. The
bleeding and top it if required.
tractor engine must be running, shuttle - speed gear -
and range levers have to be in neutral position, fit blocks If the tractor is equipped with the trailer brake valve and /
in front of the front wheels to prevent the tractor from or air pressure brakes as extra equipment, they must be
moving. Pull the cable clearance to the end of the cable bled also:
(to direction of arrow A). Open the locking nut (2) and - the fluid brakes of the trailer, see bleeding instructions
adjust through the adjusting nut (2A) the tolerance is on page 194
1-2 mm. Tighten the locking nut. - the air pressure brakes, see the bleeding instructions on
page 193.
IMPORTANT: When mounting the parking brake cable,
the cylinder side end has to be mounted according to the
tolerances, this should only be carried out by an
authorized workshop.
NOTE: Adjustment of the brakes for the reverse drive
tractor is on the page 197.
I 4. Steering system
joints of the steering arms and the tie rod. The wheels
I 4.1.Checking and adjusting must be centred during adjustment.
toe-in of front wheels
I 4.1.1. Checking
A
Make a vertical mark on both front tyres in the middle of
the tread level with the hubs. Measure the distance
between the marks. Roll the tractor forwards so that the
marks again come level with the hub, this time at the rear
edge.
Measure the distance between the marks again. The
measurement should be 0-2 mm larger at the rear edge
on 4WD axles.
A+0-2 mm
T I11
Before adjustment, check that there is no play in the ball

I 4.1.2. Adjusting toe-in 4WD axle I 4.2. Steering angle adjustment,
4WD
1 2
2
1
T I13
T I12
IMPORTANT: When altering the track width or when fitting

In order not to limit steering movement, both tie rods must a front loader, always make sure that the front wheels
be adjusted (both tie rods must be of the same length have free movement to full lock in both directions and that
after the adjustment). the front axle and the wheels can turn fully. If necessary
Loosen the tie rod locking nut (1) and turn the adjustment adjust the steering lock stop screws on the powered front
screw (2) in the desired direction. axle.
Perform the measurement described above and tighten
To carry out the adjustment slacken the locking nuts (1)
the locking nut or the tightening link (1) once the correct
and adjust the adjusting screws (2). After adjusting tighten
distance has been achieved.
the locking nuts.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the adjusting screws of both sides to
the same length, so that the turning angle is same on both
sides.

I 5. Adjusting track width
When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the cab to the tyres does not go below 80 mm. Check
the turning angles have to be checked/adjusted with that the distance from parking lights to the outer sides
max turning angle of the front axle on both sides. of the tyres does not exceed 400 mm.
Check also when using chains that the distance from
I 5.1. Adjusting track width, 4WD industrial front axle
540/65R28
420/70R28
420/85R28
16.9R28
480/70R28
480/65R28
540/65R28
520/60R28
600/65R28
460/85R30
480/70R30
540/65R30 2228 2130 2026 1928 1830 1732 1626 1530
2255 2210 1940 1900 1855 1810 1545 1500

230/95R36
T I54
The standard track widths are underlined. - Lubricate the wheel nuts and tighten them to the
recommended values. Wheel nuts must be retightened
Adjusting front and rear wheel track widths is done in the
periodically (see technical specifications on page 168).
same way.
- When adjusting track widths or changing tyres the
Track width can be adjusted by changing the position of turning angles must be checked/adjusted to give
the wheel rim in relation to the central disc or by moving maximum turning angles on both sides of the axle.
the wheels to the other side. Different track widths (also fixed discs) are indicated in
- Block the front wheels (or rear wheels) to prevent the "Specifications" on page 170.
tractor from moving.
IMPORTANT: Maximum track width must not be used with
- Raise the rear wheels (or front wheels) off the ground
big front loaders.
and position sturdy axle stands under the axle housing.
- Make sure that the arrows on the upper part of the tyres
are pointing forwards.

I 5.2. Adjusting track width, rear axle
20.8R38, 520/70R38, 520/85R38

2012 1910 1808 1714
480/80R42
580/70R38, 600/65R38, 1910 1808
650/60R38, 650/65R38
650/75R38, 620/70R42 1811
650/65R42, 710/70R38
20.8R42, 520/85R42 1808 1714
270/95R48 2022 2000 1922 1900 1622 1600 1522 1500
T I55
The standard track widths are underlined. Wheel nuts

(both front and rear) must be retightened periodically.
I 6. If the tractor is not used

- Stop the engine, unscrew the injectors and pour 0,1 liter
I 6.1. Storing the tractor of preserving oil into each cylinder.
- Crank the engine a few rews. Refit the injectors with
new gaskets.
For a period shorter than two months - Remove the battery, clean it and store it in a cool dry
place where there is an even temperature. Charge the
No special measures are required provided that: battery every 2nd month.
- The tractor has been regularly maintained - Slacken the fan belt
- The tractor is clean and has been washed - Protect exposed parts against corrosion by applying
- The coolant contains enough anti-corrosion liquid anti-corrosion oil.
- The fuel tank is full - Cover the air induction pipe to the air cleaner and the
- The battery is kept in a suitable place exhaust pipe with a plastic bag or similar.
- The air conditioning is operated for a few minutes at - Operate the air conditioning for a few minutes at least
least once a month once a month
For a period longer than two months I 6.2. Removing the tractor from
- Clean, wash and lubricate the tractor storage
- Clean the fuel tank
- Fill the fuel tank with fuel
- Change the prefilter in fuel system After a period shorter than two
- Change the fuel filter and bleed the fuel system of air months
- Clean the air cleaner
- Change engine oil and oil filter - Fit the battery (fully charged)
- Make sure that the coolant contains enough - Check the oil level in the engine and transmission, the
anti-corrosion liquid and check the charge in the coolant level in the radiator, the electrolyte level in the
battery battery and the tyre pressures.
- Run the engine until it is thoroughly warm - Carry out the general lubrication
- Lower the hydraulic lift to its lower position - Bleed the fuel system if required

- Pour about 0,2 liter of motor oil into the turbocharger
housing through the pressure oil pipe connection
- Start the engine without racing it
- Test-run the tractor and make sure that everything
works correctly.
After a period longer than two months

- Check the tyre pressures
- Remove the protective covers
- Turn the radiator fan carefully forwards and backwards,
so that the sealing ring of the coolant pump works loose
(it may have stuck to the shaft).
- Wash off any anti-corrosion oil applied to the exterior of
the tractor
- Tension the fan belt/belts (compression belt)
- Remove the valve cover (covers) and lubricate the
rocker mechanism with engine lubricating oil.
- Check the oil level in the engine and transmission, the
coolant level in the radiator and the electrolyte level in
the battery
- Bleed the fuel system of air
- Refit the battery (fully charged)
- Pour 0,2 liter of motor oil into the turbocharger housing
through the pressure oil pipe connection
- Start the engine without racing it
- Test-run the tractor

J. Technical specifications
Specification information for the extra and alternative equipment are in section K, after each extra equipment.
J 1. Dimensions and weights

Dimensions (mm) T180CR, T190CR
With front tyres 460/85R30
With rear tyres 20.8R42
Length 5148
Width 2338
Height to the roof 3050
Height to the exhaust pipe 2910
Wheel base 2748
Ground clearance (front axle) 600/5601)
Ground clearance (rear axle) 600
1) With front axle suspension.
Dimension from the rear axle mid point to the cab roof part is 2113 mm.
Weights kg T180CR, T190CR

With tyres 650/65R42, 540/65R30
Total weight (with full fuel tank and
5990
without ballast weights)
Front axle weight (%) 2740 (46)
Rear axle weight (%) 3250 (54)
J 2. Maximum permissible axle loadings, (kg)

Regardless of any limitations due to the tyres, with standard track widths max. speed.
Tractor T180CR, T190CR

Front 4WD industrial front axle max 40 km/h 5000
max 8 km/h 6200
Rear, max 40 km/h 9000
Total weight, max 40 km/h 11000
-167- J. Specifications
J 3. Tyres (alternative tyre equipment)
Speed Radius
Rear IndexSRI Front T180CR, T190CR Fixed disc
680/75R32 875 540/65R28 X x
520/70R38 825 420/70R28 X
X
520/85R38 875 420/85R28
X x
X
20 8R38
20.8R38 875 16 9R28
16.9R28
X x
580/70R38 875 480/70R28 X
600/65R38 E1 825 480/65R28 X
600/65R38 825 480/65R28 X
650/60R38 825 520/60R28 X
650/65R38 E1 825 540/65R28 X
X
650/65R38 875 540/65R28
X x
650/75R38 925 600/65R28 X
710/70R38 925 600/65R28 X
480/80R42 825 16.9R28 X
20.8R42 925 460/85R30 X
520/85R42 925 460/85R30 X
620/70R42 925 480/70R30 X
650/65R42 925 540/65R30 X
650/65R42 925 600/65R28 X
270/95R48 825 230/95R36 X
480/80R38 IND 825 400/80R28 IND X x
540/80R38 IND 825 440/80R28 IND X x
650/65R42 IND 925 540/65R30 IND X x
18.4-38/14 FOR 825 14.9-28/14 FOR X x
600/65-34 FOR 775 500/60-26,5 FOR X x
20.8-38/14 FOR 875 16.9-28/14 FOR X x
600/65R38 FOR 825 500/65R28 FOR X x
650/65R38 FOR 825 540/65R28 FOR X x
650/75R38 FOR 925 540/70R30 FOR X x
Speed Radius Index (dynamic rolling radius): It is used only when calculating the theoretical tractor speed according
to the ECE/EC-classification.
Always contact your dealer to ensure the right ratio is used. When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the
turning angles have to be checked/adjusted with max turning angle of the front axle on both sides.
IMPORTANT: With larger tyres and the suspended cab (extra equipment), the space between the mudguard and the
tyre may become too small (under 25 mm) when the cab moves down. Note this especially when using the chains.
Then adjust the mudguards (instruction on page 99) to suit.
IMPORTANT: On the traffic tractors 50 km/h the tyre loadings are smaller. Check from the tyre manufacturer's
catalogue/catalog.
J 3.1. Wheel nuts, tightening torque

-Wheel nuts, front 4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
-Rim-wheel disc (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Nm
J. Specifications -168-
J 3.2. Tyre loadings and pressures (40 km/h)
Rear axle Front axle
Max loading/axle* (kg) / Max loading/axle* (kg) /
Tyre Tyre
pressure (bar) pressure (bar)
680/75R32 8750/1.6 420/70R28 4120/1.6
520/70R38 6700/1.6 420/85R28 4860/1.6
520/85R38 7750/1.6 16.9R28 4480/1.6
20.8R38 7300/1.6 480/65R28 4480/1.6
540/65R38 6150/1.4 480/70R28 5000/1.6
580/70R38 7750/1.6 520/60R28 4720/1.6
600/65R38 7300/1.6 540/65R28 5300/1.6
600/65R38 E1 3650/1.6 600/65R28 6150/1.6
650/60R38 3875/1.6 460/85R30 5800/1.6
650/65R38 8250/1.6 480/70R30 5150/1.6
650/65R38 E1 3320/1.0 540/65R30 5450/1.6
650/75R38 11600/2.4 230/95R36 3800/3.6
710/70R38 10600/1.6 400/80R28 IND 6900/3.2
480/80R42 7500/1.4 440/80R28 IND 4000/3.2
520/85R42 9500/1.6 540/65R30 IND 9250/3.2
20.8R42 7750/1.4 500/60-26.5 FOR 8770/2.4
650/65R42 5150/2.4 14.9-28/14 FOR 5000/3.0
620/70R42 9000/1.6 16.9-28/14 FOR 5800/2.7
270/95R48 5300/3.6 500/65R28 FOR 5600/2.4
480/80R38 IND 10600/3.2 540/65R28 FOR 6500/2.4
540/80R38 IND 12600/3.2 540/70R30 FOR 7100/2.4
650/65R42 IND 14200/3.2
600/65-34 FOR 8820/2.4
18.4-38/14 FOR 7750/2.6
20.8-38/14 FOR 8750/2.6
600/65R38 FOR 8750/2.4
650/65R38 FOR 10000/2.4
650/75R38 FOR 11600/2.4
* Two wheels/axle.
Maximum permissible front axle loading is 5000 kg
Maximum permissible rear axle loading is 9000 kg
Permissible wheel loadings can reduce max permissible axle loadings.
When using twin-mounted wheels note the following:

- the loading on these two wheels together can be multiplied by 1.76 of the permissible loading on one wheel.
- using twin-mounted wheels is for decreasing the surface pressure, not for obtaining better side support
- do not exceed tyre size stated for the model in table J 3. when using dual/extension wheels
- the track width of the inner wheels has to be adjusted to minimum value.
- if necessary limited turning axle.
J 4. Track widths, mm
Rear Track width
520/70R38, 520/85R38, 20.8R38, 480/80R42 1714, 1808, 1910, 2012
540/65R38 1714, 1808, 1910
580/70R38, 600/65R38 1808, 1910
650/60R38, 650/75R38, 620/70R42, 650/65R42, 710/70R38 1811
20.8R42 1714, 1808
270/95R48 1500, 1522, 1600, 1622, 1900, 1922, 2000, 2022
680/75R32 1810
520/85R38, 540/80R38 IND, 20.8R38, 20.8-38 FOR, 650/75R38 1676 ,1850
600/65R38 FOR, 650/65R38, 650/65R38 FOR, 650/75R38,
1850
650/65R42 IND
18.4-38 FOR, 480/80R38 IND 1650, 1876
600/65-34 FOR 1900
Front Track width

420/70R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928, 2026, 2130
16.9R28, 420/85R28, 480/65R28, 480/70R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928, 2026
540/65R28 1530, 1626, 1732, 1830, 1928
520/60R28, 600/65R28, 540/65R30, 480/70R30 1535, 1630, 1740, 1835, 1935, 2030
460/85R30 1540, 1630, 1745, 1835, 1940, 2030
230/95R36 1500, 1544, 1812, 1856, 1898, 1942, 2210, 2254
400/80R28 IND, 14.9-28 FOR, 540/70R30 FOR, 540/65R30 IND 1875,1900
420/85R28, 16.9R28, 540/65R28, 540/65R28 FOR,
1865,1890
440/80R28 IND, 16.9-28 FOR, 500/65R28 FOR
500/60-26,5 FOR 1895, 1885
Measured between middle of tyres. Adjusting track widths on page 164.

The standard track widths are underlined. When track widths are adjusted or larger tyres fitted, the turning angles
have to be checked/adjusted with max turning angle of front axle on both sides. When adjusting the rear axle
track widths, check that the wheels rotate freely. Check also when using chains that the distance from the cab to
the tyres does not go below 80 mm. Check further that the distance from parking lights to the outer sides of the
tyres does not exceed 400 mm.
IMPORTANT: The maximum allowed width of the tractor is 2550 mm.
Fixed rims
At the rear, the distance between the mudguards is 1024 mm.

When using the narrow track widths for the rear axle, check that the lower links do not touch the tyres. When required
lock the side regulators.
IMPORTANT: According to EU-directive the smallest allowed distance between the tyre and the cab is 50 mm.
J 5. Engine
Model T180CR T190CR
Designation 74CTA-4 74CTA-4
Type Four-stroke common rail direct injection diesel engine
Turbocharged yes, intercooler yes, intercooler
Number of cylinders 6 6
Numbering of cylinders (fr. front) 1-2-3-4-5-6 1-2-3-4-5-6
Cylinder bore, mm 108 108
Stroke, mm 134 134
Cylinder displacement, dm3 7,4 7,4
Compression ratio 17,5:1 17,5:1
135/(184)/2000 139/(189)/2000
Max. output, kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396) 142/(193)/20001) 155/(211)/20001)
142/(193)/20002) 155/(211)/20002)
132/(180)/2200 136/(185)/2200
Nominal output
136/(185)/22001) 151/(205)/22001)
kW/(hp)/r/min (ISO 14396)
136/(185)/22002) 153/(208)/22002)
670/1500 680/1500
Max Torque, Nm/r/min (ISO 14396) 730/15001) 750/15001)
730/15002) 830/15002)
Max. no load speed, r/min 2400 2400
850 850
Low idling speed, r/min
6503) 6503)
1) Transportboost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and PS boost area, when quick-shift is 2 or 3. The
trans boost and PS boost power areas are equal.
2) Sigma power area, the largest output/torque area, when the power transferred through the power-take-off is large
enough. The symbol is illuminated in the instrument panel.
3) Parking brake is on
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead - push-rod operated

Valve clearance cold/hot:
-inlet valves, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,35
-exhaust valves, mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,35
J 5.1. Engine lubrication system

Engine lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear type pump - strainer on suction side and replaceable
filter on pressure side
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disposable type filter element
Oil pressure at idling speed (min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 kPa (1,0 kp/cm2)
Oil pressure at normal working speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-400 kPa (2,5-4 kp/cm2)
Oil volumes and qualities, see table on page 135.
J 5.2. Fuel system and air cleaner

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel fuel, see the quality requirements on page 136
Injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributor pump with electric injection control
Fuel feed pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric pump
Order of injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-3-6-2-4
Injection pump timing mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on flywheel
Fuel filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper filter
Prefilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper filter with water trap
Cold-starting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating of induction air with an electric resistor
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two-stage, dry element, with blockage indicator
Pre-cleaner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejector
Fuel tank volumes, see table on page 135.
J 5.3. Coolant system
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centrifugal pump, pressurized radiator with expansion tank,
regulated by pressure cap
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 thermostats 79°C and 83°C
Fan, belt driven: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Visco- fan automatically switches on and off according
the cooling temperature (55°C)
-T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan blades 8 pcs, ø 600 mm
Cooling system volumes, see table on page 135.
J 6. Electrical system
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 V, negative ground
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Ah
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120A
Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 kW
Safety start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operated by the parking brake
Electric resistor (engine induction air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,1 kW
Bulbs:
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60/55 W-H4
Sidelights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5W
Rear/brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/21 W
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 W
Working lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 W - H3
Extra front working lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 W - H3
Step light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5W
Trailer hitch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5W
Instrument panel backlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 W - 1,2 W
Cabin lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2x5W
Fuse list, see page 159
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC6.6
J 7. Power transmission
J 7.1. Power shuttle

Tractors have a power shuttle unit, where forward and reverse driving multi-disc clutches are controlled hydraulically
by the electronic (or when required with the clutch pedal).
J 7.2. Clutch
The multi-disc clutches for forward and reverse driving operate at the same time as the driving clutch. The multi-disc
clutch operation is controlled by oil pressure using HiShift- switches on the speed gear and range levers electronically
or with the clutch pedal.
There is no need to adjust the clutch.
The disc numbers, forward driving/reverse driving . . . . 9 pcs / 9 pcs
Friction area, forward driving/reverse driving . . . . . . . . . 1742 cm2 / 1742 cm2
J 7.3. Gearbox
Helical gears, fully synchronized (except range LL), four speed gears with three ranges (LL=creeper range, M=Medium
range, H=High range).
In addition transmission has 3-step quick-shift gear, giving 36 forward and 36 reverse gears. The Power Shift function
is also controlled by the electronic control unit. When required the preprogrammed automatic functions of PS can be
engaged to accommodate different driving situations.
As a traffic tractor (50 km/h, in some marketing areas) and tractors equipped with an electric maximum speed limiter the
drive gears have a different ratio.
Power Shift gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS 700
Gear ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I = 1.0
II = 0.811
III = 0.651
J 7.4. Final drives

Planetary gear in rear axle housing
Reduction ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.571
Flange distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 mm
J 7.4.1. Differential lock, rear axle

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electro hydraulic multi-disc type
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic, with electrical control
J 7.5. Speed ranges

Speed ranges with Power Shift, km/h, at max. engine output speed of 2100 r/min (T180CR, T190CR), the
reverse speeds are about 5 % faster, than the forward driving speeds.
The driving speeds of the 40 km/h tractor equipped with the electric maximum speed limiter are according
to the 50 km/h traffic tractor up to the limitation.
The Speed Radius Index (rolling radius of the tyre) for different tyres, see the table on the page 168.
40 km/h (final drive 700)

Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In-
dex dex dex dex dex
r=800 r=825 r=875 r=900 r=925
I II III I II III I II III I II III I II III
LL1 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.7 0.9 0.6 0.7 0.9 LL1
LL2 0.8 0.9 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.2 0.8 1.0 1.3 0.9 1.1 1.3 LL2
LL3 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.7 1.1 1.4 1.7 1.2 1.4 1.8 1.2 1.5 1.8 LL3
LL4 1.5 1.8 2.3 1.5 1.9 2.4 1.6 2.0 2.5 1.6 2.0 2.5 1.7 2.1 2.6 LL4
M1 2.6 3.2 4.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 2.8 3.5 4.3 2.9 3.5 4.4 3.0 3.7 4.6 M1
M2 3.7 4.6 5.7 3.8 4.7 5.9 4.0 4.9 6.1 4.1 5.0 6.3 4.2 5.2 6.5 M2
M3 5.2 6.4 8.0 5.4 6.6 8.3 5.6 6.9 8.6 5.7 7.1 8.8 5.9 7.3 9.1 M3
M4 7.4 9.1 11.3 7.6 9.4 11.7 7.9 9.8 12.2 8.1 10.0 12.4 8.4 10.4 12.9 M4
H1 8.1 10.0 12.5 8.4 10.3 12.9 8.8 10.8 13.4 8.9 11.0 13.7 9.3 11.4 14.2 H1
H2 11.6 14.3 17.8 12.0 14.8 18.4 12.5 15.4 19.2 12.7 15.7 19.5 13.2 16.3 20.3 H2
H3 16.3 20.1 25.0 16.8 20.7 25.8 17.5 21.6 26.9 17.8 22.0 27.4 18.6 22.9 28.5 H3
H4 23.0 28.4 35.4 23.8 29.3 36.5 24.8 30.6 38.1 25.2 31.1 38.7 26.2 32.3 40.3 H4
Speed ranges with Power Shift, km/h, at max. engine output speed of 2100 r/min (T180CR, T190CR), the
reverse speeds are about 5 % faster, than the forward driving speeds.
50 km/h (final drive 700)

Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In- Speed Radius In-
dex dex dex dex dex
r=800 r=825 r=875 r=900 r=925
I II III I II III I II III I II III I II III
LL1 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.8 1.0 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.7 0.9 1.1 0.8 0.9 1.2 LL1
LL2 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.0 1.2 1.6 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.6 LL2
LL3 1.3 1.6 2.0 1.4 1.7 2.1 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.4 1.8 2.2 1.5 1.9 2.3 LL3
LL4 1.9 2.3 2.9 1.9 2.4 3.0 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.0 2.5 3.1 2.1 2.6 3.3 LL4
M1 3.3 4.0 5.0 3.4 4.2 5.2 3.5 4.3 5.4 3.6 4.4 5.5 3.7 4.6 5.7 M1
M2 4.7 5.8 7.2 4.8 5.9 7.4 5.0 6.2 7.7 5.1 6.3 7.8 5.3 6.6 8.2 M2
M3 6.6 8.1 10.1 6.8 8.3 10.4 7.1 8.7 10.8 7.2 8.9 11.0 7.5 9.2 11.5 M3
M4 9.3 11.4 14.2 9.6 11.8 14.7 10.0 12.3 15.3 10.1 12.5 15.6 10.6 13.0 16.2 M4
H1 10.2 12.6 15.7 10.5 13.0 16.2 11.0 13.5 16.9 11.2 13.8 17.2 11.6 14.3 17.9 H1
H2 14.6 18.0 22.4 15.0 18.5 23.1 15.7 19.3 24.1 15.9 19.6 24.5 16.6 20.4 25.5 H2
H3 20.5 25.2 31.4 21.1 26.0 32.4 22.0 27.1 33.8 22.4 27.6 34.4 23.3 28.7 35.8 H3
H4 28.9 35.7 44.4 29.8 36.8 45.8 31.1 38.4 47.8 31.6 39.0 48.6 32.9 40.6 50.6 H4
J 7.6. Power take-off

Equipped with electro-hydraulically controlled multi-disc clutch and mechanical gear clutch. The electronic control
unit engages the power take-off smoothly. On the rear wall outside the cab there is a remote connection which can be
used mechanically or electrically to stop the PTO.
The power take-off can be ordered with or without proportional ground speed.
PTO alternatives T180CR T190CR

540+1000 x
540+1000 PGS PTO x
1000 EHD x x
1000 EHD + PGS PTO x x
1000 + 540E x x
1000 + 540E + PGS PTO x x
PGS = proportional ground speed, PTO = Power take-off, EHD = heavy duty
PTO ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 r/min at engine speed 1874 r/min
1000 r/min at engine speed 2000 r/min
540E = 540 r/min at engine speed 1539 r/min
PTO-shaft, changeable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ø 1 3/8" (35 mm), 21-splines, extra equipment
ø 1 3/4" (45 mm), 20-splines, standard
ø 1 3/4" (45 mm), 6-splines, extra equipment
ø 38 mm, 8-splines, extra equipment
Lower link end distance from PTO shaft (T-measure, mm)

The length of the lower PTO shaft
links (mm) 21-splines 8-splines 20-splines 1-3/4 6-splines
940 755 755 742 742
T J01
J 7.6.1. Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal revs (km/h)
The Speed Radius Index (rolling radius of the tyre) for different tyres, see the table on the page 168.
The driving speeds of the 40 km/h tractor equipped with the electric maximum speed limiter are according
to the 50 km/h traffic tractor up to the limitation.
T180CR, T190CR (40 km/h)

Speed Radius Index r=800
PS I II III
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000
r/min 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8
LL 2 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.8 1.0 1.1
LL 3 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.5
LL 4 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.8 1.7 2.0 2.2
M1 1.9 2.3 2.5 2.4 2.9 3.1 3.0 3.6 3.8
M2 2.7 3.3 3.6 3.4 4.1 4.1 4.2 5.1 5.5
M3 3.9 4.7 5.0 4.7 5.8 6.2 5.9 7.2 7.7
M4 5.4 6.6 7.1 6.7 8.2 8.7 8.4 10.2 10.9
H1 6.0 7.3 7.8 7.4 9.0 9.6 9.2 11.2 12.0
H2 8.5 10.4 11.1 10.5 12.8 13.7 13.1 16.0 17.1
H3 12.0 14.6 15.6 14.8 18.0 19.2 18.4 22.5 24.0
H4 17.0 20.7 22.0 20.9 25.5 27.2 26.1 31.8 33.9
T180CR, T190CR (40 km/h)

PS I II III
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000
r/min 1539 1648 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.8 0.8
LL 2 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.7 0.9 1.0 0.9 1.1 1.2
LL 3 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.0 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.6 1.7
LL 4 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.9 1.8 2.2 2.3
M1 2.1 2.5 2.7 2.6 3.1 3.3 3.2 3.8 4.1
M2 2.9 3.6 3.8 3.6 4.4 4.4 4.5 5.5 5.9
M3 4.1 5.0 5.4 5.1 6.2 6.6 6.4 7.7 8.3
M4 5.9 7.1 7.6 7.2 8.8 9.4 9.0 10.9 11.7
H1 6.4 7.8 8.4 8.0 9.7 10.3 9.9 12.1 12.9
H2 9.2 11.2 11.9 11.3 13.8 14.7 14.1 17.2 18.3
H3 12.9 15.7 16.8 15.9 19.4 20.7 19.8 24.2 25.8
H4 18.3 22.2 23.7 22.5 27.4 29.3 28.0 34.1 36.4
T180CR, T190CR (40 km/h)
PS I II III
r/min 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000 540E 540 1000
r/min 1539 1648 2000 1539 1874 2000 1539 1874 2000
LL 1 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9
LL 2 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3
LL 3 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.8
LL 4 1.2 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.9 2.0 1.9 2.3 2.3
M1 2.2 2.7 2.8 2.7 3.3 3.5 3.4 4.1 4.4
M2 3.1 3.8 4.1 3.8 4.7 4.7 4.8 5.8 6.2
M3 4.4 5.3 5.7 5.4 6.6 7.0 6.7 8.2 8.7
M4 6.2 7.5 8.1 7.6 9.3 9.9 9.5 11.6 12.4
H1 6.8 8.3 8.9 8.4 10.2 10.9 10.5 12.8 13.6
H2 9.7 11.8 12.6 12.0 14.6 15.6 14.9 18.2 19.4
H3 13.7 16.6 17.8 16.9 20.5 21.9 21.0 25.6 27.3
H4 19.3 23.5 25.1 23.8 29.0 31.0 29.7 36.1 38.6
T180CR, T190CR (50 km/h)

Speed Radius Index r=800 Speed Radius Index r=875
PS I II III PS I II III
r/min 540E 1000 540E 1000 540E 1000 r/min 540E 1000 540E 1000 540E 1000
r/min 1539 2000 1539 2000 1539 2000 r/min 1539 2000 1539 2000 1539 2000
LL 1 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.7 1.0 LL 1 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.8 0.8 1.0
LL 2 0.7 0.9 0.8 1.1 1.0 1.4 LL 2 0.7 1.0 0.9 1.2 1.1 1.5
LL 3 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.9 LL 3 1.0 1.4 1.3 1.7 1.6 2.1
LL 4 1.4 1.8 1.7 2.2 2.1 2.7 LL 4 1.5 1.9 1.8 2.4 2.3 2.9
M1 2.4 3.1 2.9 3.8 3.7 4.8 M1 2.6 3.4 3.2 4.1 4.0 5.5
M2 3.4 4.4 4.2 5.1 5.2 6.8 M2 3.7 4.8 4.5 5.5 5.7 7.3
M3 4.8 6.2 5.9 7.7 7.4 9.6 M3 5.2 6.7 6.4 8.3 7.9 10.3
M4 6.8 8.8 8.3 10.8 10.4 13.5 M4 7.3 9.5 9.0 11.7 11.2 14.6
H1 7.5 9.7 9.2 11.9 11.5 14.9 H1 8.1 10.5 9.9 12.9 12.4 16.1
H2 10.6 13.8 13.1 17.0 16.3 21.2 H2 11.5 14.9 14.2 18.4 17.6 22.9
H3 14.9 19.4 18.4 23.9 22.9 29.8 H3 16.1 21.0 19.9 25.8 24.8 32.2
H4 21.1 27.4 26.0 33.8 32.4 42.1 H4 22.8 29.6 28.1 36.5 35.1 45.5
T180CR, T190CR (50 km/h)
PS I II III
r/min 540E 1000 540E 1000 540E 1000
r/min 1539 2000 1539 2000 1539 2000
LL 1 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.9 0.8 1.1
LL 2 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.2 1.6
LL 3 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.8 1.7 2.2
LL 4 1.6 2.0 1.9 2.5 2.4 3.1
M1 2.7 3.6 3.4 4.4 4.2 5.5
M2 3.9 5.1 4.8 5.8 6.0 7.8
M3 5.5 7.1 6.7 8.8 8.4 10.9
M4 7.7 10.1 9.5 12.4 11.9 15.4
H1 8.5 11.1 10.5 13.7 13.1 17.0
H2 12.1 15.8 15.0 19.5 18.7 24.2
H3 17.1 22.2 21.0 27.3 26.2 34.1
H4 24.1 31.4 29.7 38.7 37.1 48.2
J 7.6.2. Proportional ground speed

PTO axle revs/1 rear wheel rev
Model Gearbox
(Bevel pinion shaft/crown wheel)
T180CR, T190CR 36 + 36 41,03 (9/38)
T180CR, T190CR 50 km/h1) 36 + 36 40,79 (11/37)
1) On some marketing areas.
J 7.6.3. Max. power take-off output at nominal revs of 1000 r/min

(engine speed 2000 r/min), kW (hv)
T180CR T190CR1)
110/(150), 117/(159)1) 114/(155), 130/(177)1), 130/(177)2)
1) Transportboost power area, when the main gear is H2 or higher and PS boost area, when quick-shift is 2 or 3. The
trans boost and PS boost power areas are equal.
2) Sigma power area, the largest output/torque area, when the power transferred through the power-take-off is large
enough. The symbol is illuminated in the instrument panel.
J 7.6.4.Front PTO (extra equipment) nominal revs 1000 r/min corresponding

engine revs (r/min)
T180CR, T190CR
1920
J 7.7. Powered front axle
Hi-lock
Axle type
Industrial axle
Electro-hydraulically controlled
Control, on/off
multi-disc clutch
Ratio, differential 2,923
Ratio, planetary gears 6,000
Total ratio 17,54
Ratio, front axle/rear axle 40 km/h 1,33
Ratio, front axle/rear axle 50 km/h 1,323
Differential lock, electro hydraulic controlled multi-disc differential brake,
yes
simultaneously controlled with rear axle differential lock
Steering arc, adjustable max 55°
Axle turning 7°
Caster 5°
KPI (King pin inclination) 7°
Camber 1°
Toe-in, mm 0-2
Flange distance, mm 1900
J 8. Brake system
Hydraulically controlled multi-disc type brakes with wet discs
Number of brake friction discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 pcs/side
Friction disc diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,5 mm
Brake friction area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4272 cm2/org.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulically, two brake cylinders
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving brakes engaging with spring, disengaging with
hydraulic pressure
- controlled with shuttle lever
- electro-hydraulically controlled
- when engine is not running, the parking brake is applied
Brake pedal free travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-80 mm
Brake valve for trailer brakes, extra equipment
J 9. Steering system
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic, oil supply from main pump via priority valve.
Adjustable, telescopic steering column. One double action
central steering cylinder
Max. working pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MPa
Shock valve opening pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MPa
Steering valve revolution volume:
- Industrial front axle Carraro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 cm3
Steering speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Over 2 rounds/sec. at idling speed
Steering wheel rotates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,5 turn
Steering capacity ±30° with front axle load of 5000 kg on dry asphalt.
J 9.1. Turning circle radius (4WD)

Tyres, with standard track width 16.9R28
Front axle with no suspension/with air suspension, minimum turning circle
5,6
radius, m
J 10. Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system is independent of engine and PTO clutches.
J 10.1. Electro-hydraulic linkage

Linkage versio Ds
Operations
T180CR, T190CR
With electro-hydraulic lower link draft sensing X
Draft control mixing (position control/draft control
X
mixing)
Lowering speed, independent of load X
Transport height X
Drive balance control X
Slip control X
Separate pumps for working hydraulics and low pressure circuit hydraulics which have a common suction strainer. Both
circuits are equipped with a pressure filter.
J 10.2. Low pressure circuit

Pump capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l/min at 2100 r/min engine revs
Max. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,8 MPa
Supplies oil for following functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Shift
Powered front axle
Power take-off
Differential lock
Gearbox and PTO lubrication
Power shuttle
Parking brake
J 10.3. Working hydraulic circuit

Pump capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 l/min at 2100 r/min engine revs with free low pressure
Max. pressure with rews 1500 r/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,4 MPa
Shock valve opening pressure of pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 MPa
Pressure relief valve opening pressure of working
hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 MPa
Supplies oil for following functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering (prioritized), Hydraulic lift, Auxiliary hydraulics, Trailer
brake valve (extra equipment)
Available volume of oil for auxiliary hydraulics with different filling quantities:
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 l
J 10.3.1. Valves for auxiliary hydraulics

Two double acting valve blocks with electric control. Two or four additional valve blocks are available as extra
equipment.
Each quick coupling has its own action button and adjusting knob in addition to the control levers on the right hand
side panel for first four valves, enabling the oil flow to be adjusted independently from the oil pressure. The activation
time of the oil flow can be regulated with the time adjusting knobs. The floating position is situated at the max position
of the decreasing (-) function.
5. and 6. valves have only the control levers and the stepless adjusting screws for hydraulic flow.
The electric joystick controlling two valve blocks is situated in the right side arm support. The joystick includes also the
stepless adjusting screws for hydraulic flow.
As extra equipment, 6/2 valve, which gives two extra quick couplings to the back or front.
Brake valve can be fitted, as extra equipment, independently other valves.
J 10.3.2. Counter pressures when using return connection for auxiliary
hydraulics
1/2 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 10°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 9 bar
3/4 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 50°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 3.5 bar
1 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 10°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 5 bar
1 inch connection, flow 50 l/min, 50°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max. 3 bar
J 10.4. Hydraulic linkage

Three-point linkage Lifting cylinder ø Lower link type The length of the lower links
T180CR, T190CR 100 mm Category 3, quick coupling grabs 940 mm
J 10.4.1. Max lifting force on the whole lifting area, kN with max. pressure 19.6 MPa (200 bar)
Lifting links at additional fastening points 77
Lifting links at rearmost fastening points 72
Lifting links at centre fastening points 67
Lifting links at forward fastening point 63
J 10.4.2. Lifting range at end of lower links, mm

The length of the lower links 940
Lifting links at additional fastening points 620
Lifting links at rearmost fastening points 710
Lifting links at centre fastening points 780
Lifting links at forward fastening point 900
J 11. Other specifications
J 11.1. Markings of gearbox and power take-off

The gearbox and power take off are marked with codes consisting of letters or numbers. These markings are designed
to assist changing of tyre sizes and also the ground speed drive to the PTO. When ordering spare parts it is useful to
provide these codes.
T J02
J 11.2. The capacity of the cab filter
Standard filter (dop test, 300 m3) . . . . . . . > Ø 0,2 mm 10 %, > Ø 1 mm 20 %, > Ø 5 mm 90 %, > Ø 8 mm 100 %
Active coal filter, cab (dop test, 200 m3) . > Ø 2 mm 100 %, from gases > 98 %
J 11.3. Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs
T J04
J 11.4. Code number table for calibrating
The code numbers of the table are used when calibrating speed sensors after changing tyres.
Code numbers with different tyre sizes and transmission types:
T180CR-T190CR T180CR-T180CR
Rear wheel Rear wheel
40 km/h 50 km/h 40 km/h 50 km/h
13.6-38/8N 217 196 420 / 85R38 CON 200 181
13.6R38 GY 216 196 460 / 85R38 CON 191 173
13.6R-38/8M 217 196 480/70R-38 199 181
14.9R-38/8M 210 190 480/80R42 M 182 165
14.9R-38/8N 210 190 520 / 70R34 CON 204 185
16.9-34/14IND 215 195 520 / 70R34 GY 204 185
16.9-34/8N 215 195 520 / 70R34 TA 205 186
16.9R34 GY 214 194 520 / 70R38 CON 194 176
16.9R-34/8M 215 195 520 / 70R38 GY 192 174
16.9R-34/8N 215 195 520 / 85R38 CON 182 165
16.9R-38/8GY 202 183 520/70R-34 205 185
16.9R-38/8M 202 183 520/70R-38 192 174
16.9R-38/8N 202 183 520/85R42 170 154
18.4-34/14FOR 208 189 540 / 65R38 GY 201 182
18.4-34/14IND 208 189 540/65R-38/M 203 184
18.4-34/8N 208 189 580 / 70R38 GY 183 166
18.4-34/IND 208 189 580 / 70R38 TA 183 166
18.4-38/14FOR 196 177 580/70R-38 183 166
18.4-38/14IND 196 177 600 / 65R34 NO 204 185
18.4-38/FI 196 177 600 / 65R34 TA 205 186
18.4R-34/8GY 208 189 600 / 65R38 CON 195 176
18.4R-34/8M 208 189 600 / 65R38 GY 191 174
18.4R-34/8N 208 189 600 / 65R38 IND 192 174
18.4R38 TA 192 174 600/65-34 FOR 205 186
18.4R-38/14M 196 177 600/65R-34/M 209 189
18.4R-38/8GY 196 177 600/65R-38/M 193 175
18.4R-38/M 196 177 620/75R-30/M 200 182
20.8R38 GY 184 167 650 / 65R38 NO 185 167
20.8R38 IND 185 168 650/65R38 CON 186 169
20.8R38 TA 183 166 650/65R38 FOR 184 166
20.8R-38/8M 188 170 650/65R38 GY 183 166
20.8R-38/M 188 170 650/65R38M 185 168
20.8R42 174 158 650/65R42 175 159
230/95R48 TA 201 182 650/75R38 174 158
270/95R48 TA 195 177 680/75R32 M 184 167
340 / 85R38 CON 216 196
NOTE: If a tractor has tyres which are not listed in this table, the code number can passably be calculated as follows:
YxV
X= in which
vmax
X = correct code number
Y = actual code number in LCD-display unit of the Proline instrument panel
V = tractor's constructional speed (40 or 50 km/h)
Vmax = tractor's max driving speed which is shown by LCD-display unit in Proline instrument panel
Example:
In LCD-display unit of the Proline instrument panel, the actual code number is 170. Tractor's constructional speed is 40
km/h. LCD-display unit in Proline instrument panel shows the tractor max. driving speed of 39 km/h.
170 x 40
X= = 174
39
00
K. Extra and alternative equipment
Fieldmaster
K 1. Extra equipment catalogue PTO rear start/stop
Hands Free- function on the phone, telephone holder
It is possible to get extra equipment as described in the MBC-15S
following catalogue. Alternative equipment is mounted in Hands Free readiness
the factory and it can not easily be fitted afterwards. Shuttle lever on the right
Tachograph
Compulsory equipment of the 50 km/h -model: Implement signal connection
Implement control system, ISOBUS
Toughened glass windscreen, hydraulic brake valve of the Monitor fastener
trailer or trailer air pressure brakes
and K 1.3. Power transmission
Finland
PTO shaft 21-splines Ø 1 3/8" (35 mm)
- Front mudguards, wide rear mudguards PTO shaft 20-splines Ø 1 3/4" (45 mm), need to be
Germany ordered
PTO shaft 6-splines Ø 1 3/4" (45 mm)
- Suspension of front axle, trailer air pressure brakes and
PTO shaft 8-splines Ø 38 mm
emergency brake
Front power take-off, only with front linkage
England
- Suspension of front axle and seat belt K 1.4. Brake system
Canada
- Suspension of front axle, front mudguards, wide rear Brake valve mounting 1 : 5
mudguards and emergency brake Brake valve mounting 1 : 7
Brake valve mounting 1 : 11
Austria Air brakes, does not include compressor
- Wide rear mudguards Air brakes Duo-Matic, does not include compressor
Emergency brake
Norway
Together locked brake pedals
- Together locked brake pedals
Slovenia K 1.5. Steering system
- Suspension of front axle and trailer air brakes
Front mudguards for all tyres
K 1.1. Engine Accelerator pedal, rear
Suspension of front axle, order also pressure air set
Pressure air set, with compressor, tank and output of Controlling systems, rear
compressed air Controlling systems, rear + directional valve
Vertical engine air intake for cab side pillar
K 1.6. Frame and wheel
K 1.2. Electrical system
Front ballast weights 14 x 40 kg, not available with front
Rear window wiper and washer linkage and front loader
Heater, engine 230V, DK Extra front ballast weights 490 kg, order also front ballast
Heater, engine 230V, F weights
Heater, engine 230V, Scandinavia + D Belly weights 10 x 40 kg, not available with front linkage
Radio equipment front loader and air suspension of front axle
Radio RDS/CD Belly weights 250 kg, if with air suspension of front axle,
Radio RDS/MP3 not available with front linkage and front loader
Socket for current (max 8A) Solid ballast weight 650 kg (three-point attaching,
Electric main circuit switch available with front and rear linkage)
Socket for cab heater 230V Solid ballast weight 1100 kg (three-point attaching,
Socket for cab heater+ cab heater 230V (not Denmark available with front and rear linkage)
and Canada) Front wheel weights 28" (adjustable rim) 4 x 70 kg, not
Rotating warning light, yellow with 30" tyres, not with front mudguards
Rotating warning light, yellow, right Rear wheel weights 34-42", 4 pcs /80 kg
Rotating warning light, blue Rear wheel weights 34-42", 8 pcs /80 kg
Double rotating warning light, yellow Extra fuel tank 170 l, plastic
Upper headlights Forest guarding for plastic tank
Upper headlights, left hand traffic Fuel strainer
Upper headlights, forest cab Battery holder for forest use
Reverse Buzzer Cover, tyre air valve
K. Extra and alternative equipment -184-

wagon towing device frame
K 1.7. Cab and shields Wagon towing device frame + fixed hitch (Piton Fix) +
agricultural towing device
Air-suspend driver's seat Agricultural towing device, light, without hydraulic trailer
Air conditioning hitch, North America
First aid kit Agricultural towing device, light, without hydraulic trailer
Door ventilation bar hitch, North America+ wagon towing device frame
Rear mudguards, width 2550 mm Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, North
Seat belt America x)
Charcoal filter Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, North
Ashtray America + wagon towing device frame x)
Dry powder extinguisher 2 kg Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching x)
Dry powder extinguisher 6 kg
Customers name sticker x) If with cab suspension and hydraulic trailer hitch, order
Roof with roof hatch also trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching. Hydraulic unlatching
Extra operations, joystick not available with hydraulic trailer hitch + wagon towing
Forest cab with roof hatch, normal glasses of cab device frame combination
Forest cab with roof hatch, polycarbonate glasses of cab,
on some marketing areas K 1.8.2. Three point linkage, equipment
Arm rest, left 2 valves, only one arm rest/cab
Arm rest, left 4 valves, only one arm rest/cab Lift link ram, hydraulic
Fold-out platform for cab left mudguard Top link, ball-hitch (Cat 3/2)
Cab suspension. If with hydraulic trailer hitch, order also Top link, hydraulic, (Cat 2)
hydraulic trailer unlatching. Not available with forest cab Top link, hydraulic, ball-hitch (Cat 3)
and with towing device combination as hydraulic trailer Shields for lifting cylinder
hitch + wagon towing device frame Automatic check links
Toughened glass windscreen
Floor fan
K 1.8.3. Front linkage, front loader ready
K 1.8. Working hydraulics
uplings with direct
couplings with
change valves
uplings with diĆ
K 1.8.1. Towing devices
Additional
available
ol at rear
Hydraulic trailer hitch x)
quick
control at front
Wagon towing device frame, long (height 580 mm)
Quick coup
Towing coupling D (fixed bolt Ø 31,5 mm) to wagon

rect contro
Number of
f
Quick cou
towing device frame
To the
In the
front
valves
Towing coupling A10 (fixed bolt Ø 31 mm) to wagon
rear
towing device frame
Towing coupling A11 (fixed bolt Ø 38 mm) to wagon
towing device frame Front linkage 4 3 x x
Towing coupling C (demountable pin Ø 28 mm, Italy) to
Front linkage 6 4 1 x
wagon towing device frame, not to wagon towing device 1)
with fixed hitch (Piton Fix) Front linkage and
6 3 x x
Towing coupling D2 (demountable pin Ø 43 mm, Italy) front loader ready
to wagon towing device frame, not to wagon towing
Front loader ready 4 2 x
device with fixed hitch (Piton Fix)
Towing coupling D3 (demountable pin Ø 50 mm, Italy) Front loader ready 6 4 x
to wagon towing device frame, not to wagon towing Implement ready 6 4 x 2)
device with fixed hitch (Piton Fix)
Hydraulic trailer hitch + wagon towing device frame x) 1) Without front ballast weights and belly weights
Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device x) 2) 2 valves without quick couplings
Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, light,
Sweden x) Pressure accumulator, extra equipment for front linkage
Agricultural towing device without hydraulic trailer hitch
Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device+
wagon towing device frame x)
Hydraulic trailer hitch + agricultural towing device, light +
wagon towing device frame, Sweden x)
Trailer hitch Euro x)
Trailer hitch Euro with hydraulic extension, also hydraulic
trailer hitch unlatching
Trailer hitch Euro + wagon towing device frame x)
Trailer hitch Euro + drawbar + bracket kit x)
Trailer hitch Euro + drawbar + bracket kit + wagon
towing device frame x)
Agricultural towing device without hydraulic trailer hitch +
-185- K. Extra and alternative equipment

K 1.8.4. Extra valves, additional quick 2) Not available with front linkage and front loader ready
couplings Hydraulic free return 1" quick coupling

Hydraulic free return 3/4" quick coupling
Power Beyond couplings
Combined hydraulics
uplings with direct
couplings with
change valves
uplings with diĆ
Additional
available
ol at rear
quick
control at front
Quick coup
rect contro
Number of
f
Quick cou
To the
In the
front
valves
rear
2 pcs extra valves 4 4 x x 2)
Additional quick
couplings to the
front not
Additional quick together
couplings in the
rear
K 2. Extra and alternative equipment, operating and service

In this section provides the operating and service
instructions of the more complicated extra and alternative
equipment, which need special attention.
K 2.1. Engine
K 2.2. Electrical system

electric main circuit is off. When pressing down the
K 2.2.1. Electric main circuit switch opposite side to the symbol, push down the locking
device (A) to the midpoint of the switch. With this
operation the switch will be locked and the accidental use
is not possible.
When the main circuit is switched off, all the other circuits
are dead, except for the ones to the radio and the clock.
The main circuit is not allowed to be switched off, before
the ignition key is turned into the STOP position.
When the engine is switched off/stopped, the indicator
light of the main current switch flashes to sign, that the
A main current has to be switched off.
DANGER! Do not switch the main current
off when driving because the wheels will
lock causing the tractor to come to a
abrupt halt.
The fuse of the relay in the main circuit switch is situated
on the right side of the engine beside the main circuit
switch.
T K2
The symbol side pressed down = electric main circuit

switch is on. When pressing down the symbol side, push
down the locking device (A) to the midpoint of the switch.
The opposite side to the symbol pressed down =

2 Theoretic ground speed (wheel speed), 130 pulses/m
K 2.2.2. Implement signal connection 3 Rear PTO speed, 6 pulses/round
4 In work (< 1,5 V) / out of work (> 6,3 V)
The implement signal connection is in accordance with 5 Rear linkage position (0-10 V)
ISO 11786 standard. It is situated in the cab on the lower 6 Power supply max. 5 A
part of the right hand side pillar. The signal light for its 7 Ground
operation has been introduced on page 85.
An implement can be connected into the connector, which
can use the following informations from the tractor:
T K78
1 True ground speed (radar), 130 pulses/m
K 2.2.3. Implement control system, ISOBUS
6 6
4 2a
2
3 1
2b
T K88
1. General 2. Instructions for operating

The ISOBUS implement control system is in accordance
with ISO 11783 standard. 2.1. Valtra ISOBUS control unit (TECU) (1) (fulfils
Class 1 requirements)
The ISOBUS implement control system is connecting
tractor, implement and ISOBUS terminal together. The The Control Unit is the brain of the ISOBUS Implement
versatile system transfers information from tractor to Control System. It controls the electric power of the
implement and vice versa. system and the data transfer between tractor and

implement. This data includes: 3 Power supply max. 30 A (PWR)
4 Power supply for electronic control unit max. 15 A (ECU
Power management PWR)
5 Not in use
- Ignition switch state 6 Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)
- Maintain power request. The implement connected to 7 Return path for terminating bias circuit (TBC RTN)
the ISOBUS system can request the ISOBUS control 8 CAN H
unit to maintain power for the next two seconds. 9 CAN L
Speed information 2.3. Implement signal connection (3)
- Transmission speed, tractor speed calibrated from the
For more details see page 187, point K 2.2.2..
tyres
- Ground speed, true tractor speed compared to the
ground. Ground speed measured with the radar (extra 2.4. ISOBUS terminal connector (4)
equipment).
Used to connect the terminal to the ISOBUS system.
- Engine revs
Connector includes both ISOBUS data bus and power
Linkage information supply.
- Rear linkage position

- Rear implement in-work indication
PTO information
- Rear PTO speed
- Rear PTO engagement
Lighting information T K90
- Direction indicators
1 Not in use
- Marker lights (parking lights, side amber running lights,
2 CAN L
number plate lights and instrument and switch lights)
3 Not in use
- Brake lights
4 CAN H
- Tractor rear working lights
5 Not in use
Speed and distance 6 Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)
7 Power supply for electronic control unit (ECU PWR)
- Ground-based distance (radar as extra equipment for 8 Ground for terminating bias circuit (TBC GND)
the tractor) 9 Ground for electronic control unit (ECU GND)
- Wheel-based distance
- Driving direction based on the tyres rotation 2.5. Bus extension connectors (5)
Front linkage and the front PTO (extra Connectors are located behind the cover, inside the
equipment) B-pillar. Normally the connectors are connected together,
but they can be used to connect additional ISOBUS
- Front PTO speed devices to the ISOBUS (e.g. ISOBUS GPS).
- Front PTO engagement
NOTE: If the connectors are disconnected, the ISOBUS
2.2. ISOBUS implement connector (2) and (2a) implement bus is broken and the system will not function
properly. When connecting additional ISOBUS devices,
An ISOBUS compatible implement is connected to check always that the bus will stay intact (the bus
ISOBUS implement control system with connector (2) or extension connectors are connected).
(2a), if the tractor is equipped with reverse driving
controls. Extra connector (2b) is available to the front of
the tractor as an option.
T K91
1 Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)

2 CAN H
3 Return path for terminating bias circuit (TBC RTN)
4 CAN L
T K89
2.6. Mounting brackets (6)

1 Ground (GND)
2 Electronic control unit ground (ECU GND) The ISOBUS terminal can be mounted on the brackets.

3. Service The system includes two fuses, which are located one
above the other beside the accumulator + terminal:
3.1. Fuses 1 Power supply (PWR), implement connection 30A
2 Power supply for electronic control unit
(ECU_PWR),15A
T K85
K 2.3. Power transmission

K 2.3.1. Front power take-off 2. Construction
1. Instructions for operating 3
1
2
T K69
A front PTO is only available with front linkage.

2 T K4
When using the front PTO read the instructions for the rear
The front PTO shaft (2) has a diameter of 35 mm with
PTO.
6-splines.
The front PTO switch (1) is situated on the right side
panel.
The front PTO switch is a two position rocker switch:
- Opposite side to the symbol pressed down: front
PTO is off.
- Symbol side pressed down: front PTO is on. T K5
IMPORTANT: The front PTO shaft nominal rotating speed

is 1000 r/min and the rotating direction is to the left viewed
from front. Check that the implement is compatible before
connecting.
The front PTO shaft nominal revs of 1000 r/min
corresponds to the engine revs as follows:
- on models T180CR, T190CR, 1920 r/min

When using the front PTO driven by Common Rail 3.3. Maintenance every 500 hours
engines, it is not necessary to use the torque limiting
clutch.
3.3.1. Change oil of the front power take-off
The front PTO is equipped with a pump inside the housing housing and wash oil filter
and oil cooler (3) to prevent overheating. The cooling
system is equipped with a relief valve inside the housing
for cold conditions.
3. Maintenance
3.1. General
1. Tighten the screws of PTO after the first 15-25 running
hours. Regularly check the torque of the fixing bolts
and hydraulic system. Contact an authorized
4
workshop, if any leaks occur.
2. When required the oil cooler (3) has to be cleaned so 7
that the front PTO will not overheat.
3.2. Changing belts

6
2 1
5
4
3
3 T K7
2
- Drain oil by opening the hose (1) at the rear part of the
90 Nm
housing.
- Release the filter (2) by loosening the lock ring (3) and
the end plate (4).
- Clean the strainer with diesel and dry with pressurised
air.
- Replace the filter on the contrary way. Check that the
O-ring (5) fits the groove of the rear part.
- Fill up the housing with Shell Donax TX oil (for the
1 T K56 present only oil, using any other type of oil may cause
problems) (2.2 liters) to the level of hole (6). Breather (7)
can be loosened for bleeding. Check that the breather
On tractors with front PTO the flange screws (2) in front of
is not blocked. When filling the tractor has to be level.
the elastic rubber coupling (1) have to be opened and the
spacing ring (3) removed. There will then be enough
space to change the belts.

3.3.2. Check rubber coupling - If you perform this task yourself, note when mounting
the rubber clutch that the pieces (2) are straight (see
picture).
140 Nm 2 4. Specifications
- operating through the switch on the right panel
- 6-splines shaft, Ø 35 mm
- electro-hydraulically controlled, wet multi-disc
coupling
- precontrolled soft starting
1 - rotating direction to the left viewed from front
T K55
- Check the rubber coupling (1) for tears. When required

the rubber clutch has to be changed. It is
recommended that this is carried out by an authorized
workshop.
The front PTO nominal revs and corresponding driving speeds with different gears
Driving speed corresponding to the nominal speed
The nominal revs of 1000 r/min at
Model of the rear PTO (1000 r/min), see the table on
engine speed
page 175
T180CR, T190CR 1920 r/min 4 % smaller

K 2.4. Brake system
K 2.4.1. Trailer air pressure brakes (press air compressor)
15
4
12 9
15 16
11 2 3
8 13A
3A
10 7A
13 7
14
2A 5
DUO-MATIC
T K9
1. Construction of air pressure brakes 16 Tractor parking brake cylinder
1 Compressor 2. Instructions for operating

2 Anti freeze pump
2A Anti freeze device flow valve On the two hose system the trailer is connected to two
3 Pressure adjuster different couplings, which have been marked as follows:
3A Air pressure coupling - Container line (10) - red cover
4 Pressure meter - Brake line (12)- yellow cover
5 Air pressure container On one hose systems the trailer is connected to the
6 Water draining valve coupling with a black cover (11) (brake line) (used in
7 Steering valve for trailer some marketing areas).
7A Bleed nipples The Duo-Matic system has only one coupling (9) which
8 Steering valve for trailer, one pipe system, not in can be connected.
Duo-Matic system
WARNING: When using the trailer brakes
9 Trailer coupling Duo-Matic
the brake pedals must always be locked
10 Trailer coupling two pipe system; container line (red)
together when driving on the road. When
11 Trailer coupling one pipe system; connector (black)
pressing one brake pedal, the brake action
12 Trailer coupling two pipe system; brake line (yellow)
of the trailer is smaller.
13 Trailer parking brake cylinder
13A Trailer parking brake lever The trailer brakes operate also when using the parking
14 Overflow valve brake.
15 Quick coupling for output of compressed air

From the air pressure system it is possible to get pressure 4. Service
for external purposes, e.g. for tyre filling (8 bar) from quick
coupling (15) on the tractor rear part.
4.1. Common points
Compressed air can be also got from coupling (3A) which
is situated above the pressure container by turning the The pressure container can not be welded and drilled.
coupling as far as it will go. Through this coupling the
system can be filled, when needed, by outside The pressure regulator is provided with an inbuilt pressure
compressed air e.g. when the compressor of the tractor is regulator, which operates, if the pressure rises to 12-14
broken. By doing this, the coupling cannot be turned to bar. This can be caused by a broken pressure regulator
bottom. valve, frozen or blocked filter.
When the couplings (9-12) of the trailer are not in use, To stop the flow control valve for anti freeze device (2A)
keep the covers on them. locking, use antifreeze compound some time at least once
a month in summertime.
When the ambient temperature is colder than +5°C, the
antifreeze container (2) must be filled with antifreeze 4.2. Service daily
compound including lubricant. The liquid streaming
valve (2A) has to be in the open position (1 aligned with The water has to be drained daily from the press air
the arrow). system by pressing and pulling the spindle (6) of the
The container and streaming valve are situated on the top water draining valve at the bottom of the container.
of the left axle housing.
WARNING: There must be maximum 4.3. Service weekly or after every 50 operating
pressure in the air pressure system, about hours
7-8 bar (pressure gauge (4) of the system
is located on the instrument panel), before Check the fixing bolts of the compressor. Check and
driving a tractor, which has a trailer with air adjust the compressor (1) belt tension by adjusting the
brakes. adjusting wheel.
3. Changing and bleeding the brake fluid 4.4. Service after every 500 operating hours
When changing the tractor brake fluid, to drain the hoses, Grease the rubber surfaces of the trailer quick couplings
open the bleed nipples (7A) of the control valve (7). The (9-12) with Valtra Calsium LF Grease.
control valve (7) is situated on the right side under the cab Grease the joint of the lever for the parking brake cylinder
on the air reservoir. (13A), with Valtra Grease Universal.
The control valve is situated lower than the tractor brake Check the integrity of the system. The system has to be
cylinders. Therefore it has to be bled before bleeding the air tight, so that after stopping the engine the pressure
tractor brake cylinders. Bleeding is done in the same way does not decrease more than 0,15 bar during 10
from the bleed nipples (7A) as bleeding the tractor brake minutes (2%). When needed repair the leaks.
cylinders, pressing the pedals, see page 162.

K 2.4.2. Fluid brake valve of the trailer
T K10
1. Construction of trailer brake valve WARNING: When using the trailer brakes
the other hydraulic valves must not be used
1 Brake fluid reservoir, common with the tractor brakes because the trailer maximum braking power
2 Brake pedals may reduce.
3 Main brake cylinders
4 Release valve, (compensation valve) through the The trailer brakes do not operate, if only one of the
release valve the control pressure goes to the brake brake pedals is pressed. When the locking of the
valve (6) only when the both pedals are pressed brake pedals is disconnected, the tractor brakes can
4A Bleed valve bleed nipple for right brake pedal be used as steering brake.
4B Bleed valve bleed nipple for left brake pedal WARNING: The trailer brakes do not work
5 Control pressure for the trailer brake valve when using the parking brake.
6 Trailer brake valve
6ABleed nipple of the trailer brake valve
7 Quick-action coupling for the trailer brake
8 Brake cylinders for the trailer WARNING: When the engine is not running,
The trailer brake valve system makes use of the pressure the trailer brakes do not work.
of the tractors hydraulic system.
2. Instructions for operating

3. Changing and bleeding of the brake fluid
The trailer brakes are connected to the quick-action
coupling at the rear part of the tractor (7). When changing the tractor brake fluid, to empty the pipes,
open the bleed nipples of the trailer brake release valve
WARNING: When using the trailer brakes (4) (both brake pedal circuits have their own bleed nipple
the brake pedals must always be locked 4A and B), and the bleed nipple (6A) of the brake valve
together when driving on the road. (6).
The bleed valve (4) is situated behind the auxiliary
hydraulic blocks under the cab and the brake valve (6) on
the right side of the blocks.
First bleed the nipples of the release valve (4A right side
and 4B left side brake pedal circuit) one pedal circuit at a

time in the same way as when bleeding the brake - Trailer brake connection to the tractor with quick-action
cylinders, see page 162. coupling
Then bleed the bleed nipple (6A) of the brake valve, the The brake valve pressure ratio alternatives:
pedals must be locked together. 1:5
1:7
4. Specifications 1:11
- Function with the pressure of the tractor hydraulics,
controlled by the braking valve
- The brake valve control pressure will be led from the
brake pedal circles through the release valve.
K 2.4.3. Emergency brake

If the brakes fail while driving, braking under control
can be achieved by pulling the emergency brake lever
up on the left side of the cab (rear wheels brake).
The emergency brake lever does not stay applied, as it
does not have a lock position.
1
T K11

K 2.5. Steering system
K 2.5.1. Reverse drive controls
10
7
2 3 1
4
8
T K12
The reverse drive controls include the following controls: Using the front controls: Before turning the seat to the
1. Steering wheel forwards position the rear shuttle lever has always to be
2. Clutch pedal moved to the parking brake position (position P). After
3. Brake pedal this the seat can be turned and the front controls can be
4. Accelerator pedal activated using the front shuttle lever by moving the
5. Shuttle- and parking brake lever parking brake on and off. If the parking brake lever was
6. Pre-programming push button of Power Shift for already in the on position it must be released.
power shuttle If the front shuttle lever is in the F position, the parking
7. Lever for adjusting steering wheel space brake can not be engaged with the other lever.
8. Switch for Power Shift, (3-steps)
9. Engine STOP (red indicator light). WARNING: Driving on the road with the
If the light starts to flash, the tractor and the engine reverse drive controls is forbidden. The
must be stopped immediately. Driving can only max. driving speed is 10 km/h using the
continue in an emergency, e.g. the tractor can be reverse drive controls.
moved to the roadside.
Tractors with reverse drive controls have no seat for a
10. Display panel for power shuttle, PS etc. passenger.
WARNING: Using the rear controls: Before
turning the seat to the backwards position Reverse drive control does not operate when driving
the front shuttle lever has always to be forwards if the tractor has reverse drive lockout. If the
moved to the parking brake position lockout does not operate, check the fuse.
(position P). After this the seat can be WARNING: Brake pedal for reverse drive
turned and the rear controls can be control only uses the rear axle brakes of the
activated using the rear shuttle lever by tractor. Trailer brakes are not connected to
moving the parking brake on and off. If the this brake pedal.
parking brake lever was already in the on
position it must be released.

1. Brake adjustment
T K13
NOTE: Adjustment of the brakes of the reverse drive adjusted with nut 1. Finally, if required, adjust the parking
tractor is carried out after adjusting the driving brakes. The brake cable with nut 2.
free play on the rear brake pedal is approx 20 mm and is
K 2.5.2. Air suspension of front axle
1. General
3
2
T K14
Driving a tractor with air suspension on the front axle is load.

comfortable over uneven ground. When driving at high
The driver can observe the air pressure in the suspension
speed control is increased by reducing the pitching of the
system on gauge (1). The suspension system has two air
machine. Stresses are reduced to the driver, tractor and
suspension bellows (2) and two shock absorbers (3). If
implements.
the system also has air brakes the charging valve (4)
The automatic lever control keeps the axle in the same
ensures the air brakes get enough compressed air.
position within the tractor frame independently of axle

2. Instructions for operating 3. Maintenance
3.1. General
For maintenance of the air pressure system see

information regarding air brakes.
Frequently check that all screws and nuts are tight.
8 3.2. Maintenance every 50 hours
Grease the nipples of the front axle mounting (8) 2 pcs

with Valtra Grease Universal. If the front axle is equipped
with a transfer set of nipples (extra equipment) the nipples
are on the left side of the tractor.
6
4. Specifications
- Extra equipment with all front axle types
- Front axle weight of tractor with air suspension is 350 kg
heavier than corresponding model without air
suspension.
5 - Permissible axle loading is the same as with the front
axle without suspension.
- Air suspension bellow 8", pressure extreme values
6 2-14 bar
- Suspension travel by front axle 51 mm
5 - Front tyres turning angles and axle turning angles are
the same as without front suspension.
- Automatic level control independent of front axle load.
7 - 2 pcs hydraulic shock absorber.
8 T K15
When the air suspension is engaged the lock pins (5)

have to be out of their holes.
When you want to disengage the air suspension, the lock
pins (5) have to be placed in lock holes (6). Make sure
that the ring pins of the lock pins are locked in their
places. If the lock holes do not line up when installing the
lock pins loosen the locking wheel (7) and adjust the
suspension height a little to line up the holes.
NOTE: After the adjustment lock the wheel (7) into the
middle point. Then there is enough suspension travel in
both directions when the suspension is operating.
The locking is used for maintenance. In addition
ploughing with a fully mounted (three point) heavy
plough/plow when the front axle load is low, the front
suspension may interfere with the draft control sensitivity
operation.

K 2.5.3. Flexible front mudguards
fitted as standard with a factory mounted front loader. It is
also possible to fit them afterwards to other models.
When turning the wheels the mudguards turn less than
wheels and should be flexible incase they come into
contact with something.
2. Adjustment
As factory fitted the front mudguards adjustments are
correct. When tyres are fitted check with the max
oscillation and turning angles that the mudguards do not
make contact with the side panel etc.
Adjustment screws 1: The pretension (15°) is adjusted
for the mudguards when driving straight to prevent
vibration.
Adjustment screw 2: To limit the travel of the outside of
the mudguard.
Adjustment screw 3: To limit the travel on the inside of
the mudguard. This adjustment has to be done, if the tyre
touches the mudguard. When this adjustment is not
needed the screw is in the maximum position B.
6080-181
1. General
On some tractor models the flexible front mudguards are
K 2.6. Frame and wheels

K 2.7. Cab and shields
K 2.7.1. Air suspension-driver's seat
12 11 10
1
9
3 8
4 5 6 7
T K16
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat Position 1

while driving, increased risk of an accident.
- Locking is achieved by moving lever (A) to right and
upward to lock it in the uppermost position (you will
hear a clicking sound). Using this control the seat can
The seat can be adjusted as follows: be turned 180°.
Position 0
Lock for adjustment for
K 2.7.1.1.
forwards/rearwards (1) - The lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards is
unlocked. In the rearmost positions the seat touches the
cab side trim when turning the seat.
With the lock for adjustment for forwards/rearwards it is
possible to divide the forwards/rearwards adjustment area
(2) into two parts. K 2.7.1.2. Forward/rearward adjusting (2)
Lift up the lever and push the seat forwards or rearwards.

K 2.7.1.3. Lock for turning the seat (3) K 2.7.1.6. Seat belt anchor point (6)
Release the lock by pulling the control upwards. The seat The anchor points for the seat belt are located on the seat.
can now be turned 180° clockwise.
The seat has also the following set positions; locked at K 2.7.1.7. Seat back inclination (7)
10°, floating" 20-30°, locked at 59° and 74° (e.g. can
be used when ploughing). Pull this lever up then set the back rest to the desired
position.
NOTE: If the seat has been adjusted further back than the
lock limits, the seat can touch the cab side trim when
turning. K 2.7.1.8. Arm rest adjustment (8)
K 2.7.1.4. Lock for longitudinal Adjust the left side arm rest by removing the cover and
changing the arm rest place in the mounting slot.
suspension (4)
The right side arm rest adjustments, more details see paĆ
When the lever is set as in the drawing, the longitudinal ge 91 at section D 2.8.9. Arm rest adjustment".
suspension is on. By turning the lever to the front position
(clockwise 180°) the longitudinal suspension is locked. K 2.7.1.9. Lumber support adjustment (9)
Suspension and vertical
K 2.7.1.5. By turning the knob clockwise or counter clockwise the
adjustment (of seat) (5) lumber support can be adjusted in two directions at same
time (height and depth) to the desired position.
Suspension according to the driver weight

K 2.7.1.10. Switch for seat heating (10)
Pull the control lever. When the compressor starts release
the lever. The compressor runs until the suspension has The switch for heating the seat is placed on the left side of
adjusted it's self to the weight of the driver. If the driver is the seat backrest.
lighter than the previous driver, the compressor runs moĆ
mentary and the excess pressure is released. The seat K 2.7.1.11. Place for books (11)
then lowers.
The suspension setting is set even if the tractor is Behind the seat back is a place for books (A4).
switched off.
The seat suspension travel is 100 mm (± 50 mm) regardĆ Head support height
K 2.7.1.12.
less of vertical starting position. The suspension area is adjustment and removing (12)
limited to 100 mm for safety reasons.
Adjust the head support to the desired height by lifting or
Vertical adjustment of seat 80 mm lowering it. The head support can also be removed if
required by pulling it upwards.
The seat has a step-less vertical adjustment of 80 mm
(±40 mm from seat middle point). The upward adjustment
is achieved by pulling the vertical adjustment lever until
the required height is reached (the compressor runs conĆ
tinuously). When the lever is released the compressor
stops and the seat stays at that height. If the seat is set
too high and the upward movement is less than 50 mm
=> the seat lowers to the highest possible position downĆ
wards (automatically).
By pressing the same lever downwards the seat lowers. If
the seat is adjusted down to below the lowest limit (the 50
mm downward suspension is not possible any more), the
seat will automatically raise to the lowest limit.
Sometimes it may happen, that if the driver has sat really
carefully on the seat the previous vertical position is in the
memory and the seat raises up to that previous position.
When the seat is locked at a new vertical level there is
small click" sound.

K 2.7.2. Air conditioning
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 3 2 1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
N K7
Air conditioning operation To prevent seizing of the compressor, use the air
conditioning for a few minutes at least once a month with
Air conditioning is optional equipment. On new air the engine stop control in the off position. Push the engine
conditioning systems freon has been replaced with stop control knob in and allow the engine to idle for a few
refrigerant (R134a) which does not cause environmental minutes.
hazard.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to disassemble
NOTE: When the air conditioning system is in use the cab any part of the air conditioning system.
doors and windows must be closed.
Ensure the cab air filter is clean:
1. First turn the knob (1) towards cold. When the engine is Special safety equipment and tools are required to repair
running, turn the air conditioning temperature the air conditioning system. Contact your dealer if
regulating knob (2) towards cold (fully clockwise). problems occur.
2 Move the fan switch (3) to position 4. NOTE: Make sure that the compressor starts (at low
3. When the desired cab temperature has been reached, temperatures the thermostat prevents the compressor
adjust the air conditioning temperature regulating from starting).
knob (2) to maintain a comfortable temperature.
4. Reduce the fan (3) speed to obtain a comfortable
temperature. 2
4
3
T K18
NOTE: The efficiency of the air conditioning can be 3

increased by keeping the recirculation grille (4) open.
IMPORTANT: If the air conditioning system has not been
1
used for some time, free the compressor before starting T K59
the engine, by rotating the pulley nut with a wrench.
The condenser (1) must be cleaned at regular intervals to
remove dust, insects and other particles.
Check that there are no leaks in condenser (1),
evaporator (2) or hoses and couplings. Check also the
cleanness of the outlet pipe of the condensation water (3).

WARNING: Avoid contact with the A few bubbles appear intermittently, at intervals of
refrigerant. If refrigerant enters the eyes a 1 to 2 seconds. INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT.
doctor should be contacted without delay. The high-pressure side (2) will be warm, and the
Welding work should not be carried out low-pressure side (3) fairly cold. Contact an
near to the air conditioning system as authorized workshop.
poisonous gas may be released. The
maximum temperature permitted in the
Bubbles flow continuously, and when the
vicinity of the refrigerant pipes is 80°C.
refrigerant is almost exhausted a "mist" like flow
If the air conditioning is not running properly, have an will be seen, with no bubbles visible. VERY
authorized workshop check the system. LITTLE REFRIGERANT. There will be almost no
difference in temperature between the
high-pressure side (2) and the low-pressure
side (3) near the compressor. Contact an
3 authorized workshop.
A
B NOTE: Refrigerant must be colourless. If it is brown or
yellow, it must be changed. Contact an authorized
workshop.
The colour of the moisture eliminator/indicator (B) has to
2 be blue or green depending on the manufacturer. If it is
pink replace the receiver drier. Contact an authorized
1 workshop.
T K19
On the receiver drier (1) of the air conditioning system

there is a sight glass (A) and moisture eliminator/indicator
(B).
Sight glass (A) (run the engine at 1500 rpm, air
conditioner at max. cooling for a few minutes):
No bubbles appear at all. EXCESSIVE
REFRIGERANT. The high-pressure side (2) will
be abnormally hot. Contact an authorized
workshop.
The fluid inside is almost transparent. A few

bubbles may appear as the engine speeds up
and down. SUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT. The
high-pressure side (2) will be hot and the
low-pressure side (3) cold.

K 2.7.3. Forest cab
1. General
6080-253
Switch for roof hatch wiper (3).

On the forest cab models the radio is placed on the left
6080-161
side of the roof console.
In the forest cab there are windows on the roof of the cab
3. Maintenance
at the rear end for good upwards visibility. Windows are
made from impact resistant material. Ventilations nozzles
have been added on the roof for de-misting the windows. 1
2. Operating instructions
2
2
2
6080-162
Open the roof hatch by pushing the opening catch (1)

upwards and push the hatch upwards with the handle (2).
To open the hatch fully (for emergency exit) detach the
gas spring upper end from its fastener and push the hatch
fully open. 6080-164
On the roof there is a hatch (1) for maintenance of the

heater and air conditioning (extra equipment).
The cab air filters (2, 2 pcs) are placed outside the cab by
the doors. When closing the doors there is a small build
up of pressure which cleans the filters.
Filter maintenance should be in accordance with the
standard cab filter periodic maintenance schedule.

3.1. Cleaning the polycarbonate windows - Ensure that there is enough fluid in the washer reservoir.
- Never clean the side window using a sharp tool like an
If the cab has the polycarbonate windows (always in the ice scraper.
roof) clean them according to the following instructions for - Never use an abrasive detergent.
keeping the windows bright as long as possible: - Do not point the pressure washer towards the side seals
- Clean the stains by wiping using a detergent or plenty or lead-through seals because the possible detergent
of water. Never rub back and forth. may reach the uncoated glass parts. However the coaĆ
- Never use the side window wiper on a dry window. ted window withstands well different detergents.
K 2.8. Hydraulic and towing devices
K 2.8.1. Trailer hitch
1. Trailer hitch mechanic unlatching
M K12
1.1. Instructions for operating WARNING: Always check, when connecting

any implements, that the eye on the
implement drawbar engages the trailer hook
Lowering correctly.
1. Press the lift/stop/lower button (2) in the lowering WARNING: Trailed single-axle vehicles
position, then use the trailer hitch, inner switch for must always be connected to the trailer
connecting the implement (1), to fully raise the linkage, hitch.
which will unlatch the hitch. When driving with the trailer on a slope, the
2. Move the hitch latch lever (3) to release the hitch, then eye of the drawbar must be of the turning
operate the inner switch for connecting implement (1) type to prevent breakage.
to lower the hitch to the ground. When the hitch is loaded it must always be lowered using
the hydraulic lift.
Raising
1. Reverse up to the trailer and align the hook with the
trailer drawbar.
2. Press the trailer hitch, inner switch for connecting the
implement (1), until the hitch latches automatically.
3. Lower the linkage slightly, to allow the weight of the
trailer to be taken by the hitch latches.
WARNING: When using a trailer make sure
that the hitch latch is locked.

2. Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching 3. Drawbar eye
SFS-ISO 5692
1 T K76
2.1. Instructions for operating
Lowering
1. Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for
connecting the implement (1) by pressing the opposite
side to the symbol.
2. When the linkage is fully up keep the inner switch (1)
pressed down (in the lifting position) and
simultaneously press down the symbol side of the
switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2). T K21
3. Keep the switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2)
pressed down and lower the towing device by
pressing the symbol side of the inner switch (1). IMPORTANT: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with
the regulations and are undamaged. When using other
Raising than the allowed drawbar eyes the guarantee/warranty
lapses and responsibility becomes invalid.
1. Reverse up to the trailer and attach the trailer hitch
with the trailer drawbar.
2. Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch (1) for 4. Adjusting and checking
connecting the implement until the linkage latch locks.
3. After that lower the linkage slightly so that the towing
4.1. Adjusting lifting links of trailer hitch
device is locked and supported by the latch.
T K22
The lifting links should always have a certain amount of

clearance when the hydraulic lift is in its upper position.
However, they must be adjusted in such a way that the
trailer hitch is securely locked by the pawl, even when the
towing hook is loaded.

Before adjusting, raise the hydraulic lift to its upper 5. Specifications
position (do not by use the inner switch for connecting
implement). The transport height selector must be on the - Control, hydraulically controlled
max position (towing hook unloaded). Check the - Max permissible vertical loading, trailer hitch 30 kN, the
adjustment by moving the lifting links manually. max. axle loading must not be exceeded
Adjustment is correct when the link moves loosely and - Trailer hitch height on the lower position from tyre center
when the lift is lowered the towing hook is locked 705 mm
positively by the pawl. Make sure that the spring returns - Trailer hitch height from ground (lower position and
the pawl fully home. tyres 18.4R34) 90 mm
Adjust the length of the links if necessary by removing the
cotter at the upper end of the links and turning until the K 2.8.2. Agricultural drawbar
correct length is obtained. Check that both lifting links
are the same length after adjustment.
The lifting links may be tightened when lifting with the
inner switch for connecting implement.
Correctly adjusted lifting links ensure that the hydraulic lift
can be raised to its uppermost position. The trailer hitch is
locked when the lift is lowered to the point where the hitch
rests on the pawl, thereby preventing unnecessary
loading on the hydraulic pump and overheating of the oil.
4.2. Checking locking of trailer hitch

6-8 mm
T K25
An agricultural drawbar is available as an accessory

(several different models according to the marketing
areas).
The drawbar is used for towing implements where only
part of the weight is on the drawbar (e.g. balers). The
max. weight of the drawbar implement is 5000 kg.
Agricultural towing device:

- One model with the hydraulic trailer hitch and the other
T K23
fixed model without the hydraulic trailer hitch.
- Adjustable to four different distances from the PTO
Make sure that the spring returns the pawl fully home. shaft. In the two outer positions the drawbar can also be
When the pawl is turned upwards the trailer hitch should adjusted laterally ±12.5° and ±25°, max. permissible
move up by 6-8 mm. vertical load is 30 kN (drawbar in forward position) or
18 kN (drawbar in rearmost position).
4.3. Check wear of the trailer hitch Agricultural towing device (North America):
- One model with the hydraulic trailer hitch and the other
fixed model without the hydraulic trailer hitch.
- Adjustable to three different distances from the PTO
shaft. In two outermost positions the bar can also be
adjusted laterally±12,5° and ±25°, max. permissible
min 44 mm vertical load is 30 kN (drawbar in forward position) and
18 kN (drawbar in rearmost position).
T K24
Agricultural towing device light (Sweden):
- Only with the hydraulic trailer hitch
WARNING: When the trailer hitch has worn - Adjustable to two different distances from the PTO shaft.
down to 44 mm at the thinnest part, it has to In the outermost position the bar can also be adjusted
be replaced. laterally ±11° and ±22°, and laterally to two different
positions, max. permissible vertical load is 10 kN
(drawbar in forward position) or 7.5 kN (drawbar in
rearmost position).

K 2.8.3. Wagon towing device 2. Instructions for operating hitch
(Scharmüller)
2.1.Adjusting the height of the jaw
1. General
WARNING: According to Law the driver has
to ensure that all relevant precautions are
followed (lockings) etc.
3 T K39
T K38
Adjusting the height of the mechanical and automatic jaws
In the picture is the wagon towing device frame with fixed happens in the same way.
hitch (Piton Fix) (1) + agricultural towing device (2). The The height of the jaw can be changed by first pulling lever
locking (3) with trailer must be secured. (1) upwards and then by turning it to left. Move the jaw
into the desired height and release the lever when the
locking pins lock the lever into the correct position and the
returning springs have relocated. The jaw can also be
lifted away from the frame by using this same lever.
WARNING: Changing the height of the jaw
is not possible if lever (1) is broken or it is
dirty. The jaw must be locked and secured
every time the height has been changed.

2.2.Connecting to the jaw eye reaches the bottom of the draw gap, the coupling
automatically goes down. The towing pin can also be
lowered by pushing lever (5) downwards.
Mechanical jaw
3
NOT LOCKED
PULLING PIN
LOCKED
T K27
WARNING: The drawbar pin is locked in the

down position when the security knob is
out. When coupling the trailer the drawbar
locking pin must be secured.
T K40
For lifting up the drawbar pin pull up the ring (3) at the top
of the coupling lever (2).
T K28
WARNING: After coupling the trailer, check
that the pulling pin is completely down and
locked. To ensure the allowed pulling angles drawbar eyes with
pulling pins of 30 - 38 mm must only DIN 74054/11026
be used.
WARNING: When using jaws, where the A solid drawbar must be used because of the clearance in
towing pin is equipped with locking pin, the jaws.
make sure, when coupling the trailer, the
locking pin is locked. NOTE: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with the
regulations and are undamaged. When using other than
the allowed drawbar eyes the guarantee/warranty lapses
Automatic jaw
and responsibility becomes invalid.
IMPORTANT: When using the hydraulic hitch with the
wagon towing device, take care that the link of the trailer
does not touch the drawbar body.
T K26
For connecting the trailer to the coupling, lift the puller up

by turning lever (4) to the upper position. When the draw

3. Maintenance and greasing K 2.8.4. Euro trailer hitch
B B B
A
4 3
1
5
1 2
T K29
3.1. Clean regularly:

2
- the main pin (1) (no pressure wash) T K30
- the control unit of the puller pin (2)
- the locking pin (3) (2 pcs) The Euro trailer hitch is mounted instead of the hydraulic
hitch and it is used as a hydraulic hitch, see page 205.
3.2. Grease regularly:
The Euro trailer hitch (1) can be changed to the Euro draw
- nipple (4), grease with Valtra Calsium LF grease. After bar (extra equipment, 2) by pressing down clamp (A) and
greasing turn the jaw from left to right at least 90°, this removing the pins (B).
will ensure the grease spreads evenly to the desired When using the Euro trailer hitch the standard for the
surfaces. drawbar eye is the same as when using the hydraulic
NOTE: If the jaw is rusted e.g. due the fertiliser, do not use trailer hitch, see page 206.
a rust-loosening agent for removing the rust, take to an
authorised Valtra workshop.
3.3. Grease if necessary or every 1000 hours:

- nipple (5), use Valtra Calsium LF Grease
4. Specifications
- Max permissible total weight for the tractor is 8000 kg,
with all jaws
- Max permissible vertical loading trailer hitch is 1500 kg,
with all jaws
- Wagon towing device frame with fixed hitch (Piton Fix)
max permissible vertical loading 2000 kg
- Automatic drawbar, main pin diameter 31.5 or 38 mm
- Mechanical drawbar, main pin diameter 31.5 mm or moĆ
del Italy 28 mm, 43 mm, 50 mm
T K32
When the hitch or draw is not in use, it can be fastened to

the bracket which is situated on the mudguard.

2. Adjusting and checking K 2.8.5. Euro trailer hitch with
Adjusting and checking is done in the same way as with hydraulic extension
the hydraulic trailer hitch:
- Adjusting the lifting links of trailer hitch, see page 206. Euro trailer hitch with the hydraulic extension is like a Euro
- Checking the locking of trailer hitch, see page 207. hitch, but it can also be moved hydraulically in a
- Checking the wear of the trailer hitch, see page 207. longitudinal direction.
3. Specifications 1. Instructions for operating
1.1. Lowering
T K72
- Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for

connecting the implement (1) by pressing the opposite
side to the symbol.
- When the linkage is fully up keep the inner switch (1)
pressed down (in the lifting position) and
simultaneously press down the symbol side of the
T K31 switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2).
The picture shows the horizontal distances of the pulling

point from the PTO shaft and max vertical loadings.
3
T K48
- Then the locking indicator for towing device (3) turns to

the rear position and the locking latch opens.
- Keep the switch for releasing the trailer hitch latch (2)
pressed down and lower the towing device by pressing
the symbol side of the inner switch (1).

1.2. Trailer hitch/draw extension 1.3. Trailer hitch/draw change
When the frame of the towing device is lowered (unlocĆ

ked), it can be hydraulically extended backwards to make
it easier to attach the hitch/draw to the drawbar eye.
T K51
When changing the hitch/drawbar the towing device frame

T K49 has to be lowered down and extended.
When changing the hitch/drawbar remove the fastening
pin (6) by pushing it from bottom.
The hoses of the extension cylinder have to be connected
according to the picture to the couplings of the 2. valve When the hitch or draw is not in use, it can be fastened to
(yellow). the bracket which is situated on the mudguard.
When using the Euro trailer hitch the standard for the
drawbar eye is the same as when using the hydraulic
trailer hitch, see page 206.
5 4
1.4. Raising
- Raise the linkage fully up with the inner switch for
connecting the implement (1) until the linkage latch
locks.
- After that lower the linkage slightly so that the towing
device is locked and supported by the latch.
- Finally retract the towing device totally by pressing the
operating switch (-) (5) of the 2. valve.
- Make sure that the towing device extension is locked by
pressing the operating switch (+) (4) of the 2. valve.
Then the towing device must not retract. Finally press
the operating switch (-) (5) to ensure that there is no
pressure against the locking pins.
T K73
- The towing device extends when pressing the operating

switch (+) (4) of the 2. valve.
- The towing device retracts when pressing the operating
switch (-) (5) of the 2. valve.

7
T K52
NOTE: The towing device extension is locked when the

towing device is locked in the upmost position and
supported by the latch (the locking indicator (3) is fully
upright) and the extension locking pins (7) are down. The
distance of the roll pins from the frame is 2-6 mm.
2. Adjusting and checking

Adjusting and checking is done in the same way as with
T K54
the hydraulic trailer hitch:
- Adjusting the lifting links of trailer hitch, see page 206.
The picture shows the towing point distances from the
- Checking the locking of trailer hitch, see page 207.
take-off axle and the maximum vertical loads in a
- Checking the wear of the trailer hitch, see page 207.
horizontal direction.
3. Specifications
- Hydraulic raising/lowering and extension
- Electrohydraulic locking of the towing device latch
- Replaceable hitch or draw
- Tractor's maximum weight 8000 kg
- Trailer hitch/drawbar is lowered down to the ground
when extended.

K 2.8.6. Automatic check links 2. Floating position
The check links are used to limit the sideways movement

of the lower links.
IMPORTANT: Adjust the check links so that they will not coĆ 5
me into contact with the rear wheels.
1. Adjusting the automatic check links
2
1 3
2
T K45
3 The length of the link's (2) holding chain (5) (with a spring
at its lower end) (4) can be adjusted by changing the atĆ
tachment point so that when the implement is lowered to
the working position, the link will not lock the check links,
but allows the floating position. But when the implement is
T K46 lifted up to the transport position, the check links rise up
to the links and are locked. The check links are then
- Unfasten the closure pin (1) and turn up the link (2) (figĆ locked in the transport position.
ure A). When the implement is lowered back into the working
- Lift up the turning handle (3) (figure B) position, the links come off the check links and the check
- Adjust the length of the check link by turning the handle links are again in a floating position.
(3) (figure C) The amount of float is determined by the length of the
- After completing the adjustment, perform the steps in check links.
the reverse order and finally lock the check link adjustĆ
ment with the pin (1).

K 2.8.7. Front linkage
2 5
8
4 3
2
1
T K87
Front linkage hydraulics is connected to the third valve of The lifting cylinders are double-action types, the valve
the external hydraulic, as extra equipment, in the driving can be adjusted either to double- or single-action
direction the third valve from front. (instruction on page 111).
When the valve is adjusted to single-action the lifting
The third block is controlled:
links do not lower with small load. It is recommended to
- with the first lever (1) (in the driving direction). If on the use the third valve as double-action.
tractor there are the 5th and 6th valves (extra
equipment), the lever (1) controls the block 5. IMPORTANT: Always use the FLOATING position with the
push buttons (2) for implements following the ground
or
contour, otherwise the implement may be damaged or the
- with the rearward/forward movements of the lever (4) if traction for the front wheels may be lost.
the blocks 3 and 4 have been activated to the lever (4)
with the push button (5). The implement following the ground countour has to be
first lowered down carefully using the lever (1) and just
or
after that set to the floating position using the push
- with the push buttons (2 and 3) (green) on the side buttons (2).
panel and the arm rest.
The floating position adjustment instruction for the
The front linkage raises when the lever (1) is pulled
continuous timer position, on page 111.
rearwards (or the lever 4, if activated) or pressing
push-button (6) or pressing the + push button and NOTE: When using the lever the function is always
lowers when the lever is pushed forwards or pressing the double-action.
push-button (7) pressing the - button.
IMPORTANT: The opposite side to the symbol of the
change over switch (8) for the valve block has to be
pressed down before using the external push buttons (6
and 7) for the front lift, if the tractor is equipped with an
extra pair of quick-action couplings for the auxiliary
hydraulics.

3
1
2
1
T K34
Lifting link positions: T K35
Working position - the fastening pins are in the holes 1. 2. Tighten all screws and nuts of the linkage after the first
Floating position - the fastening pins are in the holes 2. 15-25 running hours. Check also that the hydraulic
Transport position - the lifting links are folded up and connections have no leaks.
the fastening pins are in the holes 2.
Ensure, that the locking pins of the fastenings pins (3) are 2.2. Maintenance every 50 hours
in their places when the lifting links are mounted.
When using the front linkage, read the instructions for the
rear linkage. Notice also the following, when using the
front linkage:
- When driving on public roads, with an implement or
without an implement lift the front linkage fully up.
- When you drive on public roads and there is an
implement on the front linkage covering the headlights,
the upper headlights (optional equipment) have to be
switched on.
WARNING: When you drive on public roads,
and there is no implement on the front
linkage, the lifting links have to be folded
up.
IMPORTANT: When using the front loader the front
linkage lifting link arms should be folded into the transport
position and locked with the locking bar into the
attachment point of the top link.
T K36
2. Maintenance
Grease the pins of the lifting cylinders and the shaft of the
lifting links with Valtra Grease Universal. The grease nipple
2.1. General for the shaft of the lifting links is placed on the rear side of
the axle.
The type plate of the front linkage is placed on the front
part of the left frame bar.
1. Check regularly that all screws and nuts are tight.
3. Specifications
- Lifting power, 35 kN
- The diameter of the lifting cylinders, 2 pcs 90 mm
- Lifting range at the end of the lifting links 750 mm
- The ends of the lifting links can be turned up
- Quick coupling hooks, category 3/2
- Front pulling eye as standard

4. Pressure accumulators for front linkage The system includes an LS coupling (3), in which the extra
device load sensing system has to be connected.
When the LS-line hose connector of the implement is
1 connected to the LS line (3) the pump pressure settles to
a level determined by the implement LS pressure. The
pressure in the tractor is determined by a device, which
has the highest LS pressure.
If the external implement (and any other devices) is not
used, the pump line has only a pressure caused by the
free circulation. In this way the pump is not overloaded
unnecessarily, the hydraulic oil does not over heat and
fuel consumption decreases.
K 2.8.9. Combined hydraulics

T K37
1. General
The pressure accumulators (1) are extra equipment for the
front linkage. There are pressure accumulators both for The combined hydraulics enables the use of implements
the lift and lowering and they are continuously working. that need higher than normal flow rate.
When driving the pressure accumulators even out the
pressure peaks coming from the front linkage load. This The system consists of the regular pump and a variable
makes driving smoother and the stresses on the front flow rate pump which is controlled with the LS (Load
linkage are reduced. Sensing) signal pressure.

K 2.8.8. Power Beyond couplings
2 3
1
T K77
T D263
T K57
The switch (1) has two positions:
1 Free return coupling, male quick coupling, 1" The symbol side pressed down, LS-position (Load
2 Pressure coupling, female quick coupling 3/4" Sensing) The front pump connected to load sensing.
3 LS coupling (load sensing), female quick coupling 3/8"
LS -hose connector counterpart (male quick coupling The pump's control valve lets the signal pressure
3/8") part number is 36159800. (LS-pressure) to the controller of the front pump and the
Quick couplings types and sizes are according to the flow rate (in maximum 100 l/min) changes according to
standard. If the implement couplings do not match to the the loading of the auxiliary hydraulics.
tractor couplings, the implement couplings have to be The auxiliary hydraulics can use the additional flow rate of
changed to match the tractor ones. the constant pump and of the front pump.
Instructions for operating with Opposite side to the symbol pressed down,
OFF-position, the front pump not in use.
implement which have LS-function:
The pump's control valve prevents the signal pressure
The greatest possible hydraulic output can be achieved (LS-pressure) reaching the front pump and the flow rate
with the smallest dissipation with the help of the Power is nearly zero. The auxiliary hydraulics has only the flow
Beyond couplings. This is suitable for implements which rate of constant pump (in maximum 91 l/min) in use.
have LS-line for the tractor.

3. Construction
22 11
16
3
18
23
8
9
5
15
7 21 14
19 12
6 20 17
1
10
10a
4
13
2
T K82
1 Dual pump, (constant volume) Additional to the hydraulic pump (1) and oil tank in the
2 Front pump (variable volume) gearbox housing there is, in the front of the tractor, an oil
3 Control valve tank (4) and hydraulic pump (2). The front pump gives a
4 Front tank stepless extra flow rate for working hydraulics controlled
5 Return filter, 2 pcs (under the steps) with a signal pressure (LS)
6 Pressure filter
The pressure lines of the pumps (P) are connected in
7 Priority valve
pump control valve (3). This flow rate of both pumps is
8 End flange (pump end)
lead to the end flange (8) of the working hydraulics and to
9 Breather
the Power beyond couplings (11).
10 Filling hole
10a Inspection hole of the front oil tank The return oil of the system is directed through the filters
11 Power beyond coupling (5) (2pcs) of the return oil mainly to the front tank. When
12 Valve plate (lubrication oil) the front tank is full, the extra oil is directed to the
13 Suction filter of dual pump lubrication of transmission and to the suction side of the
14 Shuttle valve (LS-pressure) pump in the gearbox casing.
15 Non return valve 0,3 MPa (3 bar)
16 Return to gearbox casing (brake casing of right hand
side)
17 Return to gearbåox casing (brake casing of left hand
side)
18 Non return valve
19 Non return valve
20 Restrictor 1,0 mm
21 Return filter (in back frame)
22 Brake valve of trailer
23 Breather line of front tank

4. Maintenance 4.3. Maintenance every 1000 hours
Oil changing/filling is done at the same time as

4.1. Maintenance weekly changing/filling the oil of the power transmission/hydraulic
system.
4.1.1. Changing the belts
4.3.1. Draining
1
2
30 Nm
T K64
The front tank is drained from a drain plug (1) in the under
T K67 side of the rear tank.
4.3.2. Filling
For tractors equipped with front pump, open screws (2) of
the flange (1) between the power transmission axle and
the belt pulley and removed the flange to the front pump
direction, ensuring sufficient room to change the belts.
Changing belts, see on page 144.
4.2. Maintenance every 500 hours
The filters changing is done at the same time as changing

other filters of the power transmission/hydraulic system.
1
2
T K63
NOTE: When filling the oil through the filling hole (1), care
must be taken with cleanliness.
1. Loosen the plugs (1) and (2).
2. Fill with new oil up to the level of the inspection hole (2)
through the filling hole (1).
3. Close the plugs, running the engine and check the oil
level with the oil dipstick of the power transmission and
hydraulics.
4. Add more oil if necessary, following the instructions of
E T K68 the maintenance point H 5.1.3..
Change the return oil filters (E) situated on the tractors

frame.

T
P
LS
M K9
If the tractor is equipped with Power Beyond couplings,

the front tank filling is recommended to be done through
the return coupling (T).
5. Specifications
- The system consists of a variable flow rate pump which
is controlled with the LS (Load Sensing) signal
pressure.
- The flow rate capacity of the front pump is 0...95 l/min at
2100 r/min engine revs with free low pressure
- The max. pressure of the front pump is 17.4 MPa (174
bar) at 1500 r/min engine revs with free low pressure
- The front pump is controlled with the rocker switch
located on the right hand side panel.
- For the correct oil volumes and grade of the front pump
and return oil filters, see Recommended fuel and

L. Alphabetical Index
A Differential lock, 98
Action to be taken during use, 99 Differential lock switch, 64
Adjusting track width, 164 Differential lock, rear axle, specifications, 173
Agricultural drawbar, 207 Dimensions and weights, 167
Air conditioning, extra equipment, 202 Direction indicator, 50
Air filter, 156 Display, 35
Air filters, maintenance, 140 Draft control, 109
Air pressure brakes, extra equipment, 192 Draft control selector, 73
Air suspension of front axle, extra equipment, 197 Drive balance control switch and slip control, 74
Air suspension-driver's seat, extra equipment, 200 Drive controls, reverse, extra equipment, 196
Alternator, 158 Driver's seat, air suspension, 200
Arm rest adjustment, 91 Driver's seat, introduction, 31
Attaching implements, 130 Driver's seat, more detail, 90
Automatic check links, lower links, 213 Driving, 95
Automatic traction control, 96 Driving speeds at different rear PTO nominal revs, 175
Auxiliary hydraulic, controls on RH side, 78 Driving start, 94
Auxiliary hydraulics, 110 Driving, calibrating speed sensors, 48
Auxiliary hydraulics, controls, introduction, 26 Driving, controls on RH side, 63
Auxiliary hydraulics, specifications, 179 Dynamic rolling radius, 168
Auxiliary hydraulics, summary, valves and couplings, 112 E
B Electric main circuit switch, extra equipment, 186
Battery checks and maintenance, 158 Electrical system, extra equipment, operating and
Biodiesel fuel, 136 service, 186
Bleeding brake system, 162 Electrical system, specifications, 172
Bleeding fuel system, 156 Electro-hydraulic linkage, specifications, 179
Brake pedal free travel, adjusting, 161 Electronic engine management (EEM), 16
Brake pedals, 32 Emergency brake, extra equipment, 195
Brake system bleeding, 162 Engine fuel, quality requirements, 136
Brake system, extra equipment, operating and Engine lubrication system, specifications, 171
service, 192 Engine oil filter, changing, 146
Brake system, specifications, 178 Engine oil, changing, 146
Brakes, air pressure, extra equipment, 192 Engine, presentation, 15
Brakes, presentation, 18 Engine, specifications, 171
Equipment catalogue, 184
C Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension, extra
Cab and shields, extra equipment, operating and equipment, 211
service, 200 Euro trailer hitch, extra equipment, 210
Cab ventilation air filter, 151 Extra and alternative equipment, 184
Calibrating speed sensors, driving, 48 Extra equipment catalogue, 184
Change oil in power transmission/hydraulic, 149 Extra equipment, operating and service, 186
Changing selection of driving start- and
F
shuttle-automatic ON/OFF, 42
Changing the parameters of the Proline instrument panel Filter system, 136
LCD display (liquid crystal display), 58 Final drives, specifications, 173
Check links, 106 Flexible front mudguards, extra equipment, 199
Checking the transmission ratio of a PTO driven trailer for Floating-position, 109
use with proportional ground speed PTO, 104 Fluid brake valve of the trailer, extra equipment, 194
Checks and adjustments, 156 Forest cab, alternative equipment, 204
Clutch, specifications, 172 Front linkage, optional equipment, 214
Code number table for calibrating, 182 Front mudguards, 100
Combination switch, 50 Front power take-off, extra equipment, 189
Combined hydraulics, extra equipment, 216 Front roof console, introduction, 29
Common Rail system engine, 16 Front wheel drive, 98
Controls on LH side, introduction, 29 Fuel, 136
Controls on LH side, more detail, 87 Fuel filter changing, 151
Controls on rear side, more detail, 86 Fuel storage, 136
Controls on RH side, auxiliary hydraulic, 78 Fuel system and air cleaner, 171
Controls on RH side, driving, 63 Fuel system bleeding, 156
Controls on RH side, rear linkage, 72 Fuse list, 159
Controls on RH side, rear power take-off, 75 Fuses, 159
Controls on RH side, side pillar control panel, 83 G
Conversion table for common units, 223
Coolant system, specifications, 172 Gearbox, specifications, 173
Counter pressures when using return connection for General description, 11
auxiliary hydraulics, 180 Grease, 137
Cruise control (Cruise-panel), 97 H
D Headland automatics, 67
Detailed table of contents, 4 Headlight adjustment, 161
-221- L. Alphabetical index

HiShift, 64 Power shuttle when driving, 95
HiShift- switch, 95 Power shuttle, specifications, 172
HiTech power shuttle, general description, 16 Power take-off, 102
Hydraulic and towing devices, extra equipment, operating Power take-off shafts, 103
and service, 205 Power take-off, specifications, 174
Hydraulic lift, using, 108 Power transmission, presentation, 16
Hydraulic linkage, specifications, 180 Power transmission, specifications, 172
Hydraulic motor, 130 Powered front axle,Technical specifications, 178
Hydraulic system, presentation, 20 Pre-programming switch of Power Shift, 34
Hydraulic system, specifications, 179 Pressure accumulators for front linkage, extra
equipment, 216
I Pressure filters, transmission/hydraulic, 148
Illustration, 11 Programming of Power Shift, 96
Implement control system, ISOBUS, extra equipment, 187 Proline instrument panel LCD display setting switch, 58
Implement signal connection, extra equipment, 187 Proline-instrument panel, 52
Indicator lights on instrument panel, 53 Proportional ground speed, specifications, 177
Instrument panel, introduction, 23 PTO control lever, 75
Instrument panel, more detail, 33 PTO switch, 76
Instruments and controls, introduction, 22
Instruments and controls, more detail, 32 Q
Quality requirements of engine fuel, 136
L Quick couple ball joints for lower links, 107
LCD-display, 54 Quick couplings for lower links, 106
LCD-display unit in Proline instrument panel, 54
Lift/stop/lower switch, 73 R
Lifting links, 105 Radar, 74
Lifting links of trailer hitch, adjusting, extra equipment, 206 Range lever, 63
Light switch, 50 Rear linkage, controls on RH side, 72
Linkage/ Power take-off, controls, introduction, 25 Rear mudguards adjustment, 99
Low pressure circuit, specifications, 179 Rear power take-off, controls on RH side, 75
Lowering speed control, 109 Rear PTO engaging speed, 45
Lowering speed selector, 73 Rear side controls, introduction, 28
Recommended fuel and lubricants, 135
M Relays, RH side panel, 159
Main table of contents, 2 Release wire setting of quick couplings for lower links, 107
Maintenance, 134 Resetting driving speed / tyre/tire parameters, 44
Maintenance - cooling system, 157 Resetting tyre/tire parameters, 44
Maintenance daily, 141 Return coupling, 129
Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly, 149 Reverse drive controls, extra equipment, 196
Maintenance every 2000 hours (or every other year), 154 Right hand side roof console, introduction, 30
Maintenance every 500 hours, 146 Right- side panel / arm rest controls, driving,
Maintenance schedule, 137 introduction, 24
Maintenance weekly, 142 Right- side panel / arm rest controls, illustrations, 24
Mudguards adjustment, 99 Right-side panel / arm rest controls, more details, 63
Right-side panel, other controls, introduction, 28
O Roof console on the front side, 88
Oil changing in power transmission/hydraulic, 149 Roof console on the right side, 89
Oil recommendations according to outdoor Roof fan, 89
temperature, 135
Operating instructions, 101 S
Other controls, controls on RH side, 85 Safety precautions, 7
Other controls, introduction, 31 Safety rules, 7
Other controls, more detail, 92 Scharmüller, wagon towing device, extra equipment, 208
Serial numbers of your tractors, 1
P Service, 134
Parking brake, adjusting, 162 Service function codes, 36
Pedals, introduction, 22 Setting parameters, 42
Pedals, more detail, 32 Side pillar control panel, controls on RH side, 83
Periodic maintenance, 140 Side pillar controls, introduction, 27
Permissible axle loadings, 167 Sigma Power, 103
Ploughing, 131 Slip control, 74
Ploughing with a fully mounted plough, 131 Speed gear lever, 63
Ploughing with a reversible plough, 132 Speed Radius Index, 168
Ploughing with a semi-mounted plough, 132 Speed ranges, 173
Ploughing with Autocontrol, brief summary, 133 Speed sensors, calibrating, 48
Points to note during the first 50 hours running, 93 Starter switch, 51
Position control, 108 Starting and running, 93
Position control knob , 73 Starting gas, 94
Power Beyond couplings, extra equipment, 216 Starting the engine, 93
Power Shift, 63 Steering angle adjustment, 4WD, 163
Power Shift, driving, 96 Steering system, extra equipment, operating and
Power Shift, general description, 17 service, 196
Power Shift, pre-programming switch, 34 Steering system, presentation, 19
Power Shift-automatics, 97 Steering system, specifications, 178
L. Alphabetical index -222-

Stopping, 99
Storing the tractor, 165
Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs, 181
Summary, valves and couplings, auxiliary hydraulic
valves, 112
Switch for 4WD, 64
Switch for automatic traction control, 66
Switch for Power Shift-automatics, 65
T
Technical specifications, 167
Temperature control, 89
Three-point linkage, 105
Tipping a trailer, 112
To the operator, 3
Toe-in, checking and adjusting, 162
Towing the tractor, 100
Track widths, 170
Trailer, 104
Trailer hitch, 205
Trailer hitch Euro, extra equipment, 210
Trailer hitch hydraulic unlatching, 206
Trailer hitch mechanic unlatching, 205
Trailer socket, 104
Transport height, 109
Transport height selector, 73
Turning circle radius, 178
Tyre loadings and pressures, 169
Tyres (alternative tyre equipment), 168
U
U-Pilot, 67
Upper link using, 132
Using the hydraulic lift, 108
V
Valve functions,Auxiliary hydraulic valves, 110
W
Wagon towing device (Scharmüller), extra equipment, 208
Welding, 158
Wheel nuts tightening torques, 168
Working hydraulic circuit, specifications, 179
-223- L. Alphabetical index

Conversion table for common units
Metric Weights and Measures with Customary Equivalents
Length
1 millimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03937 inch
1 centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.3937 inch
1 meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 39.37 inches
= 3.281 feet
= 1.094 yards
1 kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.6214 mile
Area
1 square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.155 square inch
1 square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.196 yards
= 10.764 square feet
1 hectare (10,000 m2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.471 acres
1 square kilometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.386 square mile
= 247.1 acres
Capacity or volume
1 cubic centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.061 cubic inch
1 cubic meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.315 cubic feet
= 1.308 cubic yards
1 milliliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0352 fluid ounce (U.K.)
= 0.0338 fluid ounce (U.S.)
1 liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.20 fluid ounces (U.K.)
= 1.7598 pints (U.K.)
= 0.8799 quart (U.K.)
= 0.220 gallon (U.K.)
= 0.0275 bushel (U.K.)
= 0.110 peck (U.K.)
= 33.81 fluid ounces (U.S.)
= 2.1134 pints (U.S.)
= 1.0567 quarts (U.S.)
= 0.2642 gallon (U.S.)
= 0.0284 bushel (U.S.)
= 0.1135 peck (U.S.)
= 0.908 dry quart (U.S.)
1 kiloliter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 219.97 gallons (U.K.)
= 264.17 gallons (U.S.)
Weight
1 gram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.03527 ounce (avdp.)
1 kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 35.274 ounces (avdp.)
= 2.205 pounds (avdp.)
1 metric ton (1,000 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.984 ton (long)
= 1.102 tons (short)
= 2204.6 pounds (avdp.)
Volume per unit area
1 liter/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.089 gallon (U.K.)/acre
= 0.107 gallon (U.S.)/acre
Weight per unit area
1 kilogram/square centimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 pounds (avdp.)/square inch
1 kilogram/hectare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.892 pound (avdp.)/acre
Area per unit weight
1 square centimeter/kilogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 square inch/pound (avdp.)
Temperature conversion formulas
Centigrade (Celsius) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 5/9 (Fahrenheit -32)
Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9/5 centigrade (Celsius +32)
Illumination
1 foot-candle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 10.764 lux
1 lux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 foot-candle
-224-
Travel speed
1 km/h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.62 mph
1 mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.61 km/h
Drawbar pull
1 kN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 224.81 lbf
1 lbf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.4482 N
Power (identified by such terms as crankshaft power, pto power,
belt power, drawbar power; indicating the point at which the
measurement was taken)
1 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.3596 hp
1 hp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7355 kW
Engine torque
1 Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.738 lbf ft
1 lbf ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.356 Nm
Fuel economy
1 kg/kWh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.278 kg/MJ
= 1.644 lb/hph
1 lb/hph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.169 kg/MJ
= 0.608 kg/kWh
Engine displacement
1 liter (dm3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 61.024 in3
100 in3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.6387 liters (dm3)
Hydraulic pump pressure
1 MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 145.037 psi
1000 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 MPa
Tyre/Tire pressure
100 kPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.5037 psi
1 psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.8948 kPa
When conversions are made the results should be rounded to a meaningful number of digits, relative to the accuracy of
original measurements. Values for weights and volumes are based on pure water at 4°C. under 760 mm of atmospheric
pressure.
For additional conversion factors, or for greater accuracy, refer to National Bureau of Standards Misc. Publ. 233 or to the
Handbook of Chemistry and Physics.
Customary Weights and Measures with Metric Equivalents

Length
1 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2.54 centimeters
1 foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 30.48 centimeters
= 0.3048 meter
1 yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9144 meter
1 mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1609.34 meters
= 1.609 kilometers
Area
1 square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 6.452 square centimeters
1 square foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0929 square meter
1 square yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.8361 square meter
1 acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4047 hectare
1 square mile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 259.0 hectares
Capacity or volume
1 cubic inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 16.387 cubic centimeters
1 cubic foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0283 cubic meter
1 cubic yard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.7646 cubic meter
1 fluid ounce (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 28.409 milliliters
= 0.0284 liter
1 fluid ounce (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 29.586 milliliters
= 0.0296 liter
1 liquid pint (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0568 liter
1 liquid pint (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.4732 liter
-225-
1 liquid quart (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.1365 liters
1 liquid quart (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.9463 liter
1 gallon (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 4.5461 liters
1 gallon (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 3.7853 liters
1 bushel (U.K.) = 4 pecks (U.K.) = 8 gallons (U.K.) . . . . = 36.3687 liters
1 bushel (U.S.) = 4 pecks (U.S.) = 32 dry quarts (U.S.) . = 35.2391 liters
1 peck (U.K.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.0922 liters
1 peck (U.S.) = 8 dry quarts (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 8.8098 liters
1 dry quart (U.S.) = 1 1/6 liquid quarts (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . = 1.1012 liters
Weight
1 ounce (avdp.) = 28.50 grams
1 pound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 453.592 grams
= 0.4536 kilogram
1 ton (short) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.907 ton (metric)
1 ton (long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.016 ton (metric)
= 1016.05 kilograms
Volume per unit area
1 gallon (U.K.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 11.234 liters/hectare
1 gallon (U.S.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 9.354 liters/hectare
Weight per unit area
1 pound (avdp.)/square inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 0.0703 kilogram/square centimeter
1 pound (avdp.)/acre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 1.121 kilograms/hectare
Area per unit weight
1 square inch/pound (avdp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 14.22 square centimeters/kilogram
-226-
Brief summary
Capacity data dm3 (litres) Rear axle Front axle
PresĆ PresĆ
Tyre sure Tyre sure
Engine oil with filter: bar bar
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 680/75R32 1.6 420/70R28 1.6
Engine cooling system: 520/70R38 1.6 420/85R28 1.6
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 520/85R38 1.6 16.9R28 1.6
Power transmission/hydraulic system (filling 20.8R38 1.6 480/65R28 1.6
quantity/available volume of oil): 540/65R38 1.4 480/70R28 1.6
min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 / 30 580/70R38 1.6 520/60R28 1.6
max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 / 40 600/65R38 1.6 540/65R28 1.6
Combined hydraulics 600/65R38 E1 1.6 600/65R28 1.6
650/60R38 1.6 460/85R30 1.6
- front tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
- return filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 650/65R38 1.6 480/70R30 1.6
650/65R38 E1 1.0 540/65R30 1.6
Powered industrial front axle:
650/75R38 2.4 230/95R36 3.6
- differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
710/70R38 1.6 400/80R28 IND 3.2
- hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 x 1,5
480/80R42 1.4 440/80R28 IND 3.2
Fuel tank:
520/85R42 1.6 540/65R30 IND 3.2
- T180CR, T190CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 20.8R42 1.4 500/60-26.5 FOR 2.4
- Extra fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 650/65R42 2.4 14.9-28/14 FOR 3.0
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,3 620/70R42 1.6 16.9-28/14 FOR 2.7
Washer fluid reservoir (common for front and rear 270/95R48 3.6 500/65R28 FOR 2.4
windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 480/80R38 IND 3.2 540/65R28 FOR 2.4
540/80R38 IND 3.2 540/70R30 FOR 2.4
650/65R42 IND 3.2
Technical data 600/65-34 FOR 2.4
18.4-38/14 FOR 2.6
Hydraulic system pressure:
20.8-38/14 FOR 2.6
Low pressure circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,8 MPa 600/65R38 FOR 2.4
Working hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,4 MPa 650/65R38 FOR 2.4
(With tyres shown in Technical Specifications) 650/75R38 FOR 2.4
Total weight of tractor, kg
T180CR, T190CR 5990
Max height of tractor, mm

T180CR, T190CR 3050
Tightening torques, wheel nuts:

- wheel nuts, front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
- wheel nuts, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Nm
- rim-wheel disc (front and rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Nm
-227-
www.valtra.com
Taking care
of your tractor throughout
its entire service life.
Original Valtra warranty filters
- compare the structure, think of the risks
The centre tube, like the other The bypass valve has a sturdy
parts, has been manufactured structure and will open only when
according to a quality standard in necessary.
order to withstand the pressures Pirate The bypass filters opening vaĆ
it is subjected to. filter lues do not match the opening
values of Valtra. Dirty oil gets
Pirate Material quality is highly variĆ into the circulation.
filter able and the centre tube is
poorly designed. The filter The tested filter material is durable
may give out in extreme in all conditions, and reinforced
conditions. with a supporting mesh.
The tested seals endure
corrosive impurities and keep the Pirate The material is incorrectly
oil where it should be. filter creased and there is no supĆ
porting mesh. The filter material
Pirate The filter has been manuĆ may give out and disintegrate
filter factured according to no into the oil circulation.
standards and has not been
tested in Valtra working
condition.
-228-
Ref no 39 821 21 5 (10/2006)
Printed in Finland by Kopijyvä
English
Valtra Inc.
FIN--- 44200 Suolahti, Finland Copyright E 2005 by Valtra Inc. All rights reserved.
Tel. +358 20 45501
www.valtra.com

Manual Operare Valtra T180-t190 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Operare Valtra T180-t190 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Operare Valtra T180-t190 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the manual about?

What is the manual about?

What maintenance tasks are described?

What maintenance tasks are described?

Operator’s manual T180CR, T190CR

Operator's manual T180CR, T190CR

Serial numbers of your tractors

Type plate EEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front axle number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A Detailed table of contents ...................... 4-6

D Instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 92

E Starting and running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 - 100

F Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 - 133

G Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 - 139

H Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 - 155

I Checks and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 - 166

J Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 - 183

K Extra and alternative equipment . . . . . . . . 184 - 220

L Alphabetical index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 - 223

VALTRA T180CR, T190CR

A. Detailed table of contents -4-

-5- A. Detailed table of contents

A. Detailed table of contents -6-

-7- B. Safety precautions

WARNING: When using the trailer always

B. Safety precautions -8-

27 Mobile phones - Mobile phones may cause failure for

28 Radar - DO NOT to go under a tractor which has

-9- B. Safety precautions

35 Auxiliary hydraulics, STOP-switch - Pressing the

B. Safety precautions -10-

C 1. Illustration, VALTRA T180CR, T190CR

-11- C. General description

Left side of tractor:

17 Engine oil draining plug

C. General description -12-

Right side of tractor: 5 Cooling system bleed screw

9 Common washer fluid reservoir (windscreen and rear 11 Battery

-13- C. General description

Rear view of tractor: 8 Remote (Emergency) power take off stop

C. General description -14-

Front view of tractor:

illuminated in the instrument panel.

-15- C. General description

C 4.1. HiTech power shuttle

C. General description -16-

C 4.3. Power Shift

-17- C. General description

The PTO rotating speed is selected with a lever, which can

The control unit of the gearbox also controls the function

C. General description -18-

The tractor has a hydrostatic steering system so that

-19- C. General description

The capacity of the low pressure circuit pump: Pre-programmed functions:

C. General description -20-

The tractor has two electrically controlled valves for

-21- C. General description

D. Instruments and controls -22-

-23- D. Instruments and controls

- Lifting link position of front linkage - Maintenance schedule